Help Centre

Guides and answers tailored to your role. Click any question to expand the answer.

Quick Access Shortcuts

Shift+? Open contextual helpCtrl+K Command paletteEsc Close panels

Jump to Section

Getting Started & DashboardVendorsFindingsAssetsRisk ControlsHow Risk Scoring WorksDomain Weight ConfigurationComplianceAssessmentsVendor Self-AssessmentsIncidentsThreat IntelligenceReportsSettings, Team & IntegrationsSSO IdP Group MappingsPer-org SSOAudit LogGovernance & RACIKeyboard Shortcuts & TroubleshootingProduct catalogueVendor Technology DetailVendor Portal — Products & LifecycleVendor Portal — Claim Vendor RecordVendor Threat IntelligenceAccept Team InvitationAccept Vendor InvitationAccess DeniedAccessibility StatementAccountAccount SettingsAdd New VendorAgent RulesAPI Key RevealAPI KeysAPI ReferenceAssessment DetailAssessment HistoryAssessment Template DetailAssessment Template LibraryAsset DetailAttack Surface GraphAuthenticated Vendor FindingsAuthenticated Vendor ProfileBCP Testing (CPS 230)Billing & PlanChainShield for MSPsConcentration RiskConfirming Your InviteContact UsCookie PolicyCreate AccountCreate Assessment TemplateCustomer SettingsCVE Vulnerability DetailData ResidencyData Subject Request PortalEdit VendorExcluded VendorsExit Plan (CPS 230)Finding DetailFinding Detail (Vendor Portal)Findings TriageFourth Parties (Sub-contractors)How Do Questionnaire Responses Affect My Vendor's Score?Incident PlaybooksIntegrationsMaterial Service Provider RegisterMaterial SP RegisterMFA SetupModulesMSP Enquiry FormNotification PreferencesOnboardingPortal ContactsPricingPrivacy & Data HandlingPrivacy PolicyProduct & Technology InventoryQuestionnaire Response DetailRegulatory FeedRemediationRemediation ActionsReport BrandingReset PasswordSBOM Upload PortalScenario SimulatorSCIM 2.0 ProvisioningSecurity OverviewSecurity SettingsSelf-Assessment FormSet New PasswordSIEM IntegrationSign InSSO Domain ClaimingTeam & Permission ManagementTechnology InventoryTemplate BuilderTerms of ServiceThreat IntelligenceTwo-Factor AuthenticationUpload Evidence to Questionnaire AnswerVendor Agent ActivityVendor Agent ContextVendor AssetsVendor Business CaseVendor CertificationsVendor ComparisonVendor ComplianceVendor ComplianceVendor ContactsVendor ContactsVendor ContractsVendor Dashboard (Token)Vendor DetailVendor FindingsVendor FindingsVendor HealthVendor IncidentsVendor OverviewVendor PortalVendor Portal EntryVendor Portal HomeVendor ProductsVendor QuestionnairesVendor Risk BreakdownVendor ScansVendor TechnologiesVendor VulnerabilitiesVulnerabilitiesWhat Does DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE Mean?Why Can't I Change Scan Frequency for a Vendor?Why Is Industry Sector Set Automatically Now?Your Questionnaire Responses

Getting Started & Dashboard

Your risk posture at a glance. The dashboard surfaces the metrics that matter most so you can prioritise action.

What the composite risk score means

The composite score (0–100) is a weighted average across all your vendors. It factors in finding severity, business criticality, and data sensitivity. A lower score is better. If the score increases after a scan, new findings were discovered — review them in the Findings page.

Dates and timezones

All dates on this page reflect your organisation's configured timezone. If dates appear incorrect, check that your timezone is set correctly in Settings. If your organisation has not configured a timezone, your browser timezone is used.

Three dashboard trend charts explained

The dashboard displays three distinct trend charts: Findings Trend (count of open findings by severity over time), Vulnerability Trend (CVE exposure broken by severity and showing KEV and high-EPSS overlays), and Risk Score Trend (composite risk score and per-domain scores over time). Findings Trend answers "how many work items are open?", Vulnerability Trend answers "what's our CVE exposure?", and Risk Score Trend answers "is our weighted composite risk improving or worsening?" All three use 30/90/180-day period selectors.

Findings trend chart

Shows the count of open findings grouped by severity (Critical, High, Medium, Low) over time. Use this to track whether your remediation efforts are keeping pace with new discoveries. If the area above the chart is growing, new findings are accumulating faster than you can resolve them.

Vulnerability trend chart

Shows the count of open CVE vulnerabilities in your vendor portfolio, grouped by severity (Critical >=9.0 CVSS, High 7.0-8.9, Medium 4.0-6.9, Low <4.0). Two overlay lines highlight higher-risk subsets: KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities from CISA, actively exploited in the wild) and High-EPSS (exploitation probability >=0.1). Use this to focus on actively exploited vulnerabilities requiring urgent patching.

Risk score trend chart

Shows your composite risk score and individual domain scores over time. Seven coloured lines represent the 7 risk domains; a bolder line shows your overall composite score. Use this to track long-term risk trajectory. A rising composite line suggests your vendors are becoming riskier or your exposure is growing; a falling line indicates successful remediation.

Understanding the risk domain radar

The radar chart visualises your organisation’s average risk across 7 domains: Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, and Geopolitical & Sovereign. Each axis shows the domain score (0–100) averaged across all vendors, with the domain weight shown beneath. A larger shaded area means higher risk exposure. Focus remediation on domains extending furthest from the centre — click any axis label to jump to the Findings page filtered to that domain’s controls.

Understanding the risk migration chart

The risk migration chart shows how your vendors move between risk tiers (Critical, High, Medium, Low) over time. Ribbons connecting tiers across time periods indicate vendor transitions — improving (moving to a lower tier) or worsening (moving to a higher tier). Use the period selector (30d/90d/180d) to adjust the time window. If you see many vendors moving toward Critical or High, investigate the underlying findings driving those score increases.

Assessment pipeline and vendor aging

The Assessment Pipeline widget shows how many assessments are in each stage: Draft, Sent, Viewed, In Progress, and Completed. Click any status to review vendors in that stage and take action (send reminders, follow up on stale assessments). The Vendor Assessment Aging widget highlights vendors that are overdue for assessment based on their resolved frequency (considering regulatory cadence, org policy, and vendor criticality). Overdue vendors appear in red — prioritise these first. Due-soon vendors in amber should be scheduled this week. Configure default cadences in Settings › Assessment Policy.

What to do first

The "Needs your attention" hero section at the top of the dashboard surfaces the single most urgent signal — scan pipeline failures, overdue regulatory notifications, critical findings, stale scans, or other attention items ranked by priority. Click the hero card or its CTA to act on it immediately. The attention rail below lists the remaining signals with non-zero counts.

Needs Attention card

The "Needs Attention" card aggregates four important signals in one place: vendors with stale scans (not scanned within your configured scan interval, default 30 days), contracts expiring within 30 days, pending assessments awaiting vendor response, and findings assigned to you. Each count is colour-coded and links to the relevant filtered view. If all counts are zero, the card is hidden. Use this card as your daily triage checklist — it highlights the most time-sensitive actions across your vendor portfolio.

Onboarding checklist

New users see a Getting Started checklist on the dashboard for the first 7 days after account creation. It tracks five setup steps: adding a vendor, running a scan, reviewing findings, configuring regulatory frameworks, and inviting team members. The checklist auto-dismisses when all steps are complete, or you can dismiss it manually. Progress is saved per-browser.

Vendor limit and upgrade prompts

If your organisation has a vendor limit (set by your plan tier), you will see a warning banner on the Vendors page when you reach 80% of your limit, and an error state at 100%. Plan tiers: Free (2 vendors), Starter (10 vendors), Essentials (25 vendors), Pro (50 vendors included, per-vendor overage available), Enterprise (50+ vendors, custom negotiated scale). Free-tier organisations also see an Upgrade Plan section on the Settings page showing current usage and a link to billing. To continue adding vendors at the limit, upgrade your plan or archive inactive vendors to free up slots.

Contracts Expiring stat card

The "Contracts Expiring" stat card appears when you have active contracts with end dates within the next 90 days. Click through to the Vendors page filtered to only those vendors with expiring contracts. The daily cron job sends webhook notifications at three severity levels: informational at 90 days, warning at 60 days, and critical at 30 days before expiry.

Automatic data refresh

Dashboard data is automatically cached and refreshed in the background. When you switch tabs and return, the latest data loads instantly from cache while a background refresh fetches any updates. You do not need to manually refresh the page.

Persona-specific dashboard

If you have a persona assigned (e.g. CISO / Head of Security, GRC Analyst, Security Engineer, Executive), your dashboard shows widgets tailored to your role. CISOs and Executives see higher-level risk summaries, while GRC Analysts and Security Engineers see findings-focused layouts. Users without a persona see the full generic dashboard. Switch personas using the persona selector in the sidebar.

Trial banner and expiry warnings

If your organisation is on a free trial, a banner at the top of the page shows the trial status and expiry date. New organisations receive a 14-day trial with Starter-tier features (10 vendors) included at no cost. The banner updates as the trial approaches expiry -- less than 3 days remaining is highlighted in amber to encourage you to upgrade. When the trial expires, your organisation reverts to the Free plan (2 vendors, $0/month). You can upgrade at any time by navigating to Settings > Billing and clicking the upgrade button for your desired tier.

Command palette

Press Cmd+K (Mac) or Ctrl+K (Windows/Linux) anywhere to open the command palette. Use fuzzy search to quickly navigate to any page, trigger actions (add vendor, export findings), or access help. Arrow keys to navigate, Enter to select, Escape to close.

Organisation context switching

When switching organisations via the context selector, the dashboard automatically refreshes to show only that organisation’s vendors, findings, and assets. All widgets, charts, and counts update to reflect the selected organisation’s data.

Grouped sidebar navigation

The main sidebar organises navigation into four collapsible groups: Overview (Dashboard, Reports), Vendor Management (Vendors, Products, Technologies, Assessments), Risk and Security (Findings, Vulnerabilities, Assets, Controls, Remediation), and Governance (Compliance, Incidents). Click any group header to expand or collapse its items. The active page's group automatically expands on navigation. Collapse state is saved in your browser so your preferences persist. When the sidebar is collapsed to icon-only mode, all items remain accessible without grouping. Use grouping to reduce cognitive load and focus on related workflows.

Three-tier dashboard layout (v2)

The v2 dashboard layout uses a three-tier hierarchy. Tier 1 ("Needs your attention") is always at the top and shows the most urgent signal as a hero card with a supporting attention rail. Tier 2 ("Portfolio summary") shows four compact stat cards: Total Vendors, Composite Risk, Findings Open, and Assessments. Tier 3 ("History and trends") contains charts, assessments pipeline, and recent activity. On mobile, Tier 3 collapses into a "Show more" disclosure. The v2 layout is behind a feature flag (NEXT_PUBLIC_FF_DASHBOARD_V2) and rolls out gradually by org cohort.

Total Vendors card

The Total Vendors stat card shows your complete organisation vendor count, including unscanned vendors, archived vendors, and those not shown on the current page. This reflects your full vendor roster across all stages. To see only active vendors, use the Vendors page with status filters.

Needs Attention section

The "Needs Attention" card surfaces the four most actionable signals at a glance: vendors whose last scan is older than the configured staleness threshold (default 30 days), active contracts expiring within 30 days, assessments awaiting vendor response (SENT or VIEWED status), and findings currently assigned to you. Each row links directly to the relevant filtered page so you can act immediately. The card only appears when at least one count is non-zero — when everything is clear, it disappears automatically.

Pagination for large MSP organisations

For MSPs with large vendor portfolios, the dashboard summary and vendor list use automatic pagination (default 200 vendors per page). Use the Load More button or scroll to the bottom to fetch additional vendors. This ensures fast dashboard load times even for organisations with thousands of vendors.

Lifecycle Phase Distribution widget

The Lifecycle Phase Distribution widget on the dashboard shows a breakdown of your vendor products by lifecycle phase: Full Support, Maintenance, Extended, ELS — paid, End of Life, and Unknown. Each phase segment is colour-coded (green through red). Products in End of Life or Extended phases receive a risk score amplifier, making their associated findings score higher than the same issue on a fully supported product. Click through any segment to see the matching products. This widget helps you prioritise patching or vendor conversations before End of Life dates pass.

What is ChainShield?

ChainShield is a Supply Chain Risk Management (SCRM) platform that continuously monitors the cyber risk posture of your vendors. It uses OSINT-based scanning to automatically discover vendor assets, AI-driven analysis to assess risk, and maps findings to Australian regulatory frameworks including ASD ISM (Australian Government Information Security Manual), APRA CPS 234 (APRA information security standard), CPS 230 (APRA prudential standard), Privacy Act, SOCI Act (Security of Critical Infrastructure), NDB (Notifiable Data Breaches), DFAT sanctions, and the Cyber Security Act 2024. Add a vendor by name and domain — ChainShield discovers everything else automatically.

How do I navigate the dashboard?

ChainShield uses context-aware navigation with three view modes: System view (platform-wide administration), MSP view (cross-customer management), and Organisation view (single-organisation data). Use the context selector in the header to switch between organisations. On desktop, use the sidebar to navigate between pages. On mobile, use the bottom navigation bar or the hamburger menu.

What's the onboarding process?

After signing in, visit /onboarding to complete your setup. The wizard walks you through naming your organisation, configuring your industry sector and regulatory frameworks, adding your first vendor, and running your first scan. The "Configure Your Organisation" step lets you select an industry sector template (Financial Services, Healthcare, Government, Critical Infrastructure, etc.) to pre-configure your risk domain weights, and choose applicable regulatory frameworks (Australian and international). You can return to onboarding at any time from your profile menu.

Why do pages load so fast when I navigate back?

ChainShield uses stale-while-revalidate caching powered by TanStack Query. When you visit a page, data is cached locally for 30 seconds. Navigating back serves the cached data instantly while a background refresh fetches any updates. This means you rarely see loading spinners on repeat visits, and the data stays fresh automatically.

What do the dashboard metrics show?

The dashboard displays key risk indicators: total vendor count, open findings grouped by severity (Critical, High, Medium, Low), composite risk score, and regulatory exposure summary. Cards are colour-coded by risk level so you can quickly identify areas needing attention.

What is the composite risk score?

The composite risk score is a 0-100 weighted average across all your vendors. It factors in finding severity weights, business criticality multipliers, and data sensitivity multipliers. A lower score is better. The score updates automatically after each scan completes or when findings are resolved.

How is my vendor's risk score calculated?

Vendor risk scores are built from a three-level hierarchy. First, each finding gets a risk score (0-100) based on three dimensions: severity (how bad is the issue, from CVSS (Common Vulnerability Scoring System — base severity rating, 0–10) or control criticality), likelihood (how likely is exploitation, using EPSS (Exploit Prediction Scoring System — predicts real-world exploitation probability, 0–100%) data or evidence quality), and context (is the affected system internet-facing, is the software end-of-life). Second, findings are grouped by risk control (e.g. Vulnerability Management, Email Security) and aggregated using a worst-finding-drives model — the most severe finding drives 70% of the control score, additional findings add diminishing returns. This ensures one critical vulnerability always scores higher than many low-severity issues. Third, control scores feed into 7 risk domains (Cybersecurity 40%, Operational Resilience 20%, Compliance 15%, Privacy 10%, Financial 5%, Reputational 5%, Geopolitical 5%), which are weighted and summed into the final composite score.

Why did a vendor's risk score change?

Risk scores recalculate when the inputs change. Common triggers include: new findings discovered during a scan, EPSS updates (daily refresh of exploitation probability data which changes likelihood scores), a CVE being added to the CISA KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities — actively exploited right now) list (sets likelihood to maximum), a technology reaching end-of-life (adds context bonus to affected findings), findings being resolved or marked as false positives (removes them from scoring), or changes to your org context settings (business criticality, data sensitivity, regulatory designations). Check the Findings tab sorted by "Newest" to see what changed.

What does the findings trend chart show?

The findings trend chart displays open findings grouped by severity (Critical, High, Medium, Low) over 30/90/180 days. This helps you track whether your overall vendor risk posture is improving or if new issues are accumulating faster than they are being addressed.

Why are there three trend charts on the dashboard?

Each trend chart answers a different question. Findings Trend tracks work items (open issues by severity). Vulnerability Trend tracks CVE exposure and highlights actively exploited vulnerabilities (KEV) and high-probability exploits (high EPSS). Risk Score Trend tracks your weighted composite risk across all 7 domains. Together, they give you a complete picture: how many issues exist, how much are exploitable, and whether your overall risk is improving.

What does the risk domain radar chart show?

The risk domain radar chart visualises your organisation’s average risk score across the 7 ChainShield risk domains: Cybersecurity (40% weight), Operational Resilience (20%), Compliance & Regulatory (15%), Privacy & Data Protection (10%), Financial & Supply Chain (5%), Reputational (5%), and Geopolitical & Sovereign (5%). Each axis shows the average domain score (0–100) across all vendors. A larger shaded area indicates higher overall risk. Domain weights reflect your organisation’s sector template or custom configuration.

What does the risk migration chart show?

The risk migration chart (Sankey diagram) visualises how vendors move between risk tiers (Critical, High, Medium, Low) over time. Ribbons connect tiers across monthly periods, showing how many vendors transitioned between categories. The summary below shows total improved, worsened, and stable transitions. Use this to understand whether your vendor risk posture is trending better or worse. On mobile, a stacked bar chart is shown instead for readability.

What does the Needs Attention card show?

The Needs Attention card is a quick action hub showing four key signals: vendors with stale scans (no scan within your configured interval, default 30 days), contracts expiring within 30 days, pending assessments awaiting vendor response, and findings assigned to you. Click any count to jump directly to the filtered view. The card is hidden when all counts are zero, indicating no immediate action needed. Check this card daily as part of your risk triage routine.

Why does my vendor have different risk scores in different organisations?

Each organisation may see a different risk score for the same vendor because ChainShield calculates two scores: a global score (`vendors.risk_score`, the baseline from technical findings alone), and a per-organisation score (`organisation_vendors.risk_score`, amplified or dampened by that org's context). The per-org score includes your organisation's specific risk profile: whether the vendor is a material service provider, critical infrastructure dependency, and your custom multipliers for business criticality and data sensitivity. A Critical vendor carries more weight if your organisation operates critical infrastructure; a vendor handling sensitive data gets amplified scoring in organisations that classify data as highly sensitive. If you don't see a per-org score (it shows NULL), your organisation is using the baseline global score instead, which may happen if custom scoring hasn't been configured yet. Configure your organisation's context in Settings > Risk Profile to see a customized per-org score that reflects your actual risk tolerance and dependencies (US-DATA-1046).

Worked Example

Your composite score jumped from 35 to 52

This means new findings were discovered in a recent scan. Go to Findings, sort by "Newest", and review the latest batch. Check if any are CRITICAL — if so, they need immediate triage. Common causes: a vendor’s TLS certificate expired, a new CVE was published for software they run, or a misconfiguration was detected.

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsReports

Vendors

Your third-party vendor register. Each vendor is continuously monitored for security issues via OSINT-based scanning.

Adding a vendor

Click "Add Vendor" and provide the company name and primary domain (e.g. acme.com.au). ChainShield will automatically discover subdomains, IP addresses, TLS certificates, and email security configuration. The domain must resolve in public DNS and have at least two labels (e.g. example.com, not bare "example"). Industry sector and risk domain weights are configured at the organisation level during onboarding or in Settings. You can also bulk-import via CSV.

Bulk vendor import and update (CSV)

Click "Import" on the vendor list to onboard or reconfigure many vendors at once. Download the CSV template first (it lists every accepted column and value, including a legend row to delete before filling it in). Pick a mode: Create adds new vendors and sets their risk configuration in one pass (rows whose domain already exists globally are linked to your organisation rather than rejected); Update edits risk configuration on vendors already in your register, matching rows to vendors by domain first, then by name if no domain is given - it never creates a new vendor. Multi-value columns (Data Sensitivity, Regulatory Scope) use a pipe character to separate values within one CSV cell, e.g. "PII|HEALTH" - a comma would be misread as a new column since commas already separate the CSV fields. Before committing, click "Preview (dry run)" to see exactly which rows will be created, updated, skipped, or rejected with no data written yet; review the plan, then click "Commit import" to apply it. Everything the import/update writes lands on your organisation’s configuration of the vendor (business criticality, data sensitivity, tier, compliance flags, regulatory scope, PCI status, notes, lifecycle stage) - it never touches another organisation’s settings or the vendor’s shared scan data. Newly created vendors with a domain automatically get a first discovery scan queued (unless your organisation has disabled autonomous scanning); linked-existing and updated vendors do not get an automatic rescan from the import itself.

Domain validation errors

When adding a vendor, the domain is validated in real time. Errors include: "Domain did not resolve" (the domain is not registered or is misspelled - check spelling and wait 5-15 minutes if you just registered it); "Domain resolves to a private IP" (the domain points to an internal network, not public internet); "Timeout" (DNS took too long - retry in a moment). If the error persists, verify the domain is correct and publicly accessible, then contact your administrator.

Understanding vendor tiers

Tier 1 (Critical): core dependency — breach or outage severely impacts operations. Tier 2 (Important): significant risk with access to sensitive data. Tier 3 (Standard): limited scope, minimal data exposure. Tiers affect scan frequency and risk score weighting.

Risk context matters

The same vendor can have different risk scores for different organisations. Set Business Criticality, Data Sensitivity, and regulatory designations (CPS 230 (APRA prudential standard) Material, SOCI Act (Security of Critical Infrastructure) Critical Infrastructure) per vendor to reflect your actual relationship.

Unscanned vendors and guided onboarding

When a vendor is first added and has never been scanned, some tabs are hidden to reduce cognitive overload: Findings, Vulnerabilities, Health, and Intelligence tabs are hidden because they would only show empty states. The Overview, Risk, Assets, Products, Technologies, Profile, and Governance tabs remain visible so you can add brand assets and trigger the first scan. The Risk tab is kept because it shows editable compliance fields useful even before a scan. Once a scan completes successfully (even if it finds zero issues), all tabs become visible. Superusers see a "Run First Scan" button in the tab bar for unscanned vendors; organisation users see no scan button.

How scanning works

There is a single on-demand scan action — click "Run Scan" (or "Run First Scan" for an unscanned vendor) to queue the full pipeline: discovery, enrichment (Shodan/Censys, TLS, email security), CVE correlation, AI domain analysis across all 7 risk domains, and compliance mapping. There is no separate Quick/Enrich/Full/Agent mode to choose. Ongoing cadence (how often vendors are automatically re-scanned) is pipeline-managed — see Settings > Scan Schedule.

Health score column

The Health column shows a 0–100 health score for each vendor, derived from up to 8 metrics including remediation velocity, assessment responsiveness, incident frequency, risk trend, contract status, scan freshness, exit plan readiness, and BCP readiness. Metrics without data are excluded and the remaining metrics are proportionally reweighted. If fewer than 3 metrics have data, the score shows "Insufficient Data". Green (75+) = Healthy, amber (50–74) = Needs Attention, orange (25–49) = At Risk, red (<25) = Critical. Click through to the vendor’s Performance tab for the full breakdown and action items.

Risk Domains column

The "Risk Domains" column shows 7 coloured dots, one per ChainShield risk domain (Cyber, Ops, Compliance, Privacy, Financial, Reputation, Geo). Each dot reflects the worst open finding severity for that domain. Red = critical open finding; orange = high; amber = medium; green = domain assessed with no open findings; grey = domain not yet assessed. Hover any dot for a breakdown. Findings your organisation has resolved or accepted are excluded from the severity roll-up. On mobile, the column collapses to a single worst-severity dot with a "N domains at risk" count. Click through to the vendor detail page to see the full findings list.

Per-vendor scan cadence

Each vendor inherits the global scan cadence by default (set in Settings > Scan Schedule). A superuser can override it for a specific vendor from the "Scan Cadence" panel on the vendor detail Health tab, entering a custom interval from 1 to 365 days — this is a platform-wide override, not an org-level setting. Critical vendors can be scanned more often while less important ones follow the default schedule. The vendor list shows an estimated "next scan" time based on the effective cadence. A superuser can clear the override at any time to revert to the default.

Expiring Contracts filter

The "Expiring Contracts" filter tab appears when any of your vendors have active contracts expiring within 90 days. Click the tab to filter the vendor list to only those with upcoming contract renewals. The count badge shows how many vendors are affected. This helps you proactively plan renewals before contracts lapse.

Risk domain radar chart

The vendor detail page includes a radar (spider) chart showing scores across all 7 risk domains: Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, and Geopolitical & Sovereign. Scores are adjusted for your organisation’s context — business criticality, data sensitivity, material service provider status, and critical infrastructure designation all amplify or dampen scores at the control level. Toggle between radar and bar views using the icons in the top-right of the Score Breakdown panel. Hover over each axis to see the domain score, weight, weighted contribution, and finding count. When org-level metrics are not available, the chart estimates domain scores from finding severity so you always get a visual risk profile.

Domain Risk Breakdown

The Risk Analysis panel includes a Domain Risk Breakdown with a narrative for each of the 7 risk domains. Click any domain to expand and read the analysis — it explains what was found and why it matters. The Privacy domain analysis includes findings from the vendor’s privacy policy, cookie policy, and terms of service. Use these narratives to quickly understand the "so what" behind each domain score before drilling into individual findings.

Domain assessment states

Each risk domain shows one of four assessment states. Assessed clean (CLEAN): all controls in this domain were assessed and no gaps were found — the agent confirmed adequate coverage. Gaps found (GAPS): one or more controls have open findings that need review. Insufficient data (INCOMPLETE): the agent ran but could not gather enough evidence for some controls — common causes include no public website, WAF blocking, or agent budget exhausted; these controls show as not yet covered. Pending (NOT_RUN): the domain agent has not run for this scan yet. States update automatically after each scan.

AI Overview — “Regenerating” banner

When a rescan adds materially new findings (2+ new CRITICAL/HIGH findings, 3+ novel finding fingerprints, or 20%+ change in total open findings), ChainShield automatically marks the vendor’s AI narrative as stale and schedules regeneration. The Vendor Analysis panel shows a warning banner: "Narrative pending regeneration - [reason]", and the review status pill changes from "Pending" to "Regenerating". The banner disappears automatically once the synthesis agent rewrites the narrative — typically within a few minutes of the rescan completing. If the banner persists for more than 10 minutes, check the pipeline health dashboard or contact your administrator. Narratives with a manual override (locked narratives) are not auto-invalidated; a soft warning is shown instead.

Control Breakdown

Click any domain on the risk breakdown to expand and see the risk group and control hierarchy. Each domain is divided into risk groups (e.g. Cybersecurity has Attack Surface Management, Transport & Encryption, Application & Access Security, and Security Posture & Emerging). Within each group, controls are listed with their finding count and severity badge. Domains with only one risk group show controls directly. This structure maps to the SCRM risk matrix so auditors can navigate from a specific SCRM reference (e.g. SCRM-02.1) to the exact controls and findings.

Governance tab - compliance and lifecycle in one place

The Governance tab consolidates vendor governance information into collapsible sections: Tier & Classification (business criticality, tier, risk context), Compliance & Governance (PCI DSS status, step-in rights, exit strategy, resilience review dates), Contracts (feature-flagged), Business Case, Fourth Parties, BCP Testing, and Exit Plan. Previously, this information was spread across 5 separate tabs plus two sections on the Overview tab. CPS 230 assessors can now complete a full vendor review without switching tabs.

Profile tab - vendor details in one place

The Profile tab consolidates vendor profile information into collapsible sections: Company Profile (ABR data), Locations, Certifications, Contacts, Resource URLs, and Enrichment. Sections with data expand automatically; empty sections show a "No data" indicator. Resource URLs and Enrichment are collapsed by default to reduce noise. Products and Technologies have their own dedicated top-level tabs for easier access.

Risk score badge in vendor header

The vendor detail page now shows a compact risk score badge inline with the vendor name, visible on every tab without scrolling. The badge is colour-coded: red for critical (>70), amber for high (>50), and green for low (≤50). A dash (-) is shown when no scan has run yet. The last-scanned time is also shown below the vendor domain, giving you a persistent at-a-glance reference for risk posture and data freshness regardless of which tab you are viewing.

Recalculate risk score

Use the refresh icon button in the vendor header to force a risk score recalculation. This re-runs the scoring pipeline (7 domains, 30 controls) using per-finding risk scores, weighted risk calculation, and your org context settings. Useful after manually updating findings, changing vendor criticality, or modifying compliance scope. The button is available to all authenticated users with access to the vendor.

Risk score lifecycle

A vendor's risk score populates automatically on scan completion or when a finding's status changes. Vendors added with manually created findings (not from a scan) may show a risk score of 0 or "-" until the scoring pipeline is triggered. If a vendor has findings but shows zero risk score, contact your administrator to trigger a manual rescore. The system monitors for this condition daily and alerts the operations team automatically (US-DATA-579).

Vendor approval workflow

When approval workflow is enabled (Settings > Security), new vendors enter Prospect status with a pending approval banner on their detail page. Admin and manager roles can approve or reject with notes. Low-risk vendors (score < 30, Tier 3) are auto-approved on creation. Approved vendors transition to Active status automatically.

Pending Approval tab

The "Pending Approval" filter tab appears on the vendors page when one or more vendors are awaiting an approval decision and you have admin, manager, or owner role. Click it to see only those vendors. Each pending vendor shows an amber "Awaiting Approval" badge alongside its lifecycle stage. Use the Approve and Reject buttons inline to action requests without opening the vendor detail page. Approved vendors automatically transition to Active status via the rpc_process_approval_decision RPC.

Auto-confirm rules

Auto-confirm rules automatically confirm discovered assets that match known patterns. Three rule types are supported: Domain Suffix (e.g. ".acme.com.au" confirms all subdomains), ASN Match (e.g. "AS13335" confirms assets on the vendor's network), and IP CIDR (e.g. "203.0.113.0/24" confirms IPs in a known range). Rules can be scoped at three levels: vendor-specific (on the vendor detail page), organisation-wide (in Settings, applies to all vendors in the org), or global (superuser only, applies platform-wide). Vendor rules take precedence over org rules, which take precedence over global rules. First matching rule wins. Rules can be enabled or disabled without deletion.

Searching vendors

Use the search bar above the vendor list to filter by vendor name or domain. Search is instant (client-side). The result count updates as you type. Clear the search with the X button to see all vendors again.

Business criticality filter and column

The Criticality column in the vendor list shows each vendor's business criticality level (CRITICAL, HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW). Use the Criticality filter dropdown to narrow the list to vendors at a specific criticality level. Sort the column to prioritise highest-criticality vendors. Criticality is set in the vendor's Risk Context section and is especially important for CPS 230 Material Service Provider classifications - higher criticality multiplies risk scores so you give more weight to findings affecting critical vendors.

Material Service Provider (MSP) badge

A small "MSP" badge appears next to vendor names in the list when the vendor is classified as a CPS 230 Material Service Provider. This classification indicates that disruption or failure of this vendor would materially impact your operations under the APRA prudential standard. MSP-classified vendors receive enhanced monitoring, additional compliance obligations, and amplified risk scoring. Filter to "Material SPs only" to focus on vendors with the highest regulatory obligation level.

Company Info card

The vendor overview tab displays a Company Info card showing three enriched data fields when populated: Industry (detected from OSINT and enrichment sources), Employee Range (extracted from LinkedIn, ABR, and company profiles), and Year Founded (from domain registration and business intelligence data). This card provides quick company context without needing to open the full Enrichment Panels. The card is hidden when all three fields are null.

Background data refresh

The vendor list uses stale-while-revalidate caching. Data loads instantly from cache while a background fetch checks for updates. When you remove or import vendors, the list refreshes automatically without a full page reload.

Domain unreachable - fixing DNS failures

When a vendor shows a "Domain unreachable" badge (red), the scan pipeline could not resolve the vendor's domain in public DNS. This typically means the domain is misspelled, lapsed, or has never been registered. Hover over the badge to see the specific error message. Vendor domains cannot be changed after creation - ChainShield uses the domain as a shared identifier across all organisations that have linked the same vendor. If the domain is wrong, remove the vendor (click Remove from your vendor list) and add it again with the correct domain. If the domain is correct but unreachable (e.g. a recently registered or transferred domain), contact your administrator who can reset the scan state once the domain resolves.

Certifications tab

The Certifications tab shows security certifications discovered on the vendor's website (ISO 27001, SOC 2, IRAP, etc.). Certifications have three statuses: Unverified (found on website, not independently confirmed), Evidence Found (dedicated certificate page located with cert number/issuer), and Verified (certificate document uploaded). Click "View certificate details" to see the vendor's attestation page. Superusers can manually add, edit, or verify certifications.

Products tab

The Products tab shows products and services discovered for this vendor. Products are grouped by master product with expandable version rows - click the chevron on any product to see its individual versions and their lifecycle phases (Full Support, Maintenance, Extended, ELS paid, or End of Life). Single-version SaaS products show their phase badge inline without an expand affordance. Use the phase filter chips to focus on products in specific lifecycle states, or use the Extended+, no ELS toggle to quickly surface products in extended or end-of-life phase that are not covered by paid extended support - these are high-priority triage targets. Filters and expansion state round-trip through URL params (?expanded=, ?phase=, ?triage=) so you can bookmark or share a specific view. Use the We use this toggle to mark which products your organisation uses - findings linked to hidden products are excluded from your risk scoring. Bulk select/deselect buttons let you manage large catalogs.

Technologies tab

The Technologies tab shows software and services the vendor uses or runs, detected from Shodan/Censys banners, DNS records, and HTTP headers. Technologies are enriched with end-of-life (EOL) status, latest version availability, and known CVE counts. After each scan, AI analysis assigns a risk score (0-100), specific concerns (e.g. "End-of-life since 2023"), and a recommended action (update, replace, monitor, or accept) to each technology. The CVE badge shows the count of open CVE findings linked to that technology. Red "EOL" badges indicate unsupported software requiring immediate attention. Each technology can be linked to multiple assets (e.g. Cloudflare linked to all nameservers, Google Workspace linked to MX records and SPF). Click a technology to see all linked infrastructure in the detail modal.

Contract and SLA tracking

The Contracts tab on each vendor detail page tracks agreements (MSA, SLA, DPA, NDA, SOW, Licence). Add contracts with start/end dates, renewal dates, values, and auto-renew flags. Contracts expiring within 90 days are highlighted in amber, and those within 30 days in red. A daily cron job checks for expiring contracts and sends webhook notifications so you can plan renewals proactively.

Fourth-party financial risk

ChainShield assesses vendor financial risk using ABR entity verification, domain age via RDAP, and (when configured) commercial credit bureau data. Financial risk indicators include credit score, payment defaults, ASIC registration status, and insolvency risk probability. Low credit scores or payment defaults generate FINANCIAL_SUPPLYCHAIN findings. This is especially important for CPS 230 compliance where material service provider financial viability must be monitored.

Vendor enrichment panels

The vendor overview tab shows collapsible intelligence sections when enrichment data is available: Company Intelligence (legal name, industry, entity verification score, physical locations), Financial Health (financial risk score, credit rating, credit score, financial data summary), Sanctions & Compliance (sanctions status with CLEAR/POTENTIAL MATCH badges and match details), and Domain Intelligence (registrar, registration date, expiry with warnings, WHOIS/RDAP data). Sections only appear when the vendor has data for that category.

SBOM history and analysis

The SBOM tab shows both the upload interface and a history of all uploaded SBOMs. Click any SBOM to view its detail: component count, validation results, and vulnerability gap analysis including CVE matches. When multiple SBOMs exist, use "Compare Latest" to see what changed between the two most recent uploads - new components, removed components, and changes in vulnerability counts.

Vendors with 'Domain unreachable' status

When a vendor domain cannot be resolved during the discovery phase, the vendor is marked with a 'Domain unreachable' status and error details are shown. This typically happens when the domain is misspelled, lapsed, or never existed. The vendor will not scan until the issue is resolved. Vendor domains are immutable after creation - if the domain is wrong, remove the vendor and add it again with the correct domain. If the domain is correct but temporarily unresolvable (e.g. DNS propagation delay or a recently transferred domain), contact your administrator who can reset the scan state once the domain resolves in public DNS.

Data quality flags - scoring incomplete

When a vendor shows a red "Scoring Incomplete" data quality flag, the scan pipeline encountered an error in the risk scoring engine but still collected findings. This is a graceful degradation: the scan is marked complete, findings are indexed and searchable, but the risk score was not updated. The flag appears on the vendor detail page and in list views. The vendor shows its last-known-good risk score. The pipeline has automatically queued a rescore attempt via the risk scoring worker. If the rescore succeeds (usually within minutes), the flag clears and the score refreshes. If the underlying issue persists, click the Refresh button in the vendor header to manually trigger a rescore. Contact your administrator if the flag persists.

Vendor list density

Use the density toggle (three-row icon group, top-right of the vendor list on desktop) to switch between Compact, Comfortable, and Spacious row heights. Spacious matches the default spacing. Compact is tightest and is useful when reviewing large vendor portfolios. Your preference is saved locally and restored on your next visit. The toggle is hidden on mobile where card layout is used instead. Badges in the vendor name cell overflow into a "+N" chip when there are more than two; click the chip to see the remaining badges without leaving the list.

Product lifecycle phases in the vendor detail

The Products section of the vendor detail page (Profile tab > Products) shows each product with a lifecycle phase badge and timeline strip per version. The badge names the exact phase: Full Support (green), Maintenance (yellow), Extended (amber), ELS - paid (amber/darker), or End of Life (red). Hover over the badge to see the title tooltip. The timeline strip shows a colour-coded bar from product release to end-of-life with a "today" marker. Days-remaining text below the strip indicates how long until the current phase ends. End of Life and Extended phases amplify risk scores for associated findings - addressing or upgrading these products reduces your vendor's risk score.

Lifecycle phase risk amplifiers

Findings linked to products in late lifecycle phases receive a risk score amplifier. Full Support: no amplifier (1.0x). Maintenance: 1.1x. Extended (without ELS): 1.3x. ELS - paid: 1.1x (paid support mitigates some risk). End of Life: 1.5x. The amplifier applies to the cybersecurity domain score, so a HIGH finding on an EOL product scores like a CRITICAL finding on a fully supported product. To remove the amplifier, either upgrade the product to a supported version or purchase extended lifecycle support (ELS/ESU) where available.

Handling failed vendor data fetches

If a critical vendor data fetch fails (e.g., pipeline activity, asset discovery), ChainShield displays a banner or toast notification describing the error. The page gracefully degrades - you can still view cached data and manage the vendor while the system retries the fetch in the background. Check the pipeline activity panel or contact your administrator if failures persist.

How do I add a vendor?

Navigate to Vendors and click "Add Vendor". You can add vendors three ways: manual entry (name + primary domain), CSV import (bulk upload), or ABN lookup (Australian Business Number search to auto-populate company details). After adding, ChainShield automatically begins an initial scan.

How do I bulk import or bulk update vendors via CSV?

Click "Import" on the vendor list, then "Template" to download a CSV with every accepted column and value (delete the legend row before filling it in). Choose Create to add new vendors and set their risk configuration in one pass, or Update to edit risk configuration on vendors already in your register (matched by domain, falling back to name) without creating anything new. Multi-value columns like Data Sensitivity and Regulatory Scope are pipe-delimited within a single cell (e.g. "PII|HEALTH"), not comma-delimited, because commas already separate CSV columns. Click "Preview (dry run)" first to see the exact create/update/skip/error plan with zero writes, then "Commit import" to apply it - the preview and the committed result use identical row-by-row logic so what you see is what you get. All writes are scoped to your organisation's configuration of each vendor; they never change another organisation's settings or the vendor's shared scan data.

Why was my vendor rejected when I tried to add it?

ChainShield validates the domain in real time when you submit. Common rejection reasons: (1) "Domain did not resolve" -- the domain does not have public A or AAAA records. This can happen if the domain is misspelled, not yet registered, or DNS has not propagated (new domains can take 5-15 minutes to propagate after registration -- wait and retry). (2) "Domain resolves to a private IP" -- the domain points to an internal network address, which is not permitted for SSRF safety reasons. (3) "Must have at least two labels" -- the domain you entered is a single-label name like "intranet" without a dot; use a fully-qualified domain like "intranet.example.com". If the domain is correct and publicly accessible but still failing, check your network connectivity and try again.

What are vendor tiers?

Vendor tiers classify business impact: Tier 1 (Critical) means a core business dependency where outage or breach would severely impact operations. Tier 2 (Important) indicates significant but not existential risk, with access to sensitive data or systems. Tier 3 (Standard) is limited scope with minimal data exposure or business impact. Tiers affect risk score weighting and scanning frequency.

How do vendor tags work?

Tags are custom labels you assign to vendors for organisation-specific grouping (e.g. "finance", "annual-review", "critical-path"). Tags are org-scoped, so each organisation has its own taxonomy. Add tags on the vendor detail page via the + Tag button, entering comma-separated values. Filter vendors by tag on the vendor list page using the tag filter row - filtering is now server-side, so you see matches from all vendors, not just the current page. When you apply a tag filter, pagination resets to page 1 and total count reflects the filtered set. Tags have no effect on risk scoring.

What happens when I scan a vendor?

Scanning is a multi-phase OSINT pipeline: (1) Discovery - subdomain enumeration, DNS records, asset identification. (2) Enrichment - port scanning via Shodan and Censys, TLS inspection (HTTPS via SSL Labs + STARTTLS for SMTP/IMAP/POP3/LDAP via sslyze), email security checks (SPF/DKIM/DMARC), SecurityTrails data. (3) CVE correlation and news monitoring. (4) AI analysis - ChainShield's internal AI models generate risk narratives and remediation suggestions (no third-party AI provider receives data). (5) Compliance mapping - findings are automatically mapped to regulatory frameworks. All scans are non-intrusive and use only publicly available information.

Can I choose a specific scan type (quick, full, etc.)?

No — there is a single on-demand scan action, triggered via the "Run Scan" button on the vendor detail page. It always runs the same multi-phase pipeline: discovery, Shodan/Censys enrichment, CVE correlation, AI domain analysis, and compliance mapping. There is no separate Quick, Enrich, Full, or Agent mode to select from the UI.

How do I configure scan frequency?

Go to Settings and scroll to the Scan Schedule section. Set your organisation-wide default frequency (daily, weekly, fortnightly, monthly, or manual-only) and optionally override individual vendors. Enable the Material Change Trigger to automatically re-scan vendors when significant changes are detected between scheduled scans. The cron scheduler uses these frequencies to determine which vendors are due for scanning.

How is vendor risk calculated?

Vendor risk uses a three-level hierarchy: (1) Per-finding risk score (0-100) combining severity, exploitation likelihood, and context (internet-facing, end-of-life, control weight). (2) Control-level aggregation using a worst-finding-drives model where the most severe finding is the primary driver (70%) and additional findings add diminishing returns (30%). This ensures one critical vulnerability always outweighs many low-severity issues. (3) Domain and composite scoring aggregates control scores across 7 risk domains weighted by importance. Org-context multipliers (business criticality, data sensitivity, CPS 230, SOCI) amplify or dampen scores per organisation.

How do I track vendor contracts and SLAs?

On each vendor detail page, open the Contracts tab to manage agreements. You can add contracts of various types (MSA, SLA, DPA, NDA, SOW, Licence) with start and end dates, renewal dates, contract value in AUD, and auto-renew flags. Contracts expiring within 90 days are highlighted so you can plan renewals proactively. A daily automated check sends webhook notifications for contracts expiring within 30 days.

Why did my certification flip to EXPIRED?

Certifications with an expiry date are automatically marked EXPIRED the day after the expiry date passes. A daily cron job runs this check at 03:00 UTC. Update the certification's expiry date to a future date and change the status back to VERIFIED to restore it. This automatic expiry helps you stay aware of certifications that need renewal or replacement.

Why does my vendor show 'Scoring Incomplete'?

The 'Scoring Incomplete' flag means the scan collected findings but the risk scoring engine encountered an error before it could compute an updated risk score. The scan is still fully closed - findings are indexed and visible - but the vendor continues to display its last-known-good score until the rescore completes. ChainShield automatically queues a rescore attempt (usually within a few minutes). If the flag clears after that, no action is needed. If it persists, click the Refresh button in the vendor header to manually trigger a rescore. If it still does not clear, contact your administrator - the underlying issue may require a new full scan once the root cause (e.g. a corrupt finding row) is resolved.

What do the coloured dots in the Risk Domains column mean?

The Risk Domains column shows 7 dots, one for each of ChainShield's 7 risk domains: Cyber, Ops, Compliance, Privacy, Financial, Reputation, and Geo. Each dot colour shows the worst open finding severity for that domain: Red = at least one open critical finding; Orange = worst open finding is high severity; Amber = worst open finding is medium (low-only domains show green); Green = domain has been assessed but has no open findings; Grey = no scan data for this domain yet. Findings your organisation has explicitly resolved or accepted are excluded from the count. Hover any dot to see the severity breakdown. On mobile, the 7 dots collapse to a single worst-severity dot with a risk count chip. Click through to the vendor detail page for the full findings breakdown.

How can I see threat-intelligence pulses for a vendor?

Open the vendor detail page and click the Intelligence tab. The tab lists threat-intelligence pulses from 8 registered CTI adapters: CISA AIS, AlienVault OTX, AbuseIPDB, Cloudflare Radar, and four abuse.ch feeds (URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, SSLBL). The pulses show indicators (IPs, domains, ASNs) observed on the vendor infrastructure in the last 90 days. Confirmed threat exposure materialises under incident_history; adverse_media is reserved for separate adverse-media or stakeholder-trust fallout.

What is CSP Evaluator data?

CSP (Content Security Policy) Evaluator is Google's deterministic policy parser that assesses the quality of security headers on your vendor's website. When ChainShield scans HTTP endpoints, it evaluates CSP directives and detects bypassable configurations such as 'unsafe-inline' in script-src. Weak CSP policies are flagged as app_api_security (Application, API & Product Security) findings. A strong CSP reduces XSS exploitation risk.

What are vendor dependencies?

Vendor dependencies are software packages and libraries detected on the vendor's infrastructure during scanning. ChainShield surfaces these technologies to help you assess supply-chain risk and track which third-party components your vendors depend on. This is particularly relevant for identifying mass-vulnerable dependencies after security advisories or tracking components that appear across multiple vendors in your ecosystem.

Which sanctions lists does ChainShield check?

ChainShield screens vendors against AU DFAT, US OFAC SDN, UN Consolidated, EU Restrictive Measures, UK OFSI, and Canadian SEMA lists. Japanese METI integration is in progress. Sanctions matches trigger HIGH-severity foreign_influence (Foreign Influence & Sanctions) findings. Checks run weekly and are logged in vendor_sanctions_checks for audit trail.

Worked Example

Onboarding a new cloud provider

Add the vendor with their primary domain. Set Tier 1, High data sensitivity, mark as CPS 230 Material if you’re APRA-regulated. Trigger a Full scan. Within ~10 minutes you’ll have a complete asset inventory, TLS assessment, CVE exposure, and AI-generated risk narrative with remediation suggestions.

Related Pages

Add VendorFindingsRisk Scores

Findings

Security issues discovered by the scan pipeline. Each finding has a severity, control mapping, compliance mapping, and recommended remediation.

Severity levels and what to do

CRITICAL (25pts, immediate): Actively exploited vulnerability or confirmed breach — immediate risk of data loss, system compromise, or regulatory breach. Triage within hours. Examples: CISA KEV CVE, exposed database with default creds, confirmed data breach. HIGH (15pts, days): Verified exploitable weakness with high likelihood of impact — requires attacker action but path is clear. Plan remediation this week. Examples: High-EPSS CVE (>0.3), exposed admin panel without auth, expired certificate on production. MEDIUM (8pts, weeks): Observable configuration gap or weakness — exploitable but requires specific conditions or attacker sophistication. Schedule for next review cycle. Examples: Missing DMARC/SPF, weak TLS config, missing security headers. LOW (3pts, informational): Minor configuration improvement or limited-evidence observation — low likelihood of exploitation. Examples: Informational CVE (low EPSS), missing best-practice headers. INFO (0pts, observation): No risk — metadata, positive control confirmation, or context for other findings. Examples: PASS findings, verified certifications, technology detection.

Exporting findings

Findings can be exported as CSV, PDF, or XLSX (Excel). The XLSX format includes a summary sheet with severity and status breakdowns, plus a detail sheet with auto-filters, auto-sized columns, and date-formatted columns. Use the header export buttons for all findings (with current filters), or select specific findings and use the bulk action bar for targeted exports.

Finding status workflow

OPEN → IN_PROGRESS → PENDING_REVIEW → RESOLVED. You can also mark findings as ACCEPTED (risk accepted, not fixing) or FALSE_POSITIVE (not actually an issue). Use bulk actions to triage multiple findings at once.

Understanding risk scores

Each finding has a risk score (0-100) calculated from three dimensions: severity (how bad is this issue, based on CVSS for CVEs or control criticality for other findings), likelihood (how likely is this to be exploited, using EPSS prediction data for CVEs or evidence quality for other findings), and context (is this internet-facing, is the software end-of-life, is this a high-weight control). The risk score is the primary sort and priority signal. Higher scores mean greater risk. The breakdown is visible in the risk factors panel on each finding detail page. Note: severity and risk_score measure different things — a CRITICAL severity finding may have a lower risk_score if the issue is historical or low-context; see "Severity vs risk_score" in the engineering documentation for details.

Compliance mappings

Findings are automatically mapped to Australian regulatory controls (ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI, NDB, Cyber Security Act 2024) via control_id. Each finding maps to one of 30 current controls grouped into 7 scoring domains. Check the compliance tab on finding details to see which specific controls are affected.

Per-organisation overrides

When a vendor is shared, each organisation can set their own finding status and priority. One org may accept a risk while another treats it as critical. Overrides don’t affect the underlying finding visible to other organisations.

Bulk actions and notifications

When performing bulk status changes or deletions, toast notifications confirm the outcome. Success or failure is shown in the bottom-right corner of the screen. If an action fails, retry after checking your connection.

Screen reader announcements

Bulk actions (status updates, exports, deletions) announce their results to screen readers automatically. For example, updating 5 findings announces "5 findings updated to Resolved". Export completions announce "CSV export ready for download". Errors are announced with higher priority so they are not missed.

Searching findings

Use the search bar to filter findings by title, control, severity, or CVE ID. Search is instant with a 300ms debounce and combines with existing severity, status, control, and pillar filters. The result count updates as you type.

Smart caching and refresh

Findings are cached and refresh automatically when you change filters or navigate back to the page. Bulk status updates and deletions trigger an automatic cache refresh so the list stays current without a manual page reload.

Filtering by risk control

Use the control filter to narrow findings to a specific risk control (e.g. data_security_retention, platform_email_hardening). You can apply this filter from the findings page filter bar, or by clicking a control row in the Risk tab's Control Breakdown panel on a vendor page. The URL parameter ?control=data_security_retention is shareable. Combine with severity or status filters for precise triage.

Control Breakdown view

Click the "Control Breakdown" tab to see all 30 current controls with their assessment status, severity split, and last finding date. This view shows whether each control is healthy (no open findings), not yet assessed (agent has not run), or has open findings. Click a control row to filter the findings list to that control — this is the fastest way to see all issues affecting a specific control across all vendors. The "Show empty controls" toggle reveals controls with zero findings.

Understanding zero-state controls

The Control Breakdown view shows all 30 current controls, not just those with findings. Each control has one of three zero states: (a) Green check "Healthy" — the agent ran and found no open issues for this control, (b) Grey dash "Not yet assessed" — the agent has not yet produced findings for this control, or (c) Control is in-scope but the agent has not run for your vendor set. The tooltip on each control explains which state it is in. These distinctions help you understand whether a zero-finding control is genuinely safe or simply not yet assessed.

Sortable and filterable findings table

The findings table supports sorting by severity, status, control, vendor, asset, risk score, and detection date — click any column header to sort. Use the filter bar to filter by control, vendor, severity, or status, and the URL parameter (e.g., ?severity=CRITICAL) is shareable. Column visibility is customizable — click the column icon to show/hide fields like risk score, due date, or regulatory references. Your column preferences are saved per user.

GitHub vulnerability scanning

If a vendor has public GitHub repositories, ChainShield automatically checks for open Dependabot alerts and GitHub Security Advisories (GHSA). Only HIGH and CRITICAL severity alerts generate findings to reduce noise. CVEs found via GitHub are deduplicated against those found via Shodan/Censys enrichment.

How GitHub discovery works

ChainShield searches GitHub for organisations and repositories associated with a vendor's domain or company name. It uses the GitHub API to collect metadata — stars, forks, open advisories, security policies, licence type, and release signing practices. It does NOT scan source code. Findings are generated for security posture gaps such as missing security policies (SECURITY.md), unsigned releases, unaddressed advisories, and dependency risk indicators. GitHub-sourced findings are categorised by the control that best matches the gap (e.g., attack_surface for unaddressed vulnerabilities, policy_governance for missing governance documentation).

Org-private findings

You can create findings that are visible only to your organisation. These org-private findings are shown with an [Org] badge and do not appear for other organisations that share the same vendor. Use "Add Finding" to create one. Org-private findings can be deleted; vendor-level findings discovered by scans cannot. Org-private findings are useful for recording internal assessments, audit observations, or risks specific to your context.

Creating org-private findings — control_id is required

When creating an organisation-private finding, you must select a risk control from the dropdown (e.g. data_security_retention, platform_email_hardening). This control determines which 7-domain the finding contributes to. If you are unsure which control matches your observation, start with the domain most relevant to the issue: Cybersecurity for technical risks (attacks, vulnerabilities), Privacy for data protection concerns, Operational for availability risks, etc. The detailed control descriptions in the dropdown explain what each control covers. After selection, the finding will be mapped to Australian regulatory frameworks automatically.

Assigned to me filter

The "Assigned to me" toggle filters the findings list to show only findings where you are the assigned owner. This filter is applied server-side, meaning it works correctly across all pages — not just the current 50-row page. Use this to manage your personal remediation workload. The assignment can be set on any finding via the finding detail panel. Deep links to the findings page with ?assigned_to_me=true will pre-activate this filter.

Rollup findings

A rollup finding groups N underlying items (CVEs or threat-intel indicators) under a single risk control. Rollup rows are marked with a "Rollup: N CVEs" or "Rollup: N indicators" badge. Click the badge to open a drawer listing each member with its ID, severity, and KEV status. Discrete findings (individual CVEs or observations) retain their current display — the rollup badge only appears on findings with kind=rollup.

Due soon filter

The "Due soon" toggle filters the findings list to show only findings with a due date within the next 7 days that are still open (not RESOLVED or ACCEPTED). Due dates within 3 days are shown in amber; overdue findings are shown in red. Use this filter to triage findings approaching their deadline. Due dates are set per-organisation via the finding detail panel and are visible only to your organisation.

Positive observations and PASS findings

When the review gate detects a positive finding (e.g. "No confirmed data breach", "Verified Active", "Certifications Confirmed"), it automatically converts the finding from OPEN to PASS. PASS findings represent successful control verification and appear in the findings list but are deprioritised in default views. PASS findings still contribute to compliance metrics and are useful for audit evidence that a control is working. A finding with "PASS" status is not an issue; it confirms the vendor is doing the right thing.

Source agent attribution

The finding detail card shows which agent discovered the finding in the "Source Agent" field (e.g. Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Reputational). This tells you which 7-domain agent ran the analysis. For example, a vulnerability finding from the Cybersecurity agent means it maps to a Cybersecurity control. The source agent is logged for all findings, helping with auditability and understanding the analysis chain.

Evidence gaps — what they are and what to do

Use the amber "Evidence gaps" toggle to reveal findings with status EVIDENCE_GAP. These are automatic markers created by the scan pipeline when a risk control could not be positively verified — either because no scan data covered the control, or because the vendor's available evidence was insufficiently authoritative (e.g. a trust page with unverifiable claims). Evidence gap findings contribute to the vendor's risk score via an uncertainty floor (roughly half the maximum score for that control) until positive evidence is provided. Different gap types show distinct messages: control-coverage gaps from the post-analysis agent show "Control not yet assessed -- request vendor documentation" (request SOC 2 report, ISO 27001 certificate, business continuity plan, data residency statement); vendor-blocking gaps from security_txt show "Vendor blocks remote verification -- awaiting direct response" (the vendor's security.txt blocks automated checks — contact directly); enrichment-agent gaps show "Awaiting vendor response" (vendor-supplied evidence awaited). To resolve: contact the vendor with the requested documentation type, then mark the finding RESOLVED. High evidence gap counts on large vendors are structurally expected — many controls cannot be assessed remotely.

Rollup findings explained

A rollup finding aggregates multiple related issues into a single finding for cleaner reporting. For example, a vulnerability rollup combines 50+ unpatched CVEs below the critical threshold into one "CVE Rollup: 50 vulnerabilities" finding. Click the rollup badge (showing the member count) to see a drawer listing all members with severity and CVE ID. Rollup findings have different handling than discrete findings: they contribute to your risk score but are not triaged individually. If a CVE in the rollup crosses a critical threshold (KEV listed, CVSS >= 9.0, EPSS >= 0.8), it is automatically promoted to a discrete finding for dedicated attention.

Threat intelligence sources and scoring

ChainShield monitors 8 external threat intelligence sources (OTX, AbuseIPDB, CISA AIS, Cloudflare Radar, abuse.ch URLhaus, abuse.ch ThreatFox, abuse.ch MalwareBazaar, abuse.ch SSLBL) for indicators of compromise, active targeting, and malware association affecting your vendors. High-confidence threat intel (TLP RED or AMBER from authoritative sources) generates discrete findings for immediate action. Lower-confidence or routine observations are rolled up into a single vendor-scoped active threat exposure rollup. The Intelligence view on each vendor page shows which sources fired, their latest observation timestamps, and confidence levels.

Rollup findings and evidence badges

Some findings are labelled "rollup" — these represent aggregated evidence, such as CVEs contributing to the attack_surface vulnerability control or threat-intelligence pulses contributing to the incident_history threat-exposure control. For attack_surface, ChainShield produces one consolidated rollup per vendor: the title shows structured counts ("X critical, Y high, Z exploitable vulnerabilities found within [vendor]'s infrastructure"). Click the chevron to expand the row and see all contributing evidence references — every non-discrete CVE is included, not just the top 10. Rollup findings are read-only; to address the risk, remediate the underlying CVEs. If a CVE crosses a critical threshold (KEV-listed, CVSS >= 9.0, EPSS >= 0.8), it is automatically promoted to its own discrete finding. An "incomplete scan" badge (grey, no count) means the scan did not gather enough data to assess the control confidently — it is not a risk signal, just a provenance marker.

What's a rollup finding?

A rollup finding aggregates multiple related items under a single risk control for cleaner reporting. For attack_surface (vulnerability management, formerly CYBER_01), ChainShield produces one consolidated rollup per vendor rather than one per asset — the title shows counts like "3 critical, 12 high, 4 exploitable vulnerabilities found within [vendor]'s infrastructure". Click the finding to open a drawer listing every contributing CVE with its severity and KEV status (all are included, not just the top 10). If a CVE crosses a critical threshold (KEV-listed, CVSS >= 9.0, or EPSS >= 0.8), it is automatically promoted to its own discrete finding for dedicated triage. Discrete findings without a rollup badge are assessed individually.

How does threat intelligence scoring work?

ChainShield monitors external threat intelligence sources for indicators of compromise affecting your vendors. When a source detects active threats tied to your vendor's IP ranges, domains, or ASN, the indicators are stored and scored under the incident_history control (Threat Exposure & Incident History). A rollup finding is materialised under incident_history summarising the active threat exposure; its risk score contribution is shown on the vendor Intelligence page. Higher-confidence or authoritative sources (CISA AIS carries the highest weight) increase the score more than community sources like AbuseIPDB. The /vendors/[id]/intelligence page shows which sources have fired, the latest observation timestamp, and the top-10 indicators by confidence.

What is a finding?

A finding is a specific security issue discovered by the scan pipeline or AI analysis. Each finding has a severity level, control mapping (control_id), description, recommended remediation, and optionally regulatory references. Findings are deduplicated using two layers: deterministic title normalisation and AI-powered semantic grouping.

What severity levels exist?

Five canonical severity levels are used: CRITICAL (red, 25pts) — actively exploited vulnerability or confirmed breach with immediate risk of data loss, system compromise, or regulatory breach. HIGH (orange, 15pts) — verified exploitable weakness with high likelihood of impact; requires attacker action but path is clear. MEDIUM (yellow, 8pts) — observable configuration gap or weakness; exploitable but requires specific conditions or attacker sophistication. LOW (blue, 3pts) — minor configuration improvement or limited-evidence observation with low likelihood of exploitation. INFO (grey, 0pts) — observation only; no risk, used for metadata, positive control confirmation, or context. For CVE findings, severity is determined by EPSS (Exploit Prediction Scoring System) first, which predicts real-world exploitation probability in the next 30 days. EPSS thresholds: 70%+ = CRITICAL, 30-70% = HIGH, 10-30% = MEDIUM, <10% = LOW. CVSS is used as a fallback only when EPSS data is unavailable (older CVEs). These definitions are stored in the severity_definitions table and injected into all AI agent prompts to ensure consistent classification across the platform.

Why does a control show 0 findings?

A control with zero findings has one of two meanings: (a) Healthy — the owning agent ran and found no open issues for this control, shown with a green check, or (b) Not yet assessed — the owning agent has not yet produced findings for this control, shown with a grey dash. Check the Control Breakdown view to see which state applies. If not yet assessed, the agent may still be processing or the vendor may not have scan data for that control yet. If healthy, the control is passing for your vendor.

How do I triage findings?

Findings follow a status workflow: OPEN (newly discovered) -> IN_PROGRESS (remediation underway) -> PENDING_REVIEW (awaiting approval) -> RESOLVED (confirmed fixed). You can also mark findings as ACCEPTED (risk accepted, not fixing) or FALSE_POSITIVE if appropriate. Use the findings list bulk actions to triage multiple findings at once.

How are findings mapped to risk controls?

Each finding maps to one of 30 current controls via control_id. Controls are grouped into 7 scoring domains (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, Geopolitical & Sovereign). Controls link to specific regulatory frameworks including ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI, and NDB.

What are per-org overrides?

When a vendor is shared across multiple organisations, each organisation can set their own status and priority for shared findings. For example, one org may accept the risk of a finding while another marks it as critical. Per-org overrides do not affect the underlying finding record visible to other organisations.

How does GitHub discovery work?

ChainShield searches GitHub for organisations and repositories associated with a vendor's domain or company name. It uses the GitHub API to collect metadata such as stars, forks, open advisories, security policies, licence type, and release signing practices. It does NOT scan source code. Findings are generated for security posture gaps like missing security policies (SECURITY.md), unsigned releases, and unaddressed advisories. GitHub-sourced findings are mapped to the risk control that best matches the gap (e.g., attack_surface for unaddressed vulnerabilities, policy_governance for missing governance documentation) — there is no legacy category field.

What are org-private findings?

Org-private findings are findings created manually by your organisation that are only visible to your org. They are stored separately from vendor-level findings discovered by scans. Other organisations sharing the same vendor cannot see your org-private findings. They are marked with an [Org] badge in the findings list. You can delete org-private findings, but you cannot delete vendor-level findings (use status overrides instead).

How do I filter findings by risk control?

Use the Control filter in the findings page filter bar to select a specific risk control (e.g. platform_email_hardening, data_security_retention). The findings list will narrow to only those mapped to that control. You can also click a control row in the vendor detail page's Risk tab Control Breakdown panel — this filters findings by control and navigates to the findings page with the filter pre-applied. The URL parameter ?control=CONTROL_ID is shareable, so you can send filtered findings views to colleagues. Combine control filtering with severity and status filters for precise triage.

What is the risk score on findings?

Each finding has a per-finding risk score (0-100) calculated by the v3 scoring engine. The score combines three dimensions: severity (how critical the issue is, from CVSS for CVEs or control criticality for others), likelihood (how likely it is to be exploited, from EPSS data for CVEs or evidence quality for others), and context (internet-facing exposure, end-of-life software, criticality of the affected control). For example, a CRITICAL CVE with high EPSS on a public-facing production server scores much higher than the same CVE on an isolated internal system. The risk score is the primary sort signal for prioritisation — higher scores mean greater business impact. Click a finding to see its Risk Score Breakdown, which shows the calculation formula and component contributions.

Which agent discovered this finding?

The Source Agent field on the finding detail card shows which of the 7 domain agents created the finding. For example, a password-reuse finding comes from the Cybersecurity agent, a business continuity gap from Operational Resilience, and a sanctions match from Geopolitical & Sovereign. The source agent is logged for all findings and helps with auditability and understanding the analysis chain.

What are the three types of evidence gap messages?

Evidence gap messages vary by source: 'Control not yet assessed -- request vendor documentation' means the control could not be verified remotely; request regulatory documents such as SOC 2 Type II reports, ISO 27001 certificates, business continuity plans, or data residency statements. 'Vendor blocks remote verification -- awaiting direct response' means the vendor's security.txt configuration blocks automated verification; contact the vendor directly for evidence. 'Awaiting vendor response' means vendor-supplied evidence is expected (e.g., from a questionnaire or supplementary submission). Each message type indicates which remediation approach to take.

What is a rollup finding?

A rollup finding combines multiple related low-severity issues into a single aggregated finding for cleaner reporting. For example, a vulnerability rollup contains 50+ CVEs below the critical threshold that do not warrant individual triage. Rollups show the count of members in a badge (e.g. "Rollup: 42 CVEs"). Click the badge to open a drawer listing all members. Rollups contribute to your risk score but are not triaged individually. If any member crosses a critical threshold (KEV listed, CVSS >= 9.0, EPSS >= 0.8), it is automatically promoted to a discrete finding for dedicated attention.

How does threat intelligence scoring work?

ChainShield sources threat intelligence from 8 providers: OTX pulses, AbuseIPDB, CISA AIS, Cloudflare Radar, abuse.ch URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, and SSLBL. Each source checks whether your vendor infrastructure matches known malicious indicators (botnets, C2 servers, malware hosting, phishing kit distribution). High-confidence threat signals (TLP RED or AMBER from authoritative sources) are surfaced as discrete findings for immediate action. Lower-confidence signals or routine observations are rolled up into a vendor-level Active Threat Exposure rollup mapped to the incident_history control (Threat Exposure & Incident History). The /intelligence view on each vendor page shows which sources have fired, with confidence scores and latest observation timestamps.

Worked Example

Your vendor has a CRITICAL CVE finding

A scan found CVE-2024-XXXX on your vendor’s web server. Check the EPSS score (probability of exploitation) — if >0.5, this is actively being exploited in the wild. Change status to IN_PROGRESS, notify the vendor via the assessment portal or directly, and track remediation. If the vendor patches and the next scan confirms, the finding will auto-resolve to SYSTEM_RESOLVED.

Related Pages

VendorsRemediationReports

Assets

Unified view of all discovered digital assets across your vendors. Assets are found automatically during scans and include domains, subdomains, IP addresses, certificates, and repositories.

Asset confirmation and rejection

Discovered assets start as unconfirmed. Confirming an asset marks it as a genuine part of the vendor’s attack surface and activates it for risk scoring. Rejecting removes it from active monitoring. Only superusers and MSP administrators can confirm or reject assets — organisation-level users have read-only access to the asset inventory.

Lifecycle management

Assets have lifecycle states: Active (monitored), Stale (not seen recently), Retired (decommissioned), and Resolved (issue addressed). Retiring or resolving assets auto-closes linked findings and excludes them from risk scoring.

Data sovereignty

Each asset is tagged with a hosting location: Domestic (hosted in Australia), Foreign (hosted overseas), CDN Distributed (content delivery network), or Unknown (geolocation could not be determined). This is used for compliance mapping against ISM, PSPF, and CPS 234 data sovereignty requirements.

Keyboard navigation

Use Tab to move between asset rows and Enter to open the detail view. Rows show a visible focus indicator when navigated via keyboard. Bulk actions are available via the selection checkboxes and the floating action bar. All filter dropdowns support full keyboard navigation: arrow keys to browse options, Enter to select, and Escape to close.

Screen reader announcements

Bulk actions (confirm, reject) announce their results to screen readers automatically. When you confirm or reject assets in bulk, an announcement such as "3 assets confirmed" is delivered via an ARIA live region so you know the operation completed without needing to visually check the page.

Instant page loads

Asset data is cached locally and served instantly when you navigate back to this page. A background refresh updates the data silently. Bulk actions (retire, resolve, delete) automatically invalidate the cache so you always see fresh results.

Searching assets

Use the search bar in the filter bar to find assets by value (domain, IP, hostname) or type. Search is real-time and filters server-side for fast results even with large asset inventories. Combine search with type, lifecycle, sovereignty, and vendor filters for precise results.

Filtering by asset type and sovereignty

Filter dropdowns show only asset types and sovereignty statuses that exist in your organisation's assets. This bounds the dropdown options to what is actually in use, making it easier to find relevant filters. Filters are organisation-scoped - superusers may see different options than organisation-level users.

Bulk Export

Download all assets as CSV via the Export button or the /api/assets/export endpoint.

What are assets?

Assets are digital infrastructure components discovered under a vendor's domain: domains, subdomains, IP addresses, GitHub repositories, and TLS certificates. Each asset tracks open ports, TLS configuration, geolocation, hosting location status, services snapshot, and associated findings.

What is hosting location classification?

Hosting location classification is based on IP geolocation of each asset: Domestic (hosted in Australia), Foreign (hosted overseas), CDN Distributed (served via content delivery network), and Unknown (geolocation could not be determined). For foreign-hosted assets, the geopolitical risk profile is assessed separately using country data and geographic concentration analysis. This is critical for compliance with Australian data residency requirements and SOCI Act obligations.

What asset lifecycle statuses exist?

Assets have four lifecycle statuses: Active (seen in the most recent scan), Stale (not seen in recent scans but not yet retired), Retired (manually marked as decommissioned), and Resolved (issue that triggered the asset record is no longer detected). Stale assets are flagged for review as they may indicate shadow IT or decommissioned infrastructure.

How are assets discovered?

Assets are discovered through multiple OSINT methods: DNS enumeration (A, AAAA, MX, NS, TXT records via HackerTarget), SecurityTrails subdomain history, Shodan host enrichment (ports, services, banners), Censys per-IP enrichment (certificates, protocols), and GitHub repository search. New assets discovered in subsequent scans are added automatically.

What is Firecrawl?

Firecrawl is a page-rendering integration used during the scan pipeline to handle JavaScript-heavy single-page applications (SPAs). Many modern vendor websites load content dynamically, which means static HTTP requests miss certificates, product details, and security metadata embedded in the rendered page. Firecrawl renders the page in a headless browser and returns the full DOM, allowing ChainShield to extract product information, TLS certificate chains, and other security-relevant data that would otherwise be invisible to the scanner.

What are auto-confirm rules?

Auto-confirm rules let you configure patterns to automatically confirm discovered assets during scans. Three rule types are supported: Domain Suffix (e.g. ".acme.com.au"), ASN Match (e.g. "AS13335"), and IP CIDR (e.g. "203.0.113.0/24"). Rules can be set at three scope levels: vendor-specific (per vendor), organisation-wide (applies to all vendors in your org), or global (superuser only, platform-wide). Vendor rules take highest precedence, then org rules, then global. First match wins. Non-matching assets remain pending for manual review.

What certificate metadata is shown?

The Certificate & TLS tab shows: Subject (CN), Issuer, validity dates (Valid From / Valid Until), protocol version, cipher suite, Subject Alternative Names (SANs), SHA-256 fingerprint, key size and algorithm, and a provenance badge. The provenance badge tells you how the cert was collected: "via bbot" means the scan discovered it passively, "via SSL Labs" means it was verified via the SSL Labs grading API, and "via active probe" means ChainShield performed a direct TLS handshake to fill a gap. Expiry badges show "Expired" (red) when the certificate has expired - this is the only expiry state that generates a finding (HIGH severity). A near-expiry cert with automated renewal is routine operational hygiene, not vendor risk, so it no longer generates a finding (CD-4634) - the tab may still show an informational upcoming-expiry date, but it will not appear on the Findings list. Self-signed certificates are flagged with a HIGH-severity banner. If you see "TLS probe pending", it means port 443 is confirmed open but no cert data has been collected yet - it will appear after the next enrichment run (usually within 24 hours). SHA-256 fingerprint is truncated in the UI; hover over it to see the full value.

Why does cert info say "TLS probe pending"?

"TLS probe pending" appears when the asset has port 443 confirmed open in its services snapshot but no certificate data has been collected yet. This happens when the passive bbot sslcert module did not fire during the initial scan (common on non-standard server configurations) and the active probe has not yet run. The active probe runs automatically during the next enrichment cycle, usually within 24 hours. If the status persists after two enrichment runs, check that the host actually terminates TLS on port 443 (some hosts redirect HTTP traffic on 443 rather than serving a TLS handshake directly).

Why is there no finding for a certificate nearing expiry?

A certificate approaching expiry is not a finding at all (CD-4634) - only an already-EXPIRED certificate generates one, at HIGH severity. Near-expiry certificates are routine operational hygiene: modern certificate lifecycles (Let's Encrypt and most commercial CAs) auto-renew well before the deadline, so flagging a cert as "expiring soon" produced false-positive escalations on certificates that were never actually at risk. An expired certificate is HIGH because it causes immediate trust failures for end users and indicates a genuine process breakdown - that is the only cert-expiry severity the platform raises. The asset's Certificate & TLS tab still shows an informational upcoming-expiry date so you can track it, but it will not appear on the Findings list until the certificate actually expires.

What are PHYSICAL_LOCATION assets?

PHYSICAL_LOCATION assets represent discovered office locations for a vendor. These are automatically created during vendor scans using Google Places data after the business intelligence agent completes. Each location includes geo-coordinates (latitude/longitude), city, state, country, and postcode. Physical locations help identify geographic concentration risk and support data sovereignty assessments.

Related Pages

VendorsFindings

Risk Controls

The Controls dashboard shows your organisation's vendor risk posture through the ChainShield 7-domain risk framework with 30 current controls. All data is scoped to your organisation's vendors, with domains sorted worst-first so you can focus on what matters most.

Accordion view and filters

Controls are displayed in a collapsible accordion grouped by domain. By default, the top 2 worst-scored domains are expanded so you can immediately see your biggest risks. Use the filter bar at the top to search, filter by domain, specific control, vendor, severity, or risk group. All filters sync to the URL, so you can bookmark and share filtered views.

Org-scoped view

All scores, finding counts, and vendor breakdowns are filtered to your organisation's vendors only. Domain cards are sorted worst-performing first, so your biggest risks are always at the top.

Understanding the domain hierarchy

Risk is measured across 7 domains: Cybersecurity (40% weight), Operational Resilience (20%), Compliance & Regulatory (15%), Privacy & Data Protection (10%), Financial & Supply Chain (5%), Reputational (5%), and Geopolitical & Sovereign (5%). Domain weights reflect their relative importance to your organisation's risk posture.

Vendor breakdown per control

Each control card shows a description of what the control covers and a progress bar showing how many of your vendors pass or fail it. Click the arrow on a control card to open a side panel showing the per-vendor breakdown with scores and severity badges. From there, click any vendor row to jump directly to their findings for that control. This is the fastest way to prioritise remediation by control.

Control descriptions

Every control has a description explaining what it covers and why it matters. Hover over or click the control card to see the full description. This helps you understand which controls are relevant to your organisation's context.

Severity mini-pills and regulatory chips

Control cards show a quick severity breakdown (e.g., "3 H · 1 M") so you can spot which controls have critical issues at a glance. Regulatory framework badges (ISM, NIST, etc.) show which compliance mappings apply, helping you prioritise by regulatory obligation.

Regulatory framework mapping

Controls are mapped to Australian regulatory frameworks (ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI, Cyber Security Act 2024). The badges on each control show which regulations are relevant, helping you prioritise remediation for compliance.

How many controls are there?

ChainShield uses a 7-domain assessment framework with 30 current controls. Those same controls are what agents emit, what scoring engines use, and what the database accepts for new findings.

Why does the Monitoring, Detection & Cyber Response control always show "not assessed"?

Monitoring & Detection is the one control ChainShield cannot verify through external scanning at all — there is no public signal that tells us whether a vendor runs a SOC, a SIEM, or has an incident-response runbook. Until a vendor responds to a questionnaire on this topic, the control shows as not-assessed and contributes nothing to the vendor's risk score (it is deliberately excluded from the risk calculation while unverified, so vendors are never penalised for something ChainShield structurally cannot check). It still counts toward your coverage picture, though — a vendor with everything else assessed will show "8 of 9 cybersecurity controls assessed" until this one is answered. Once a vendor provides evidence (a questionnaire response or an artefact like a SOC 2 report), the control starts contributing to the score like any other.

What does "X of Y vendors failing" mean?

This shows how many of your organisation's vendors have open findings mapped to that control. For example, "3 of 8 vendors failing" means 3 of your 8 vendors have at least one open finding for that control.

What does a control score of 0 mean?

A score of 0 means no open findings are mapped to that control — it is in a healthy state. Control scores are driven primarily by the worst finding (70% weight), with additional findings adding diminishing returns (30% weight with harmonic decay). This means the severity of your worst finding matters more than the volume of issues. One critical finding will always score higher than many low-severity findings.

How are findings mapped to controls?

Findings are mapped to risk controls directly by AI agents during analysis. Any unmapped findings are automatically assigned to the appropriate control as a post-processing step.

Why are domains sorted by score instead of weight?

Domains are sorted worst-first (highest score first) so you can quickly identify where your biggest risks are. This helps you prioritise remediation efforts on the domains that need the most attention.

How do I drill into a control?

Click the arrow button on any control card to open a side panel showing all vendors for that control. The panel displays each vendor's score and finding severity breakdown, with links to jump directly to their findings. You can also use the search and filter bar to narrow to specific controls or vendors.

Related Pages

FindingsCompliance DashboardAgent RulesVendorsDomain Weight Configuration

How Risk Scoring Works

ChainShield calculates a 0–100 composite risk score for every vendor through a hierarchical model: findings map to one of 30 controls, controls roll up into 7 weighted risk domains, and domains combine into a single composite score. A second, per-organisation overlay score can diverge from the global score when your organisation’s context (tier, business criticality, data sensitivity) changes the picture.

The 7 risk domains and their weights

Findings are mapped to 30 controls across 7 domains, each contributing a fixed share of the composite score: Cybersecurity 40%, Operational Resilience 20%, Compliance & Regulatory 15%, Privacy & Data Protection 10%, Financial & Supply Chain 5%, Reputational 5%, and Geopolitical & Sovereign 5%. Cybersecurity dominates because exploitable technical weaknesses are the most common and most severe root cause of vendor incidents. Domain weights can be customised per organisation (Controls > Domain Weight Configuration) subject to a MEDIUM < HIGH < CRITICAL guard on the resulting thresholds.

Findings map to controls, not categories

Every finding is assigned a `control_id` directly by the AI agent that discovered it (e.g. `attack_surface`, `network_exposure`, `data_security_retention`) — there is no separate "category" concept. The 30 controls are current, meaning each one has exactly one owning agent responsible for assessing it. A control’s points contribute to its domain’s raw score; the domain raw score is normalised to 0–100 and multiplied by the domain’s weight; weighted domain scores sum to the composite score (clamped 0–100).

Two score levels: global vs. per-organisation

Every vendor carries a global score (`vendors.risk_score`) calculated from ALL of that vendor’s OPEN findings, set when a scan completes. Each organisation that links to the vendor can additionally have its own overlay score (`organisation_vendors.risk_score`) that amplifies or dampens the global score based on that organisation’s context — business criticality, data sensitivity, whether the vendor is a material service provider or critical-infrastructure dependency — and excludes findings that organisation has already RESOLVED or ACCEPTED. When `organisation_vendors.risk_score` is NULL, it means your organisation’s context has not diverged from the defaults, so the dashboard falls through to the global score automatically — NULL is not "unscored," it is "nothing organisation-specific to show."

Risk bands: Critical, High, Medium, Low

The numeric 0–100 score maps to a label by default: Critical ≥ 80, High ≥ 60, Medium ≥ 40, otherwise Low. Superusers can adjust these boundaries platform-wide in Admin > Settings > Platform; both the Next.js app and the Python scoring workers pick up a threshold change within 5 minutes with no deploy required.

Which engine is authoritative

The Python scoring engine (`worker/scoring/engine.py`, running in the scan pipeline workers) is the single source of truth for every persisted risk score. A parallel TypeScript implementation (`lib/risk-calculation.ts`) exists only to give you an immediate, optimistic score preview in the UI right after you change something — it never writes to the database. The real Python rescore follows automatically via a Redis queue, typically within about a minute, and always wins.

Why did a vendor’s score change without a new scan?

Risk scores also recalculate when finding status changes (resolved, accepted, reopened) or when your organisation’s context fields change (business criticality, data sensitivity, material service provider flag, critical infrastructure flag). Any of these enqueue a rescore job on the Redis `scan:risk_scoring` queue, which the Python `risk_scoring_worker.py` picks up — no fresh vendor scan is required.

Why do I see a different score than a colleague at another organisation using the same vendor?

You are both looking at the same vendor, but if either organisation’s context has diverged from the defaults (different business criticality, data sensitivity, or resolved/accepted findings), that organisation gets its own `organisation_vendors.risk_score` overlay instead of the shared global score. This is intentional — the same vendor genuinely represents different risk to different organisations.

Why does one CRITICAL finding in a 5%-weighted domain barely move the score?

Domain weighting alone can bury a severe finding in a low-weight domain (e.g. Reputational at 5%). ChainShield applies a severity floor after the weighted composite is calculated: any OPEN CRITICAL finding raises the composite to at least 25, and any OPEN HIGH finding raises it to at least 15, whichever floor is higher applies. This prevents a genuinely severe issue from being mathematically invisible just because of where it landed in the domain taxonomy.

Where can I see the control-level detail behind a score?

The vendor detail page’s Risk tab breaks the composite score down by domain and control, showing which controls are driving the score and their assessment status. The Controls page shows the full 30-control taxonomy and lets you review domain weight configuration if you have admin access.

Related Pages

ControlsDomain Weight ConfigurationVendorsCompliance

Domain Weight Configuration

Org Admin

Customise how each of the 7 risk domains contributes to your organisation's composite risk scores. Weights must sum to 100% and override the system defaults for all vendor scoring within your organisation.

Why customise domain weights?

Different organisations have different risk appetites. A healthcare provider may weight Privacy & Data Protection higher, while a logistics company may prioritise Operational Resilience. Adjusting weights ensures your composite risk scores reflect what matters most to your business.

How weights affect scoring

Domain weights determine how much each domain contributes to the composite risk score. For example, if Cybersecurity is weighted at 40%, then 40% of the composite score comes from the cybersecurity domain score. All 7 weights must sum to exactly 100%.

Fallback to defaults

If no custom weights are configured, your organisation uses the system defaults: Cybersecurity 40%, Operational Resilience 20%, Compliance & Regulatory 15%, Privacy & Data Protection 10%, Financial & Supply Chain 5%, Reputational 5%, Geopolitical & Sovereign 5%.

Regulatory uplifts still apply

Even with custom weights, regulatory auto-uplifts (e.g., CPS 234 raising Cybersecurity to a minimum of 30%) are applied on top of your configuration. This ensures compliance requirements are always met.

When do new weights take effect?

New weights are used the next time a vendor risk score is calculated (on the next scan or manual rescore). Existing scores are not retroactively recalculated.

Can I reset to system defaults?

Yes. Use the "Reset to defaults" button to restore the system default weights, then save to persist the change.

Who can change domain weights?

Only organisation admins and owners can modify domain weights. Other users can view the current configuration but cannot edit it.

Related Pages

Controls DashboardComplianceSettings

Compliance

View your compliance posture across Australian regulatory frameworks. See which controls have gaps and generate evidence for audits.

Understanding framework coverage

Each regulatory framework (ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, SOCI, NDB, Privacy Act, Cyber Security Act 2024) shows a coverage percentage based on how many mapped controls have passing findings versus gaps. A coverage of 100% means no active findings affect that framework’s controls.

Control gap analysis

Drill into any framework to see the specific controls with gaps. Each gap links to the findings that caused it and the vendors affected. Use this to prioritise remediation efforts by regulatory impact.

Exporting compliance evidence

Export the compliance matrix as CSV for audit preparation, or generate PDF reports for formal evidence. CSV exports include vendor-by-framework scores and gap counts. PDF reports include framework coverage summary, control-level gap detail, and a list of open findings mapped to each control.

Regulatory scope configuration

Frameworks are determined by your organisation’s regulatory_frameworks setting and per-vendor regulatory_scope overrides. Configure these in Settings (organisation-wide) or on each vendor’s detail page (vendor-specific).

PCI DSS 4.0 compliance tracking

ChainShield supports PCI DSS 4.0 as a regulatory framework for organisations processing payment card data. Findings are mapped to PCI DSS requirements: CVEs to Req.6.3.3 (patching) and Req.11.3.1 (vulnerability scanning), open ports to Req.1.2.1/1.3.1 (network segmentation), encryption issues to Req.4.2.1 (strong cryptography), and governance gaps to Req.12.8.1/12.8.2 (Third-Party Service Provider (TPSP) management). Enable PCI DSS in Settings › Regulatory Frameworks to activate these mappings.

PCI DSS TPSP compliance status

For vendors subject to PCI DSS, track their compliance attestation status (Compliant, Non-Compliant, Not Assessed, Not Applicable) on the vendor detail page. PCI DSS Req.12.8.4 requires annual monitoring of TPSP compliance. ChainShield records the last attestation date to help you track annual confirmation cadence.

Contract clause compliance

Each active vendor contract can be checked against 14 mandatory clause categories derived from Australian regulatory requirements (CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, NDB, SOCI, ISM). Open a contract in the Vendors page to see the Clause Compliance Checklist. Applicable clauses are filtered based on the contract type and vendor context (e.g. material service provider status, data handling). The compliance dashboard shows an aggregate count of contracts with clause gaps.

Fourth-party concentration analysis

Use this widget to identify sub-contractors that multiple vendors depend on — if that sub-contractor fails, all those vendors are affected simultaneously. Sub-contractors used by more than 50% of your critical vendors are flagged as single points of failure. Add fourth parties on each vendor’s 4th Parties tab to build a complete picture, then develop contingency plans for any flagged dependencies.

Risk controls by domain

Expand any domain to see which specific controls are driving risk and how many open findings exist at each severity level. Use this to identify the controls that need the most attention across your vendor portfolio, then click any control to drill into the full Controls page and see which vendors are affected.

Modern slavery risk indicators

ChainShield automatically assesses each vendor for modern slavery risk using three indicators: jurisdiction risk (based on the Global Slavery Index for countries in the vendor's physical locations), sector/industry risk (high-risk sectors include manufacturing, construction, textiles, mining, and agriculture), and revenue threshold applicability (the Modern Slavery Act 2018 requires entities with >$100M consolidated revenue to report). These indicators map to the esg_modern_slavery control (ESG / Modern Slavery Compliance). The Australian Modern Slavery Register is also checked for filed statements. Vendors in high-risk jurisdictions or sectors should receive additional due diligence using the 6 structured assessment questions provided.

What frameworks are mapped?

ChainShield maps findings to Australian regulatory frameworks (ASD ISM, APRA CPS 234, APRA CPS 230, Privacy Act 1988, SOCI Act, NDB scheme, Cyber Security Act 2024) and international standards including PCI DSS 4.0. PCI DSS mappings cover vulnerability management (Req.6.3.3, Req.11.3.1), network security (Req.1.2.1, Req.1.3.1), encryption (Req.4.2.1), and Third-Party Service Provider management (Req.12.8). Each finding shows which specific controls it relates to.

How does automatic mapping work?

Risk driver tags on findings are automatically mapped to specific regulatory controls via the compliance mapper. For example, a finding tagged DATA_EXPOSURE maps to CPS 234 controls around information asset classification and Privacy Act obligations. The mapping runs as part of the scan pipeline and appears on finding detail pages and compliance reports.

What is CPS 230 Material?

Material service provider is a designation under APRA CPS 230 (Operational Risk Management). When a vendor is marked as a material service provider, it indicates the vendor provides services that, if disrupted, could have a material impact on the organisation's business operations. This designation triggers additional risk score multipliers and compliance obligations.

What is NDB Applicable?

NDB Applicable indicates whether a vendor holds personal information that would trigger Notifiable Data Breach obligations under the Privacy Act 1988 (s26WE). When enabled, findings related to data exposure or weak encryption receive regulatory uplift in their business impact scores, and the compliance section flags specific NDB reporting considerations.

What are ISM data classification levels?

ChainShield supports Australian Government ISM data classification levels: OFFICIAL:Sensitive (routine government information requiring basic protections), PROTECTED (information whose compromise could cause damage to national interest), and SECRET (information whose compromise could cause serious damage). Assign the appropriate classification to each vendor based on the sensitivity of data they handle. Higher classifications trigger stricter compliance control requirements and amplify risk scores to reflect the greater potential impact of a security incident.

What is PCI DSS 4.0 and how does ChainShield support it?

PCI DSS 4.0 (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) is mandatory for any organisation processing, storing, or transmitting cardholder data. ChainShield maps scan findings to PCI DSS requirements and tracks Third-Party Service Provider (TPSP) compliance per Requirement 12.8. You can record each vendor's PCI DSS compliance status (Compliant, Non-Compliant, Not Assessed, Not Applicable) and track annual attestation dates. Enable PCI DSS in your organisation's regulatory frameworks to activate scoring uplifts and compliance mappings.

How does modern slavery risk assessment work?

ChainShield assesses modern slavery risk using three automated indicators: jurisdiction risk (Global Slavery Index data for vendor operating locations), sector risk (high-risk industries like manufacturing, construction, textiles, mining), and revenue threshold ($100M+ triggers Modern Slavery Act 2018 reporting obligations). The Australian Modern Slavery Register is checked for filed statements. Vendors flagged as high-risk should complete a 6-question structured due diligence assessment covering policy, supply chain due diligence, site audits, training, grievance mechanisms, and remediation history. All indicators feed into the esg_modern_slavery control score.

What are the 14 mandatory contract clauses?

ChainShield checks vendor contracts against 14 mandatory clause categories: Data Protection & Privacy, Breach Notification, Audit & Inspection Rights, Subcontractor Controls, Service Level & Availability, Business Continuity & DR, Data Sovereignty, Termination & Exit, Security Standards, Incident Response, IP & Data Ownership, Insurance & Indemnification, Compliance Reporting, and Change Management. Each clause maps to specific Australian regulatory requirements. Not all clauses apply to every contract — applicability depends on the contract type and vendor context (e.g. material service provider, data handling, critical infrastructure).

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsMSP RegisterSettings

Assessments

Structured questionnaires to evaluate vendor security posture beyond what OSINT scanning can detect.

When to use assessments

Assessments complement automated scanning. Use them to validate internal controls, request evidence of certifications (ISO 27001, SOC 2), collect SBOMs, and verify incident response plans — things that can’t be discovered externally.

SBOM analysis and vulnerability detection

When a vendor submits a Software Bill of Materials (SBOM), ChainShield automatically cross-references every component against the NVD (National Vulnerability Database — official US vulnerability registry) using CPE (Common Platform Enumeration — unique software identifier) matching. Vulnerable components generate COMPONENT_VULN_IN_SBOM findings with the relevant CVE ID and CVSS score. If a vendor has been onboarded for more than 30 days without providing an SBOM, a SBOM_MISSING finding is created as a governance gap. Request SBOMs in SPDX or CycloneDX format via the assessment portal.

Creating and sending

Create from a template, customise questions if needed, then send via the vendor portal. Vendors receive a unique link — no ChainShield account required. Responses are scored automatically and feed into the vendor risk profile.

Tracking progress

Assessment statuses: DRAFT → SENT → VIEWED → IN_PROGRESS → COMPLETED. Overdue assessments appear on the dashboard and can trigger webhook notifications to Slack or Teams.

Vendor questionnaire experience

Vendors complete questionnaires via a multi-step wizard that groups questions by category. Responses auto-save every 30 seconds so vendors can leave and resume without losing progress. A final review step lets them check all answers before submitting. No ChainShield account is required — vendors access the wizard via a unique portal link.

How do assessments work?

Assessments are structured questionnaires sent to vendors to evaluate their security posture. Create an assessment from a template, customise questions if needed, and send it to the vendor via their portal link. Vendors complete the questionnaire and can attach evidence (e.g., certifications, SBOMs). Responses are scored automatically and feed into the vendor risk profile.

What is the vendor portal?

The vendor portal is a public-facing link where vendors complete questionnaires, submit Software Bills of Materials (SBOMs), upload certifications, and respond to remediation requests. Each vendor gets a unique portal URL. No ChainShield account is required for vendors to use the portal.

How does SBOM vulnerability analysis work?

When a vendor submits an SBOM (SPDX or CycloneDX format), ChainShield automatically cross-references every component against the National Vulnerability Database (NVD) using CPE-based matching. Each vulnerable component generates a COMPONENT_VULN_IN_SBOM finding with the CVE ID, CVSS score, and severity. If a vendor has been onboarded for more than 30 days without providing an SBOM, a SBOM_MISSING governance finding is created. SBOM files are stored in a private, organisation-scoped storage bucket with row-level security.

What assessment statuses exist?

Assessment lifecycle statuses: DRAFT (created but not yet sent), SENT (delivered to vendor), VIEWED (vendor has opened the link), IN_PROGRESS (vendor has started answering), COMPLETED (all questions answered and submitted). Overdue assessments are flagged in the dashboard and can trigger webhook notifications.

Related Pages

Assessment TemplatesVendors

Vendor Self-Assessments

Record your organisation's private evaluation of a vendor's capability. Self-assessments are org-only - the vendor never sees them. Use the Form sub-tab to fill in responses, Remediations to track follow-up actions, and History to review score trends over time.

How do I record my own assessment of a vendor?

Navigate to a vendor's detail page, click the "Self-Assessment" tab, and start an assessment using the Form sub-tab. The platform ships with a Starter assessment template; future epics will let your org add custom templates.

Will the vendor see my self-assessment answers?

No. Self-assessments are org-private - only your organisation (and your MSP admin if applicable) can see them. The vendor never sees the answers. This is enforced at the database level via Row Level Security; vendor portal users have zero access to the self-assessment data model.

How is the self-assessment score calculated?

Each answer maps to a 0-100 score. Rating questions (1-5) map to 0/25/50/75/100. Yes/No maps to 100/0. Yes/No/N/A - N/A is excluded from the average. Numeric values are capped at 0-100. The overall score is a weighted average across all questions in the template; weights are set per question by the template author. Text-only questions do not count toward the score.

How do I track issues found in an assessment?

Use the Remediations sub-tab. Each remediation ties to a specific response in an assessment. The status flow is: open or in_progress, then resolved, wont_fix, or accepted. Once a remediation reaches a terminal state (resolved, wont_fix, or accepted), it is final in v1. Every status change is recorded in an append-only audit log for compliance traceability.

How do I see how a vendor's score has changed over time?

Click the "History" sub-tab on the Self-Assessment tab of any vendor. You will see a timeline of all submitted assessments with the score, date, and delta from the prior submission. A trend chart at the top of the sub-tab plots the overall score over time.

Can I edit a submitted assessment?

Submitted assessments are locked, but you can reopen them via the "Reopen" button on the assessment detail. Reopening creates an audit-logged event in the append-only history; subsequent edits are preserved as a separate version. Once you re-submit, the assessment is locked again with the new responses and new score.

What's the difference between a vendor questionnaire and a self-assessment?

A Vendor Questionnaire is supplied and completed by the vendor - visibility is controlled by the vendor and they can see their own responses. A Self-Assessment is completed by your organisation about the vendor - it is org-private and vendors can never see it. The Self-Assessment tab only appears to organisation users and MSP admins; the Vendor Questionnaires page (/questionnaires) lists responses that came from vendors via the portal.

Can vendors see my self-assessment notes or remediations?

No. Self-assessment data (answers, remediations, history) is org-private and enforced at the database level via Row Level Security. Vendor portal users have zero access to the self-assessment data model - this is verified by an automated filesystem boundary test that runs on every CI build, asserting that no self-assessment or remediation routes exist under app/portal/(authenticated)/.

Related Pages

Vendors

Incidents

Track security incidents, data breaches, and outages affecting your vendors with a full audit timeline.

When to create an incident

Create an incident when a vendor experiences a confirmed or suspected security event: data breach, service outage, supply chain compromise, or regulatory non-compliance event. Link affected vendors and related findings for full traceability.

Incident types

Six types are supported: SECURITY (general), DATA_BREACH (NDB implications), OUTAGE (service disruption), COMPLIANCE (regulatory event), SUPPLY_CHAIN (upstream compromise), OTHER. Use the type filter on the incidents list to narrow down by type. The type determines which notification templates and compliance checklists apply.

NDB obligations

If the incident type is DATA_BREACH and the vendor holds personal information (NDB Applicable flag), ChainShield flags the specific NDB reporting considerations under Privacy Act 1988 s26WE. Time is critical — the mandatory notification window is 30 days from becoming aware.

Regulatory notification tracker

Each incident shows a Regulatory Notifications section listing all applicable notification obligations (NDB, CPS 234, CPS 230, SOCI, Cyber Security Act). Notifications are auto-created based on linked findings and incident type. Each row shows the framework, deadline, countdown timer, and current status. Mark notifications as "Notified" when you have submitted to the regulator, and record evidence notes (reference numbers, dates, contacts) for audit. Overdue notifications appear with a red highlight and are counted on the dashboard.

How do I track incidents?

Navigate to Incidents and click "New Incident". Link the incident to affected vendors and related findings. Add events to the timeline as the incident progresses (detection, containment, eradication, recovery). Each event captures what happened, who acted, and when. The incident timeline provides a complete audit trail.

What incident types exist?

Six incident types are supported: SECURITY (general security event), DATA_BREACH (confirmed or suspected data breach with NDB implications), OUTAGE (service disruption), COMPLIANCE (regulatory non-compliance event), SUPPLY_CHAIN (upstream vendor compromise), and OTHER. The incident type is shown as a badge on the list and detail views, and can be used as a filter. The type determines which notification templates and compliance checklists are applied.

What is shown in the incident timeline and APRA section?

The incident lifecycle section in the detail panel shows populated timestamps only: Reported, Contained, Resolved, and Closed. Pending steps are not displayed. The APRA Regulatory section appears when either "APRA Notifiable" is flagged or an "APRA Notification Date" is recorded. It shows a Yes/No badge for notifiability and the date the regulator was notified.

How are regulatory notifications auto-created?

When you create an incident and link findings, ChainShield checks each finding’s severity, NDB trigger flag, and compliance mappings to determine which frameworks require notification. For DATA_BREACH incidents, an NDB notification is always created. Deadlines are calculated per framework: NDB (30 days), CPS 234 (72 hours), CPS 230 (10 days), SOCI (30 days), Cyber Security Act (72 hours). You can also manually add notifications from the incident detail view.

What are incident status values?

Five incident statuses are supported: OPEN (newly reported, under investigation), INVESTIGATING (actively being analyzed), CONTAINED (immediate risk mitigated, root cause analysis ongoing), REMEDIATED (permanently fixed or resolved), and CLOSED (incident complete, post-incident review done). Use the status filter on the incidents list to narrow by stage. The status is shown as a badge on list and detail views.

Related Pages

FindingsVendors

Threat Intelligence

Portfolio-wide view of active threat intelligence across all your vendors. Switch between a vendor-card summary and a filterable row-level evidence table. Use ?vendor_id= to scope to a single vendor.

Vendor cards vs rows view

The default view shows all org-visible vendors that have had at least one threat intelligence source fire in the last 90 days. Click "View as rows" to switch to a filterable, paginated table of individual evidence rows from all 8 CTI adapters (CISA AIS, AlienVault OTX, AbuseIPDB, Cloudflare Radar, URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, SSLBL). Click any vendor name in the rows view to go to its full intelligence breakdown.

Filtering evidence rows

In rows view, use the source pills to show only evidence from specific sources, the severity pills to filter by severity level (rows with no severity are included when no severity filter is set), and the confidence minimum to hide low-confidence observations. All filters are URL-synced - bookmark or share the filtered URL to return to the same view.

Vendor-scoped view

Append ?view=rows&vendor_id=<uuid> to the URL to scope the row-level table to a single vendor. A back-link returns to the full portfolio view. You can also click a vendor name in the rows table to go to the per-vendor intelligence detail page.

What threat intelligence sources does ChainShield monitor?

ChainShield aggregates signals from 8 registered CTI adapters: CISA AIS (authoritative US government indicators, highest weight), AlienVault OTX (open threat exchange pulses), AbuseIPDB (community-reported abuse), Cloudflare Radar (BGP and attack data), URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, and SSLBL. Evidence is retained for 90 days from detection.

Why are some evidence rows missing a severity?

Not all intelligence sources provide a severity classification for every indicator. When severity is absent, the row shows a dash. Use the rows view without a severity filter to include these rows in your results, or add a severity filter to exclude them.

How do I scope the view to one vendor?

Open the rows view and share/bookmark the URL with ?view=rows&vendor_id=<vendor-uuid> appended, or navigate from the vendor cards view by clicking a vendor and returning to the intelligence page with its ID in the URL.

What should I do if my vendor appears in a threat feed?

First, verify the signal — false positives occur. Cross-check the vendor domain, IP address, or hash against the source directly. Contact the vendor to ask for context: is this a honeypot they operate for research, a shared cloud environment, or a legitimate business-use domain? If the signal is confirmed and indicates compromise (e.g., malware C2, botnet member, active intrusion), escalate to a finding and trigger a full security assessment.

Related Pages

FindingsVendors

Reports

Generate reports for stakeholders, auditors, and board-level risk communication.

Available report types

ChainShield offers persona-based reports tailored to different audiences: Board Summary (landscape slide deck PDF for C-suite), Executive Summary (CISO/risk manager risk posture), Vendor Deep-Dive (full technical detail for GRC analysts), Vendor Self-Assessment (sanitised report to share WITH the vendor), Compliance Report (framework-first view for auditors), Board Pack / Board & CIRMP (Critical Infrastructure Risk Management Program) Report Pack (10-section CSV for CIRMP governance). Additional exports: Findings Trends, Risk Distribution heatmap.

Board Summary

The Board Summary (the "Board Summary" button) generates a landscape-oriented, slide-style PDF deck suitable for board and executive presentations. It includes six slides: Executive Summary with key metrics, Risk Domain Breakdown across all 7 ChainShield domains, Top Risks with the most critical findings, Compliance Posture showing framework coverage percentages, Remediation Progress with open vs completed trends, and prioritised Recommendations. Each slide uses large fonts and minimal text for readability in presentations. Note: the Board Pack (CSV) is a separate, complementary export for formal CIRMP governance reporting.

Who gets what report

Board Summary for board/C-suite presentations (visual-heavy, no CVEs). Executive Summary for CISO/risk managers (domain breakdown, compliance gaps, vendor rankings). Vendor Deep-Dive for GRC analysts (full findings with CVE/CVSS/EPSS, assets, technologies). Vendor Self-Assessment for sharing WITH vendors (sanitised, excludes internal scores and AI narratives). Compliance Report for auditors (framework-first, control coverage, evidence trail). Findings Trends for security teams tracking remediation velocity. Board Pack (CSV) for formal CIRMP governance submissions.

Vendor Self-Assessment Report

The Vendor Self-Assessment report is designed to be shared directly with vendors. It contains only information appropriate for external recipients: open findings, remediation guidance, compliance gap indicators, and external attack surface summary. Internal fields (AI risk narratives, business impact scores, organisation-specific context) are excluded. Generate from the vendor detail page or the Reports page.

Compliance Report

The Compliance Report provides a framework-first view for auditors and GRC teams. It maps findings to regulatory frameworks (ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI Act, Cyber Security Act 2024), shows control-level pass/fail status, and includes an evidence trail of open findings with vendor attribution. Use the "Compliance Report" button in the page header to export as a PDF. Useful for audit preparation and regulatory reporting.

Board & CIRMP Report Pack

The Board & CIRMP Report Pack is a comprehensive 10-section reporting pack designed for board-level risk governance and CIRMP (Critical Infrastructure Risk Management Program) compliance. It includes: Executive Summary, Material Service Providers, Risk Posture, Compliance Status, Supply Chain Hazards, Incident Summary, Assessment Coverage, Remediation Status, Exit Readiness, and Key Risk Indicators (KRIs). Download as CSV for further analysis or present using the in-app preview.

Key Risk Indicators (KRIs)

The KRI dashboard shows 6 traffic-light indicators: Assessment Coverage (>90% green), Exit Plans for Material Vendors (100% green), Critical Findings open >30 days (0 green), Expiring Contracts within 90 days (0 green), Fourth-Party Concentration (<30% green), and Average Remediation Time (<14 days green). Red indicators require immediate board attention. Amber indicators should be monitored. Green indicators are within acceptable thresholds.

Reports & Exports hub

The Reports & Exports hub at the bottom of this page lists every available report and data export in one place, grouped by category: Board & Executive (Board Summary, Executive Summary, Compliance, Board & CIRMP Pack), Vendor Reports (per-vendor PDF, Vendor Self-Assessment, Vendor Compare), Data Exports (Findings CSV/PDF, Assets CSV, Vendors CSV), and Registers & Governance (Material Service Provider Register, MSP/CPS 230 Register, RACI Matrix, Audit Trail). Select a vendor using the "Vendor context" dropdown to enable vendor-specific exports. Some exports require admin or manager permissions.

Report access control

Board Summary, Board Pack, and Executive Summary are restricted to users with the admin or manager role. Compliance, Vendor, and Findings reports are available to all organisation members. If you do not see a report type, your role may not have permission to generate it.

Report access control

Board Summary, Board Pack, and Executive Summary are restricted to users with the admin or manager role. Compliance, Vendor, and Findings reports are available to all organisation members. If you do not see a report type, your role may not have permission to generate it.

Board Pack date range parameter

The Board & CIRMP Report Pack download accepts a "days" query parameter controlling the historical window (7 to 365 days, default 90). A 90-day window suits quarterly board packs; extend to 365 days for annual governance reviews.

Executive Summary regulatory mapping

The Executive Summary maps findings to Australian regulatory frameworks including ISM, CPS 234, and the Privacy Act 1988. Its compliance gap percentage reflects open findings across these frameworks — a lower percentage indicates stronger regulatory alignment.

What reports are available?

Eight persona-based report types are available: Board Summary (landscape slide deck PDF for C-suite), Executive Summary (CISO/risk manager portfolio view), Vendor Deep-Dive (full technical detail with CVEs, assets, technologies), Vendor Self-Assessment (sanitised for sharing with vendors), Compliance Report (framework-first view for auditors), Board & CIRMP Pack (10-section CSV with KRI dashboard), Findings Trends (new vs resolved), and Risk Distribution (heatmap). Reports can be exported as PDF or CSV depending on type.

What is the difference between Board Summary and Board Pack?

Board Summary and Board Pack are two separate exports designed for different audiences. The Board Summary (formerly "Board Report") is a landscape-oriented slide-style PDF — six slides with large fonts and minimal text, optimised for screen presentation to C-suite and board members. It contains: Executive Summary, Risk Domain Breakdown, Top Risks, Compliance Posture, Remediation Progress, and Recommendations. The Board Pack (Board & CIRMP Report Pack) is a comprehensive 10-section CSV file designed for governance and CIRMP compliance reporting: Executive Summary, Material Service Providers, Risk Posture, Compliance Status, Supply Chain Hazards, Incident Summary, Assessment Coverage, Remediation Status, Exit Readiness, and Key Risk Indicators. Use the Board Summary for board presentations; use the Board Pack for formal governance submissions and CIRMP reporting.

What is the Board Summary?

The Board Summary (the "Board Summary" button on the Reports page) generates a landscape-oriented, slide-style PDF deck for board and executive presentations. It includes six slides: Executive Summary (overall risk posture, trend direction, key metrics), Risk Domain Breakdown (7-domain scores table), Top Risks (top 5 critical/high findings with vendor names), Compliance Posture (framework coverage percentages for ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI, and Cyber Security Act 2024), Remediation Progress (open vs completed tasks with trend data), and Recommendations (prioritised action items). Each slide uses ChainShield branding with large fonts and minimal text for readability in presentations.

What is the Board & CIRMP Report Pack?

The Board & CIRMP Report Pack is a comprehensive 10-section reporting pack for board governance and CIRMP compliance. It covers: (1) Executive Summary, (2) Material Service Providers, (3) Risk Posture with top 10 riskiest vendors, (4) Compliance Status by framework, (5) Supply Chain Hazards and fourth-party concentration, (6) Incident Summary with mean time to contain, (7) Assessment Coverage, (8) Remediation Status, (9) Exit Readiness, and (10) Key Risk Indicators with RAG (Red/Amber/Green) thresholds. Sections that depend on features not yet configured (exit plans, fourth-party mapping) degrade gracefully with clear messaging.

What are the KRI thresholds?

KRIs use Red/Amber/Green thresholds: Assessment Coverage (>90% green, 70-90% amber, <70% red), Exit Plans for Material Vendors (100% green, 80-99% amber, <80% red), Critical Findings >30 days (0 green, 1-3 amber, >3 red), Contracts Expiring within 90 days (0 green, 1-2 amber, >2 red), Fourth-Party Concentration (<30% green, 30-50% amber, >50% red), Average Remediation Time (<14 days green, 14-30 days amber, >30 days red).

What export formats are supported?

Findings and assets can be exported as CSV, PDF, or XLSX (Excel). The XLSX format is recommended for working with data in spreadsheets — it includes a summary sheet with severity and control breakdowns, plus a detail sheet with auto-filters on every column, auto-sized column widths, and properly formatted date columns. The Board & CIRMP Report Pack is available as CSV. Use the export buttons in the page header or select specific items and export from the bulk action bar.

Related Pages

DashboardFindings

Settings, Team & Integrations

Configure your organisation’s preferences, team, integrations, and compliance defaults.

Organisation configuration

Set your organisation name, industry sector, and default regulatory frameworks. These defaults are applied to new vendors and affect which compliance mappings are highlighted in reports.

Scan schedule configuration

Configure how often ChainShield scans your vendors. Set an organisation-wide default (daily, weekly, fortnightly, monthly, or manual-only) and override individual vendors as needed. Enable the Material Change Trigger to automatically re-scan vendors when significant changes are detected between scheduled scans. The scan schedule section is in Organisation Settings.

Date and timezone display

All dates throughout ChainShield — scan timestamps, finding dates, contract dates, assessment due dates — are displayed using a three-level timezone precedence: (1) Organisation timezone set here by admins, (2) individual user profile timezone, (3) browser local timezone as fallback. Set an organisation-wide timezone in the Organisation Settings section under "Timezone" to ensure all team members see consistent date/time display regardless of their individual settings. Selecting "Use user / browser timezone" (the empty option) removes the organisation default and lets each member use their own preference.

Vendor approval workflow

Enable "Require approval for new vendors" in Security settings to prevent unvetted vendors from entering your portfolio. New vendors stay in Prospect status until an admin or manager approves them, giving you a gate to verify risk context and compliance scope before monitoring begins. Low-risk vendors (score below 30, Tier 3) are auto-approved to avoid bottlenecks.

Team management

Invite team members and assign personas to control their access and UI experience. Personas replace the old role dropdown — each persona automatically sets the underlying role (admin, manager, security, user, viewer) and tailors the UI (landing page, sidebar items, feature flags). Use the inline persona selector next to each team member to change their assignment. The same persona selector is available on the unified admin user management screen (/admin/users) with tier filtering.

Personas and role assignment

ChainShield uses personas to assign roles with tailored UI experiences. Each persona maps to a specific role (determining permissions) plus UI configuration (landing page, sidebar visibility, feature flags). 18 seeded personas are available across four persona groups: system (4), MSP (4), organisation (6), and vendor (4). Seeded personas like "Platform Owner", "MSP Administrator", "CISO / Head of Security", and "Vendor Security Lead" are pre-configured and cannot be modified. When assigning a persona, the underlying role is written to the member table atomically within a database transaction, so existing permission checks continue to work without change. Persona changes are audit-logged and trigger a JWT cache invalidation so the user picks up the new configuration on their next navigation.

How persona assignment works

Navigate to Settings > Team, select a team member, and choose a persona from the dropdown. The persona determines both the granted role (admin, manager, security, user, viewer) and the UI experience (landing page, visible sidebar items, feature flags). Changing a persona deactivates the old assignment and creates a new one — the full history is preserved in the audit log. Users without a persona assignment continue to work exactly as before (graceful degradation). An admin-initiated backfill script can assign personas to all existing users based on their current roles.

Persona-based sidebar and views

When a persona is assigned to a user, the sidebar navigation and landing page are automatically tailored to their workflow. The persona's ui_config controls which sidebar items are visible (via sidebar_items_hidden), which page loads after login (landing_page), and which optional features are enabled (feature_flags). Superusers and MSP users always see all sidebar items regardless of their persona. Users without a persona assignment see the default sidebar for their role level. Persona configuration uses stable item slugs (not URL paths), so sidebar filtering continues to work even if routes are renamed.

Feature flags via personas

Personas can enable or disable optional UI features via feature_flags in their ui_config. For example, a "General User" persona might have show_financial_data set to false to hide financial columns. Feature flags default to true (permissive) when not specified, so users without a persona or with an incomplete configuration see all features. Admins can preview which features a persona enables before assigning it.

Webhooks and integrations

Set up webhooks to receive real-time notifications in Slack, Teams, or custom endpoints. Events include: finding.created, vendor.risk_changed, assessment.completed, scan.completed. All payloads are signed with HMAC-SHA256.

Jira Cloud integration

Connect to Jira Cloud to automatically create issues from findings. You need your Jira instance URL (e.g. https://acme.atlassian.net), user email, API token from Atlassian account settings, and a project key (e.g. VRM). Finding severity maps to Jira priority, control mapping maps to issue labels (e.g. attack_surface, cross_border_transfer). Credentials are encrypted at rest. Use "Test Connection" to verify before saving.

ServiceNow integration

Connect to ServiceNow to create incidents from findings. You need your instance URL (e.g. https://acme.service-now.com), username, and password. Optionally specify an assignment group sys_id. Finding severity maps to ServiceNow impact and urgency. The control mapping (e.g. attack_surface, cross_border_transfer) is included in the description for proper classification. Credentials are encrypted at rest.

Creating tickets from findings

Once Jira or ServiceNow is configured, click "Create Ticket" on any finding detail page to push it to your ticketing system. The ticket includes severity, control mapping, vendor name, description, remediation plan, and a link back to ChainShield. Only one ticketing system can be active at a time.

Auto-tier billing

ChainShield automatically calculates your billing tier based on active vendor count, total assets, open findings, and regulatory context (material service providers, critical infrastructure designations). Plans: Free (2 vendors, $0/mo), Starter (10 vendors, $490/mo, $49 per extra vendor), Essentials (25 vendors, $975/mo, $39 per extra), Pro (50 vendors, $1,450/mo, $29 per extra), Enterprise (50+ vendors, custom pricing — contact sales). Additional vendors beyond your plan's included count are billed at your tier's per-vendor overage rate. Context factors like material service providers or critical infrastructure can push the tier up. Auto-tier runs after each scan and can be recalculated on demand from Settings › Billing. Admins can disable auto-tier to use a manually set tier.

Organisation profile

The Organisation Details section shows your company name, contact email, phone, and active risk sector template. Contact details are editable by admins and saved alongside other organisation settings.

Plan & billing overview

View your current plan tier and vendor count on the Billing page. Check your usage against your plan limit to avoid hitting capacity. If you are approaching your limit, you can upgrade to a higher tier with more included vendors. Trial expiry dates are also shown so you can plan upgrade timing.

Managing billing and subscriptions

Navigate to Settings > Billing to see your subscription status, current charges, and upgrade options. From there you can upgrade to a paid tier via Stripe Checkout, access the Stripe Customer Portal to manage payment methods and view invoices, or check if you have any negotiated rates applied. Billing is managed through Stripe for security and compliance.

MFA enforcement

Enable the "Require MFA for all members" toggle in the Security section to enforce multi-factor authentication across your organisation. When enabled, all members will be required to set up MFA on their next login.

Scan schedule per tier

The Scan Configuration section displays the per-tier scan schedule (full scan frequency and risk refresh frequency). These are configured at the organisation level and determine how often vendors in each tier are scanned.

Per-vendor overrides are read-only displays

Any per-vendor scan cadence shown here is a read-only display for audit purposes — it does not affect actual scan timing. The pipeline controls real scan timing based on material changes (new vendor link, compliance change), tier transitions, and automatic max-age sweeps, not a per-organisation tunable setting.

Assessment policy

Configure default assessment cadences in the Assessment Policy section. Set the default frequency for all vendors (annual, semi-annual, or quarterly), plus overrides for critical vendors and CPS 230 material service providers. The most stringent frequency always wins — if a vendor is subject to CPS 234 (quarterly) and your default is annual, the quarterly cadence applies automatically. Per-vendor manual overrides can be set from the vendor detail page.

Risk weight change approvals

When risk weight changes require approval (configured by your MSP administrator), the "Weight Change Requests" panel appears in Organisation Settings > Risk & Compliance. Pending requests show the proposed weight changes, the requester, and their justification. Any org admin or manager (other than the requester) can approve or reject the change — this four-eyes control ensures material scoring changes are reviewed before they affect vendor risk calculations. Add optional review notes before approving or rejecting. Once approved, the new weights apply immediately and the previous requester sees the outcome in the same panel.

How do I invite team members?

Navigate to Settings > Team and click "Invite". Enter the user's email address and select their role. An invitation email is sent with a one-time link. Pending invitations can be resent or revoked from the same page. Users must create an account (or sign in) to accept the invitation.

What roles exist?

Eight organisation roles are available: Owner, Admin, Manager, Security, Compliance, User, Member, and Viewer. Owner and Admin have broad administrative access; Manager handles vendor and assessment workflows; Security and Compliance focus on domain-specific risk work; User and Member provide standard team access; Viewer is read-only. Role assignments can be changed at any time by an Owner or Admin.

What are personas?

Personas are named role profiles that combine a permission role with a tailored UI experience. Instead of assigning a raw role like "manager", you assign a persona like "GRC Analyst" which grants the manager role plus a customised landing page (/findings), sidebar configuration, and feature flags. 18 seeded personas are pre-configured across four persona groups: system (Platform Owner, Platform Operator, Platform Auditor, Platform Scanner), MSP (MSP Administrator, Service Desk, MSP Viewer, Service Delivery), organisation (CISO / Head of Security, GRC Analyst, Security Engineer, General User, Executive, Auditor), and vendor (Vendor Security Lead, Vendor Compliance Officer, Vendor Responder, Vendor Executive). Personas are assignment-time abstractions — the underlying role on the member table remains the authoritative source for permission checks.

How do webhooks work?

Webhooks deliver real-time notifications when events occur in ChainShield. Three webhook types are supported: Generic (sends JSON payload with HMAC-SHA256 signature for verification), Slack (formatted message cards), and Microsoft Teams (adaptive cards). Each webhook endpoint validates payloads using a shared secret.

What events can I subscribe to?

Available webhook events include: finding.created (new finding discovered), vendor.risk_changed (vendor risk score crossed a threshold), assessment.completed (vendor submitted assessment response), scan.completed (scan pipeline finished), incident.created (new incident logged), and vendor.added (new vendor onboarded). You can subscribe to specific events or all events per endpoint.

How do I create API keys?

Navigate to Settings > API Keys and click "Create Key". Give the key a descriptive name and select the permission scope. API keys are rate-limited based on your plan tier. Keys are shown once at creation time and cannot be retrieved later. Rotate keys regularly and revoke any that are compromised immediately.

How does auto-tier billing work?

ChainShield automatically calculates your billing tier based on your vendor portfolio size and regulatory context. Plans: Free (2 vendors, $0/mo), Starter (10 vendors, $490/mo, $49 per extra vendor), Essentials (25 vendors, $975/mo, $39 per extra), Pro (50 vendors, $1,450/mo, $29 per extra), Enterprise (50+ vendors, custom pricing — contact sales). If you exceed your included vendor count, additional vendors are billed at your tier's per-vendor overage rate. Context factors such as material service providers (CPS 230), critical infrastructure designations (SOCI), high-sensitivity vendors, and large asset footprints can push the tier upward regardless of raw vendor count. Upgrade tiers for volume discounts — no lock-in, no surprises. Auto-tier recalculates after each scan and can be manually triggered from Settings > Billing. Organisation admins can disable auto-tier to use a manually set tier instead.

How are risk scores calculated?

Risk scores combine finding severity, business criticality, and data sensitivity into a 0–100 composite. Higher-severity findings contribute more to the score. Additional penalties apply for failed assessments, expired certifications, and unresolved critical findings. The score reflects your actual risk exposure — a lower score is better.

What is business impact?

Business impact is calculated per finding as: severity base score * criticality multiplier * data sensitivity multiplier * category weight * regulatory uplift. This ensures that a critical finding on a Tier 1 vendor handling sensitive data scores much higher than the same finding on a Tier 3 vendor with minimal data access.

What are org-context multipliers?

Four org-context multipliers adjust risk scores per organisation: Business Criticality (how critical the vendor is to operations), Data Sensitivity (what level of data the vendor accesses), Material Service Provider (CPS 230 designation for APRA-regulated entities), and Critical Infrastructure (SOCI Act designation). These multipliers mean the same vendor can have very different effective risk scores for different organisations.

How does the Default/Custom risk toggle work?

In Organisation Settings, you can switch between Default and Custom risk weight modes. Default mode uses the platform-standard domain weights based on your selected sector template (e.g. Financial Services emphasises Cybersecurity and Compliance). Custom mode lets you manually adjust the weight of each of the 7 risk domains to reflect your organisation’s specific priorities. You can revert to defaults at any time with a single click. MSP administrators may also lock weights across managed organisations to enforce consistent scoring methodology.

How does the risk weight approval workflow work?

When your MSP has enabled the four-eyes approval requirement for weight changes, submitting new risk weights creates a pending change request instead of applying them immediately. Another admin or manager in your organisation must review and approve the change before it takes effect. You cannot approve your own request. The "Weight Change Requests" panel in Settings > Risk & Compliance shows all pending requests (always visible, no matter how many) plus the 10 most recent reviewed requests for audit context. Approvers can add review notes before accepting or rejecting. If a technical error prevents the weights from being applied after approval, the system automatically resets the request to Pending so the approver can retry.

Related Pages

TeamIntegrationsModulesBilling

SSO IdP Group Mappings

Org Admin

Map identity provider (IdP) groups to ChainShield roles. Only users whose IdP groups match a configured entry are allowed to sign in — all others are rejected. No implicit viewer fallback.

Explicit-mapping-only policy

ChainShield uses explicit-mapping-only for SSO group authorisation. A user whose IdP groups do not match any active mapping will be rejected at sign-in and shown a generic "Access denied" page. Ensure all active SSO users have at least one mapped group before enabling SSO enforcement.

Role elevation protection

Admins cannot grant a role higher than their own via group mappings. The database enforces this — an attempt to map a group to "owner" when you are only an "admin" will fail with an error.

Multiple groups, one scope

When a user belongs to multiple mapped groups for the same tier, ChainShield grants the highest-privilege role. Lower roles from other groups are silently subsumed. The SIEM audit log records which group produced each grant.

What happens if I delete a group mapping?

Users in that IdP group will lose the associated ChainShield role at their next sign-in or token refresh. If they have no other mapped groups, they will be rejected and shown the access-denied page.

What does the access-denied page show the user?

A generic "Access denied — contact your administrator" message. ChainShield never echoes group names or role details back to the browser to prevent information leakage.

Can a group be mapped to multiple roles in different tiers?

Yes. A group can be mapped to an org role and an MSP role simultaneously if the user belongs to both tenants. Each mapping is independent.

Related Pages

SSO SettingsSSO Domain ClaimingSecurity SettingsTeam

Per-org SSO

Org Admin

Claim and verify your organisation domain, then configure SAML or OIDC single sign-on. SSO-authenticated users bypass password-based authentication when logging in with your organisation domain.

Who can manage SSO

Only organisation admins and owners can configure SSO. This restriction prevents standard users from hijacking the domain or provider binding. To grant SSO access to another person, promote them to Admin or Owner role in Settings > Team.

Claim your domain first

Before registering an SSO provider, claim and verify your organisation domain via DNS TXT. Publish the generated TXT record at _chainshield-verify.<domain> in your DNS zone. Verification takes up to 48 hours for DNS propagation.

What to do if your parent MSP owns the domain

If the parent MSP has already claimed your domain, ChainShield returns HTTP 409 (conflict). Contact your MSP admin - they own the domain at the platform level. The ability to override this restriction is planned for a future release (CS-1200).

Verification tokens expire after 24 hours

Domain verification tokens expire 24 hours after generation. If the badge shows "Expired", click "Resend" to rotate the token and restart verification. Your domain claim is preserved - no need to re-claim.

Managing your SSO provider

Once verified, select your domain and register your SAML or OIDC provider. You can later delete the provider (users then revert to password login) or add a new provider (the old one is removed automatically). Deactivation is graceful - existing sessions are not terminated.

Can I use SSO if my parent MSP has already claimed my domain?

Not in the current release. If the MSP claims your domain, you get HTTP 409 "domain_claimed_by_parent_msp". This is by design - the MSP admin owns the domain globally. Override support (allowing you to register a separate provider) is planned in CS-1200.

What if another organisation under the same MSP claims my domain first?

Domain claims are globally unique at the ChainShield platform level. If a sibling organisation verifies your domain first, you receive HTTP 409 "domain_already_claimed_by_another_org". Contact that organisation to release the domain, or ask your MSP admin to move it into your namespace.

How long do I have to publish the TXT record?

Domain verification tokens are valid for 24 hours. Verify before the deadline shown on the page. If it expires, click "Resend" to generate a fresh token and extend the window. The domain claim itself does not expire - only the verification token does.

Can organisation managers configure SSO?

No. SSO configuration is restricted to Admin and Owner roles for security. Managers can view the SSO settings but cannot make changes. Promote managers to Admin if you need to delegate SSO management.

What happens if I delete my IdP provider?

Users can no longer sign in via SSO; they revert to password-based authentication. The domain remains claimed and verified, so you can register a new provider at any time without re-verifying. Existing sessions are not forcibly logged out.

Related Pages

SSO Domain ClaimingTeam ManagementSecurity SettingsSettings

Audit Log

Org Admin

Browse, search, and export audit events for your organisation. Significant in-app actions — finding updates, asset status changes, persona assignments, context switches — are recorded with user, timestamp, and IP address. Authentication events (sign-in, sign-out, password reset) are captured via Supabase webhook and appear under the "Authentication" action filter.

Filters and search

Use the filter bar to narrow by action type, severity (INFO/WARNING/CRITICAL), resource type, or date range. The search box matches across action descriptions. Combine filters for precise results.

Exporting for auditors

Click "Export CSV" to download a spreadsheet of all filtered events. Use date range filters first to scope the export to the audit period. The CSV includes all columns visible in the table plus full metadata.

Detail view

Click any row to expand it and see the full change details — including old and new values as JSON. This is useful for understanding exactly what changed during a configuration update.

What actions are logged in the audit trail?

All significant actions: user logins, role changes, vendor additions/deletions, finding status updates, scan triggers, integration configuration changes, assessment actions, risk weight modifications, and settings updates. Each entry includes the actor, timestamp, IP address, and old/new values.

Can I export audit logs for external compliance?

Yes. Use the "Export CSV" button with date range filters to scope the export. The CSV includes all visible columns plus full metadata. This is useful for CPS 234 and ISM compliance evidence.

How far back do audit logs go?

Audit logs are retained for 24 months at the organisation level. Platform-level audit logs (admin actions) are retained indefinitely. Logs are immutable once written.

Related Pages

SettingsTeam

Governance & RACI

Org Admin

Manage your organisation’s RACI accountability matrix, governance policy register, and SCRM self-assessment. The RACI matrix maps ChainShield activities to persona-based accountability roles for SCRM-01.1 audit evidence. The Policy Register tracks formal governance documents. The Procurement Assessment tab lets your organisation complete the SCRM Governance Maturity self-assessment (SCRM-01.1, 01.2, 02.5, 04.2) to track governance posture over time.

What is a RACI matrix?

RACI stands for Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, Informed. It defines who owns each governance activity. Accountable (A) means the role that approves the outcome. Responsible (R) executes the work. Consulted (C) provides input. Informed (I) receives updates. ChainShield’s default RACI maps activities like vendor onboarding, risk acceptance, and finding resolution to your team’s personas.

Advisory mode in Phase 1

In the current release, RACI assignments are displayed as guidance — the persona badge on decision points tells you who should be performing each action. Server-side enforcement is active on approval workflows (approvals by non-Accountable/Responsible personas are blocked with a 403), but the UI does not prevent navigation. Hard UI enforcement is planned for a future sprint once all organisations have reviewed their RACI.

Policy lifecycle

Create policies as DRAFT, then transition to ACTIVE by providing approved_by and approved_at. When you activate a new policy of the same type, the previous ACTIVE policy is automatically moved to SUPERSEDED to maintain a clean audit trail. Set a next_review_date and ChainShield will email your admin team a reminder 30 and 7 days before the review is due.

Exporting for audit evidence

Use the "Export CSV" button on the RACI Matrix tab to download the matrix as a spreadsheet for attachment to SCRM-01.1 audit evidence. The export includes all 13 activities and the full persona assignment grid with the template name and export date in the header.

Attaching policy documents

On the Policy Register tab, open a policy record and use the Upload button to attach a PDF, Word, or TXT document (max 10 MB). The document is stored privately and linked to the policy record automatically. Only documents uploaded through this interface are accepted — external URLs are not supported.

SCRM Governance Maturity Assessment (US-GOV-009)

The Procurement Assessment tab lets your team self-assess governance maturity across four SCRM controls: Policy & Strategy (SCRM-01.1), Board Oversight (SCRM-01.2), Control Effectiveness Testing (SCRM-02.5), and Contract Management (SCRM-04.2). Each question uses a 0–3 maturity scale (None → Ad hoc → Documented → Optimised). Complete the assessment periodically (e.g. quarterly) using the period key (2026-Q2) to track improvement over time. The resulting maturity score (0–100) is displayed on the Procurement Assessment tab.

What is a RACI matrix and why does ChainShield use it?

A RACI matrix documents who is Responsible, Accountable, Consulted, and Informed for each governance activity. ChainShield uses it to satisfy SCRM-01.1 (supply chain risk management policy), which requires documented accountability for key vendor management decisions. The default matrix covers 13 activities including vendor onboarding, risk acceptance, finding resolution, and board reporting.

How do I upload a governance policy document?

Create the policy record (Draft status) using the form on the Policy Register tab. Then open the policy record and use the Upload button to attach a document (PDF, Word, or TXT, max 10 MB). Once the document is uploaded, transition the policy to Active status by providing the approver name and approval date in the policy form.

Who can create a governance policy draft?

Any admin or manager can create a draft policy — no additional signoff authority is required. Activating a policy (transitioning from Draft to Active) requires compliance signoff authority as defined in your RACI matrix. This ensures drafts can be prepared by any team member while formal approval remains gated.

Related Pages

SettingsComplianceAudit Log

Keyboard Shortcuts & Troubleshooting

Guides, FAQs, and troubleshooting for ChainShield. Browse by topic or search across all help content.

Quick access shortcuts

Press Shift+? on any page for contextual help. Press Ctrl+K (or Cmd+K on Mac) to open the command palette. Press Escape to close panels and modals.

Are there keyboard shortcuts?

ChainShield supports standard browser navigation: Tab to move between interactive elements, Enter to activate, Escape to close modals and drawers. The sidebar can be collapsed or expanded to give more screen space for data tables. On data tables, use arrow keys to navigate between rows when a row is focused. Custom dropdowns (user menu, context selector) support full keyboard navigation: Arrow Up/Down to browse options, Enter/Space to select, Escape to close, and Home/End to jump to the first or last option. Tab panels (vendor detail, settings, pipeline) support Arrow Left/Right to move between tabs, Home to jump to the first tab, End to jump to the last tab, and Enter or Space to activate a focused tab. Type-ahead is also supported in dropdowns — typing a letter jumps to the first matching option.

Is ChainShield accessible?

ChainShield targets WCAG 2.2 AA compliance. All interactive table rows have visible focus indicators for keyboard users, modals trap focus and close with Escape, table headers use scope attributes for screen readers, and risk badge colours meet 4.5:1 contrast ratios against the dark background. Bulk actions (status updates, exports, confirm/reject) announce their results to screen readers via ARIA live regions, so you are notified when an operation completes without needing to visually check the page. If you encounter any accessibility issues, please report them to your administrator.

Scan stuck in processing

If a scan has been processing for more than 30 minutes, it may be stale. Administrators can check /admin/pipeline, trigger /api/cron/cleanup-jobs with CRON_SECRET, and inspect worker logs if stale jobs keep appearing. If scans consistently fail, verify that external API keys (Shodan, Censys, SecurityTrails) are configured and valid in Admin > Integrations.

Finding not appearing

If you expect a finding but cannot see it, it may have been auto-deduplicated by the AI deduplication layer. Superusers can check Admin > Global Findings with the "System Statuses" filter enabled. The finding may also have been auto-resolved if the underlying issue was not detected in the most recent scan.

Risk score not updating

Risk scores are recalculated after each scan job completes. If the score seems stale, check the scan job status on the vendor detail page. Scores also update when findings are manually triaged (e.g., resolved or accepted). If a scan completed but the score did not change, the new scan may not have produced findings that differ from the previous run.

Webhook not firing

Check the webhook delivery log in Settings > Webhooks. Failed deliveries are retried automatically up to 3 times with exponential backoff. Common causes: the endpoint URL is unreachable, the endpoint returns a non-2xx status code, or the HMAC signature validation is failing on the receiving end. Verify your webhook secret matches what is configured in ChainShield.

Where is the security statement?

ChainShield publishes a public security statement at /security. This page describes the platform’s security practices including data encryption (at rest and in transit), tenant isolation (data isolation between organisations), OSINT-only non-intrusive scanning, API key handling, and responsible disclosure policy. You can share this link with vendors, auditors, or stakeholders who need to understand ChainShield’s security posture. No authentication is required to view the page.

How does fourth-party financial risk assessment work?

ChainShield assesses vendor financial risk using multiple signals: ABR entity verification (active/cancelled status, entity age, GST registration), domain age via RDAP, and (when configured) commercial credit bureau data including credit scores, payment defaults, ASIC status, and insolvency risk. These indicators generate FINANCIAL_SUPPLYCHAIN findings when thresholds are breached.

What are vendor resource pages?

During scans, ChainShield automatically discovers and caches key vendor web pages: privacy policy, cookie policy, terms of service, trust centre, security page, about page, and certifications page. Discovery uses fast deterministic strategies (well-known paths, DNS records) combined with an optional LLM-powered Website Discovery agent that crawls the site and searches for hard-to-find pages. These appear in the "Discovered Pages" section on the vendor detail Overview tab. URLs are tagged as "approved" (verified) or "pending" (needs review) and are injected into AI agent context so they can crawl them for deeper privacy and compliance analysis (US-PIPE-767).

What are finding source URLs?

Source URLs show which specific web pages an AI agent crawled to produce a finding. For example, a privacy finding might link to the vendor’s /privacy and /cookies pages. These appear in the "Source Pages" section of the finding detail panel, letting you click through to verify the evidence yourself. Source URLs are stored as structured data alongside the finding and are separate from the structured evidence data (scan data including DNS records, HTTP headers, certificates).

Is ChainShield currently up?

ChainShield publishes a public status page showing real-time uptime for the platform. Check the status page — linked in the footer — to see current availability and any active incidents. No login is required.

What is the data retention policy?

Auto-resolved findings are automatically purged after 12 months. Audit logs are retained for 24 months. Active findings, vendor records, and assessment data are retained indefinitely while the organisation is active. Stale assets are archived after 90 days of not being seen in scans. Data export is available for compliance archival before records age out.

What is the audit log?

The audit log records all user actions across the platform: CREATE, UPDATE, DELETE operations with the acting user's identity, IP address, old values, new values, and timestamp. Audit logs cover: user management, vendor changes, finding triage, assessment actions, integration configuration, and system setting modifications. Logs are immutable and retained for 24 months.

Related Pages

DashboardVendorsFindingsSettings

Product catalogue

Track software products, libraries, and technologies discovered across your vendor ecosystem. Products are automatically identified during scans and linked to known vulnerabilities.

Product-to-CVE mapping

Each product is matched against the NVD database to surface known CVEs. Products with unpatched critical vulnerabilities are flagged automatically. Review the version column to confirm whether your vendors are running affected versions.

SBOM integration

Upload vendor-provided SBOMs (Software Bill of Materials) to enrich the product inventory with precise dependency data. This improves CVE matching accuracy beyond what external scanning alone can detect.

Product triage workflow

Products discovered by AI agents start as Pending Review. Admins can confirm (mark as approved), reject (with reason), or un-reject products. Rejected products remain queryable via the status filter. All transitions are logged with user, timestamp, and reason for audit trails. Bulk confirm/reject actions handle large catalogs efficiently.

Confirming and hiding products

Unconfirmed products can be confirmed (valid) or rejected (false positive). Rejecting a product opens a reason dialog where you select a category (duplicate, not in use, wrong vendor, other) and optionally add notes. Use the "We use this" toggle to mark products your organisation actually uses. Hidden products are excluded from risk scoring.

Deployment and hosting visibility

The Deployment column shows the product delivery model (SaaS, On-Premise, Hybrid, PaaS, Self-Hosted). The Hosting column shows the first cloud provider with a count of additional providers. Use these to quickly identify data sovereignty and concentration risks across your product portfolio.

Editing usage details

Click the Edit button in the Actions column to update usage metadata for any product - criticality (how critical is it to your organisation), usage type (production, staging, development, testing, backup), user count (how many seats your org uses), data sensitivity (which data types flow through it: PII, PHI, Financial, Credentials, IP, Public), a start date, and free-text notes. All org members can edit usage metadata; only admins can confirm or reject products.

Viewing triage history

Click the history icon on any product row to see a popover showing all state transitions: who triaged it, what state changed to, the timestamp, and (for rejections) the reason category and notes. This audit trail is useful for reconciling why a product has a particular status.

How are products discovered?

Products are identified by the product_discovery AI agent during scans. The agent analyses vendor websites, technology headers, JavaScript libraries, and marketing pages to build a product catalogue. Products with identifiable CPE strings are automatically matched to CVE databases.

What is a CPE identifier?

Common Platform Enumeration (CPE) is a standardised naming scheme for software products. When a product has a CPE, ChainShield can automatically cross-reference it against the NVD database to find known CVEs affecting that specific version.

Do hidden products still generate findings?

No. When you mark a product as hidden, any CVE findings linked exclusively to that product are excluded from risk scoring. This is useful for products the vendor offers but your organisation does not use.

How do I update product usage details?

Click the Edit button (pencil icon) in the Actions column of any product row. The edit modal lets you set criticality, usage type (production/staging/development/testing/backup), user count, data sensitivity tags (PII, PHI, Financial, Credentials, IP, Public), a start date, and notes. Changes are saved immediately and the table refreshes automatically. Any authenticated member of your organisation can update usage details - this does not require admin access.

What is the difference between rejecting and hiding a product?

Rejecting a product marks it as a false positive or out-of-scope discovery (wrong vendor, duplicate, not in use) and removes it from the confirmed list - you supply a reason and those reasons are audited. Hiding a product via the "We use this" toggle means you acknowledge it is real but your organisation does not use it, so it should not contribute to your risk score. Both actions reduce scoring impact, but rejection is the gate for admins to curate the product catalogue.

Related Pages

AssetsFindingsVendors

Vendor Technology Detail

Full profile for a single technology detected on a vendor's infrastructure. View detection evidence, linked assets, associated findings, version history, and end-of-life status.

Detection evidence

Each technology detection shows the source (HTTP response header, HTML meta tag, JavaScript library signature, DNS record) and confidence level. Low-confidence detections are marked "Unconfirmed" until an administrator reviews them. High-confidence detections are confirmed automatically.

Linked assets

The Assets section lists the discovered infrastructure components where this technology was detected. If a linked asset is not visible, it belongs to a different organisation's context - this is expected multi-tenant behaviour. Your access boundary is enforced at the asset level via RLS.

End-of-life risk

Technologies with a confirmed end-of-life date or that are beyond their support window are flagged with an EOL badge. Running unsupported software is a Cybersecurity domain risk factor and generates findings mapped to the Cybersecurity controls. Check the vendor's profile page to see the aggregate EOL exposure.

Associated findings

The Findings section shows all security findings linked to this technology detection. Click any finding to open its detail panel. Findings here are a subset of the vendor's full finding list - filtered to those where this technology is identified as a contributing factor.

Version tracking

Where version information is available (e.g. from HTTP headers or JavaScript library files), ChainShield tracks the specific version detected. Older versions are cross-referenced against the NVD for known CVEs. The version history section shows when each version was first and last seen during scans.

How do I confirm or dismiss a technology detection?

Administrators can confirm or dismiss low-confidence detections from this page. Confirming a detection locks it so it will not be auto-dismissed on future scans. Dismissing a detection removes it from the risk surface and suppresses future detections of the same technology on the same asset.

Does this technology affect the vendor's risk score?

Yes, indirectly. Technologies with end-of-life status or known CVEs generate findings, and those findings contribute to the Cybersecurity domain score. Dismissing a technology detection also removes its associated findings from the score.

Why does the page show "N linked assets are not visible in this context"?

The scan pipeline links technologies to assets across vendor contexts. Assets outside your organisation's access boundary are hidden by RLS, but the count is shown so you are aware they exist. This is expected behaviour. Contact support if the count seems unexpectedly high.

How current is the version information?

Version data is captured at scan time. If the vendor upgrades their infrastructure between scans, the detected version will be stale until the next scan runs. Tier 1 (Critical) vendors are scanned more frequently, so their technology data is typically more current.

Related Pages

Vendor TechnologiesFindingsAssets

Vendor Portal — Products & Lifecycle

Manage your organisation's product information and view lifecycle status. Each product version shows a lifecycle phase badge and timeline indicating current support status.

Lifecycle phases at a glance

Each version badge names the exact phase: Full Support, Maintenance, Extended, ELS – paid, or End of Life. Hover over any badge for the full phase name and tooltip detail.

Timeline strip

The colour bar shows the full lifecycle timeline with a "today" marker. Days-remaining text below the strip tells you how long until the current phase ends.

Product URL format requirements

Product URLs must use http:// or https:// schemes. URLs starting with javascript:, data:, or other non-standard schemes are rejected for security reasons. Provide valid documentation URLs for product information, API documentation, and pricing pages.

Why was my product URL rejected?

Product URLs must use http:// or https:// schemes only. URLs starting with javascript:, data:, or other non-standard schemes are not allowed for security reasons. Update the URL to point to a valid web address, for example: https://docs.myproduct.com or https://www.myproduct.com/pricing.

Related Pages

DashboardView Findings

Vendor Portal — Claim Vendor Record

The vendor claim page lets an authorised representative of an unclaimed vendor register and become the vendor owner. Claiming is a two-step, mailbox-verified process: submit your details, confirm the email sent to you, then finish the claim. Once claimed, you can manage your security profile, respond to findings, and invite team members.

Use a work email

Your email must match the vendor's registered domain (e.g. alice@acme.com for a vendor with domain acme.com). Personal email addresses will be rejected. This prevents a third party from fronting your vendor record.

Confirm your email to finish

After you submit the form, ChainShield emails a confirmation link to the address you entered -- your claim is NOT granted until you click it. This proves you control that mailbox, not just that you know the vendor's domain (CD-5095). Clicking the link brings you back to this page to finish claiming.

Already claimed?

If the vendor has already been claimed, sign in with your existing account or contact your vendor admin. If you believe the claim was made in error, contact support@chainshield.com.au.

What happens after claim

After finishing the claim you are redirected to your vendor portal dashboard where you can view findings, upload documentation, and manage your security posture. You will also receive a confirmation email.

How does a vendor claim its record?

Navigate to /portal/claim/<your-domain>, register with a work email that matches the vendor's domain, and submit the form. Check your email for a confirmation link -- clicking it brings you back to this page to finish the claim. The claim is atomic -- only one person can claim a vendor. Once claimed, subsequent visitors see an "already claimed" message.

Why must my email match the vendor domain?

The domain-match requirement prevents third parties from claiming a vendor they do not control. Only an employee with a verified corporate email can self-serve a claim. If your organisation uses a different authoritative domain, contact support.

Why do I have to confirm my email before the claim is granted?

Matching your email to the vendor's domain alone does not prove you control that mailbox. ChainShield sends a one-time confirmation link to the address you entered, and vendor ownership is only granted after you click it -- this prevents anyone who merely knows a vendor's domain from claiming it on behalf of a mailbox they do not control.

Related Pages

Vendor portal dashboard

Vendor Threat Intelligence

Per-vendor threat intelligence summary. Shows which threat intelligence sources have fired, the latest observation timestamp, pulse count, and the incident_history score contribution from active indicators.

What the CTI adapters mean

ChainShield aggregates threat intelligence from 8 registered CTI adapters: CISA AIS (authoritative US government indicators - highest weight), AlienVault OTX (open threat exchange pulses), AbuseIPDB (community-reported abuse), Cloudflare Radar (BGP and attack data), and four abuse.ch feeds covering URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, and SSLBL malware/botnet indicators. A source showing "Active indicators detected" means at least one indicator from that source was observed on your vendor's infrastructure within the last 90 days.

incident_history score contribution

The incident_history score contribution shows how much active threat intelligence is adding to the vendor's Cybersecurity domain risk score. A higher score means more or higher-confidence indicators have been detected. This contribution is recalculated whenever a new scan materialises threat-intel findings via the Python scoring engine.

Top indicators table

The top-10 indicators are the highest-confidence threat signals observed in the last 90 days. Indicators are IP addresses, domain names, or ASNs associated with malicious activity. They are shown as text only - do not attempt to visit any indicator values as they may be malicious infrastructure.

How often is threat intelligence refreshed?

Intelligence data is refreshed automatically during each vendor scan cycle. The last-refresh timestamp next to each source shows when indicators were last collected. Tier 1 vendors scanned daily will have more frequent updates than Tier 3 vendors on weekly cycles.

What does "not fired" mean for a source?

"Not fired" means no indicators from that source were observed for this vendor's infrastructure in the last 90 days. This is informational - it does not mean the vendor is safe, only that no signals were received from that specific source in the observation window.

Related Pages

Threat IntelligenceFindingsVendors

Accept Team Invitation

Accept an invitation to join a ChainShield organisation or MSP. After acceptance, you will have access to that team's vendor data and risk dashboards.

What acceptance means

Accepting the invitation confirms your email and assigns you to the team (organisation or MSP) with the role specified by the inviter (e.g. admin, manager, viewer). You will immediately see the team's vendors and findings.

Invitation expiry

Team invitations expire after 7 days. If your link has expired, ask the team admin to send a new invite. If you already have a ChainShield account, you may be able to self-join if the team has open invitations enabled.

Multiple teams

You can be a member of multiple organisations (if you work with multiple MSPs or clients) or multiple roles within the same organisation. After accepting this invite, you can switch between teams using the team selector in the app.

Already a member?

If you are already a member of this team, you will see a message confirming this. No action is needed — you already have access.

Related Pages

DashboardSign InContact Support

Accept Vendor Invitation

Accept an invitation to the vendor portal. After acceptance, you can sign in and view your organisation's findings, complete assessments, and upload evidence.

What acceptance means

Accepting the invitation confirms your email address and creates a persistent portal session. You will be able to sign in to the portal without needing a new invite link each time.

Required sign-in

The organisation that invited you may require you to sign in with a password or via your company's single sign-on (SSO). Follow the prompts to complete sign-in.

New to ChainShield?

If you don't have an account yet, choose "Create Account". We'll email a secure set-up link to the invited address — click it to set your password, then you'll land back on this page to accept the invitation. Only the invited mailbox can activate the account; the invite link alone is never enough.

After acceptance

You will have immediate access to your vendor dashboard, findings, and assessment questionnaires. Start by reviewing your risk score and outstanding findings.

Assessor organisation indicator

The top bar of this page shows the name of the organisation assessing your vendor risk. This trust indicator helps you verify you are communicating with the correct organisation.

Related Pages

Vendor Portal DashboardView Your Findings

Access Denied

You were redirected here because ChainShield could not grant you access — your identity provider account is not mapped to this organisation, your organisation requires SSO, or multi-factor authentication is required to continue.

Why you are seeing this

This page covers several distinct denial reasons (SSO group mapping missing, SSO enforced but you tried password login, MFA required but not completed). The heading and message on the page itself tell you which one applies — ChainShield deliberately does not disclose extra detail here (no group names or internal error codes) to avoid revealing information useful to an attacker probing your organisation's login setup.

What to do

Contact your organisation administrator. If the message mentions SSO, confirm with them that your account is assigned to the correct identity-provider group and that you are using the "Sign in with SSO" option rather than a password. If the message mentions MFA, complete multi-factor verification and try again, or ask your administrator to reset MFA if you have lost access to your authenticator app.

Related Pages

Sign InContact Support

Accessibility Statement

ChainShield accessibility commitment and features — WCAG 2.2 AA conformance target, keyboard navigation, screen reader support, and how to report accessibility issues.

Our accessibility target

ChainShield aims to conform to WCAG 2.2 Level AA (Web Content Accessibility Guidelines). We comply with the Australian Disability Discrimination Act 1992 (DDA), which requires equal access to digital services for people of all abilities.

Accessibility features

All interactive elements are keyboard accessible. Screen readers are supported with ARIA labels. Risk severity is indicated by both colour and text label — information is never conveyed by colour alone. Focus indicators are visible on all buttons and links.

Report an accessibility issue

If you encounter an accessibility problem, please contact accessibility@chainshield.com.au with a description of the issue and the page URL. We aim to respond within 5 business days and fix verified issues promptly.

Related Pages

Terms of ServicePrivacy PolicyContact Us

Account

Your personal ChainShield account page. View your profile, organisation memberships, and active sessions.

Profile overview

View your display name, email, role, active persona, and organisation memberships. Navigate to Settings > Account to make changes.

Organisation memberships

If you belong to multiple organisations, they are listed here. Use the context selector in the header to switch between them. Each organisation may give you a different role.

Active sessions

See your active browser sessions and their last activity timestamps. Revoke sessions from unknown devices or locations to protect your account.

How do I switch organisations?

Use the context selector in the sidebar header. Click the current organisation name and select a different one from the dropdown. All pages update to show the selected organisation's data.

How do I update my profile?

Navigate to Settings > Security to change your password and MFA settings, or Settings > Notifications to manage email and webhook preferences.

How do I enable MFA?

Go to Settings > Security > Setup MFA. Scan the QR code with your authenticator app and enter the verification code. Save your recovery codes securely.

Related Pages

Security SettingsNotifications

Account Settings

Manage your personal account details including display name, email preferences, and session settings. These settings apply to your user account across all organisations you belong to.

Profile and display name

Your display name is shown in audit logs, comments, and assignment lists. Keep it recognisable so team members can identify your actions. Email changes may require re-verification.

Session and security

Review your active sessions and sign out of any you do not recognise. Enable MFA (multi-factor authentication) from the Security settings page for an additional layer of protection on your account.

Related Pages

Security SettingsTeamSettings

Add New Vendor

Onboard a new vendor with Quick Add (name + domain, sensible defaults) or Configure First (set criticality, compliance scope, and significance upfront). Quick Add uses TIER-3, MEDIUM criticality, and your organisation's regulatory scope.

Quick Add vs Configure First

After entering the vendor name and domain, choose Quick Add to create the vendor immediately with sensible defaults, or Configure First to set business criticality, vendor significance, and compliance frameworks before creation. Quick-added vendors show a "Risk context not configured" banner on their detail page so you can complete configuration later.

Vendor Significance

This step captures how critical the vendor is to your regulatory obligations. Flags like Material Service Provider (CPS 230), Critical Infrastructure Asset (SOCI), and PII handling drive risk score multipliers. A vendor marked as a Material Service Provider will have higher weighted scores across operational resilience controls.

Risk Assessment Frameworks

Select which compliance frameworks findings should be scored against. Frameworks inherited from your organisation settings appear pre-selected and cannot be removed per-vendor. You can add additional frameworks specific to this vendor relationship. Framework selection amplifies risk scores for findings mapped to those frameworks.

Related Pages

VendorsSettings

Agent Rules

Configure rules that guide how AI agents analyse your vendors. Suppress false positives, override severity ratings, and calibrate agent focus based on your organisation context. Note: Global agent rule management has moved to the Admin section (/admin/agent-rules) and is available to superusers only.

What are agent rules?

Agent rules are instructions that AI agents read before analysing a vendor. They encode lessons learned from analyst corrections and rejected findings. For example, a "suppress" rule can prevent agents from flagging TLS 1.2 as a risk, while a "calibration" rule can adjust how agents weight certain controls.

Rule types explained

Suppress: prevent specific finding types from being created. Severity Override: change the default severity for a finding pattern. Instruction: provide freeform guidance to the agent. Calibration: adjust scoring weights or thresholds for specific controls.

Vendor-specific context

Each vendor also has per-vendor agent context entries visible on the vendor detail page. These are created automatically when findings are rejected (with notes explaining why), or manually by analysts. Vendor context is more specific than global rules and takes precedence during analysis.

Global rules have moved

Global agent rule management (creating, editing, and toggling rules that apply across all vendors) has moved to the Admin section at /admin/agent-rules. This page now shows organisation-level rules only. If you previously bookmarked the settings agent-rules page for global rule management, update your bookmark to /admin/agent-rules.

Related Pages

SettingsGlobal Agent Rules (Admin)ControlsFindings

API Key Reveal

One-time secure retrieval of a new API key during rotation or migration.

API key reveal is one-time only

This page displays your new API key exactly once. Copy it immediately to a secure location. This link is single-use and will be invalidated as soon as you leave this page or close the browser tab. If you lose the key before copying, you will need to request a new reveal link from the migration email or from API Keys settings.

What to do next

Copy your new API key, then update all your integrations and applications to use the new key. Do not embed the key directly in code; use environment variables or a secrets manager. Once all integrations are updated, you can revoke the old key from the API Keys settings page.

Can I retrieve this key again?

No. The key is shown only on this page, one time. Copy it immediately. If you lose it, return to the migration email and request a fresh reveal link, or go to your API Keys settings and create a new key.

Why is the link one-time-use?

One-time-use links prevent accidental key exposure through browser history, cached pages, or forwarded emails. The security benefit of preventing multiple views outweighs the inconvenience of copying once.

Related Pages

API KeysSettings

API Keys

Create and manage API keys for programmatic access to ChainShield. Keys support scoped permissions and rate limiting. Organisation admin permission is required to create, rotate, or revoke API keys.

Creating an API key

Click "Create Key" to generate a new API key with a minimum of 32 characters. Give it a descriptive name and select permission scopes: vendors:read, findings:read, scans:write, reports:read, msp:read, etc. The key is shown once at creation — copy it immediately.

Permission scopes

Assign only the minimum permissions each integration needs. For a monitoring dashboard, vendors:read and findings:read are sufficient. For triggering scans, add scans:write. To mark findings as Resolved, Accepted, or False Positive via API, add the "Resolve Findings" (findings:resolve) scope — this scope gates scoring-affecting status changes and must be explicitly granted. Broad scopes increase risk if the key is compromised.

Key rotation

Rotate API keys regularly — create a new key, update your integration to use it, then revoke the old key. Never embed API keys in client-side code or version control.

Rate limiting

If your integration is being throttled, check the X-RateLimit-Remaining response header to see how much quota remains. Defaults: 120 requests/minute for authenticated endpoints, 2,000/hour for heavy endpoints (e.g. scan triggers). Brute-force protection enforces rate limiting per API key to prevent credential guessing attacks. Contact your admin if you need higher limits for your plan tier.

API key security and migration

Your API keys are protected with industry-standard cryptographic hashing. If you receive an email titled "Migrate your API Key", ChainShield is upgrading older keys to a stronger format. Your old key continues to work for 30 days. Click the secure "Retrieve New API Key" link in the email to retrieve the new key (the link expires in 15 minutes). Copy the new key immediately, update your integrations to use it, then the old key will be automatically retired after 30 days.

Session security

Your browser session includes a one-hour CSRF security token. If you see a "session expired — retry" error when creating, rotating, or revoking a key, refresh the page to obtain a new token and try again.

Can I retrieve an API key after creation?

No. API keys are shown once at creation time and cannot be retrieved later. If you lose a key, revoke it and create a new one. This is a security measure to prevent key exposure.

How do I use an API key?

Include the key in the Authorization header as a Bearer token: "Authorization: Bearer <your-api-key>". All API endpoints accept this authentication method. See the API Documentation page for endpoint details and examples.

What happens if my API key is compromised?

Revoke it immediately from this page. Create a new key with the same scopes and update your integration. Review the audit log for any unauthorized API calls made with the compromised key.

Does MFA enforcement affect API calls?

MFA enforcement only applies to interactive (browser) logins with valid user sessions. API key authentication is separate and machine-to-machine - it does not require MFA verification. API keys are not affected by MFA settings on your organisation.

My API key returns empty findings. How do I fix this?

Ensure the API key has the "findings:read" scope and the key's organisation is linked to the vendors you're querying. Findings are scoped to vendors your organisation owns. Check that the vendor appears in your vendor list before requesting findings for it.

I got an email saying my API key is being rotated. What do I do?

ChainShield automatically migrates older API keys to a stronger format for improved security. Your old key continues to work for 30 days from the email date. Click the secure "Retrieve New API Key" link in the email — this link is valid for 15 minutes and can only be used once. Copy the new key immediately when the page loads, then update your integrations. If the link has expired, log in here and create a new API key.

Can I still use my old key after I receive the migration email?

Yes. Your old key continues to work for 30 days from the date of the migration email. After that it is permanently deactivated. Update your integrations to use the new key before the expiry date shown in the email.

Why is my API key reveal link no longer valid?

API key reveal links are one-time-use only for security. Once you click the link and view your key, the link is immediately invalidated to prevent it being accidentally shared or compromised. If you need to retrieve the key again, request a fresh link from the migration email or from the API Keys page in your account settings.

Related Pages

API DocumentationIntegrationsSettings

API Reference

Interactive REST API documentation rendered live from the OpenAPI specification, with authentication examples and a downloadable OpenAPI 3.1 spec.

Generated from the live spec

The endpoint list on this page is rendered directly from public/openapi.json — the same machine-readable contract served for download — so it can never drift out of sync with the real API surface (CS-2224).

Authentication methods

Two methods: API keys (Bearer token in Authorization header, created in Settings > API Keys) and browser session cookies. API keys support scoped access — assign only the permissions each integration needs (vendors:read, findings:read, scans:write, etc.). Each endpoint below shows the scope it requires; endpoints badged "Session auth only" need an authenticated browser session instead of a scope, and those badged "No auth required" are public routes callable without credentials.

OpenAPI spec download

Download the OpenAPI 3.1 JSON spec to import into tools like Postman, Swagger UI, or code generators. The spec covers every v1 operation across vendors, findings, assets, assessments, CVEs, and more.

Rate limiting

Check the X-RateLimit-Remaining response header to monitor your usage. Rate limits are configurable per tier in Admin > Settings > Platform. Default limits: authenticated 120 req/min, public 30 req/min, heavy (scans) 2,000/hour. Changes take effect within 5 minutes across all instances.

Related Pages

API KeysSettings

Assessment Detail

View and manage a specific vendor assessment. Track status, review vendor responses, score answers, and export results for compliance evidence.

Assessment lifecycle

Assessments follow a lifecycle: DRAFT (created, not sent) -> SENT (delivered to vendor) -> VIEWED (vendor opened the link) -> IN_PROGRESS (vendor started answering) -> COMPLETED (all answers submitted). Track progress from this page.

Reviewing vendor responses

Once a vendor submits responses, review each answer. Yes/no and multiple choice questions are scored automatically. Free-text and file-upload questions require manual review scoring. Add reviewer notes for audit purposes.

Scoring and risk impact

The overall assessment score feeds into the vendor risk profile. Low-scoring assessments (below 50%) generate findings that map to relevant compliance controls. The score appears on the vendor detail page and in reports.

Evidence collection

Vendors can attach files (ISO certificates, pen test reports, SBOMs, SOC 2 reports) alongside their questionnaire responses. Evidence files are scanned for malware and stored in encrypted, organisation-scoped storage.

Resending and reminders

If a vendor has not responded, resend the assessment from this page. Overdue assessments can trigger automated reminder emails and webhook notifications. Configure reminder cadence in Settings > Assessment Policy.

How do I send an assessment to a vendor?

Create the assessment (from a template or scratch), customise questions if needed, then click "Send". The vendor receives a unique portal link via email — no ChainShield account required. They complete the questionnaire through a guided wizard with auto-save.

Can I edit an assessment after sending?

You cannot change questions after sending (this would invalidate vendor responses). You can add reviewer notes, resend the link, and change the deadline. To ask different questions, create a new assessment.

What happens when the vendor completes the assessment?

The status changes to COMPLETED, a scan.completed webhook fires, and the assessment score is calculated. Low-scoring sections may generate findings. The score feeds into the vendor risk profile and appears in reports.

How do I export assessment results?

Export as PDF for formal evidence or CSV for data analysis. The export includes questions, vendor responses, scores, reviewer notes, and any attached evidence references. Useful for CPS 234 and CPS 230 audit preparation.

Worked Example

Sending and tracking a CPS 234 vendor assessment

Scenario: Your APRA-regulated organisation needs to assess a Tier 1 payroll vendor against CPS 234 requirements. 1. Go to Assessments > New Assessment. Select the vendor from the dropdown. 2. Choose the "CPS 234 — Information Security" template from the library. ChainShield recommends this template based on the vendor's regulatory scope. 3. Review the questions — the template covers access control, change management, incident response, testing, and internal audit per CPS 234. 4. Click "Send". The vendor receives an email with a portal link. 5. Monitor status: SENT -> VIEWED (vendor opened the link) -> IN_PROGRESS (started answering). 6. After the vendor completes all questions and submits, the status changes to COMPLETED. 7. Review responses: yes/no questions are auto-scored. For free-text answers about their incident response plan, add a reviewer note with your assessment. 8. The overall score (72%) feeds into the vendor risk profile. Two low-scoring sections generate GOVERNANCE findings mapped to CPS 234 controls. 9. Export the assessment as PDF for your next APRA prudential review.

Related Pages

AssessmentsAssessment TemplatesVendors

Assessment History

View all submitted assessments for this vendor, organised by submission date. Track score changes over time to spot improvements or declining capability.

Reading the history

The History tab lists all submitted assessments in reverse chronological order (newest first). Each row shows: submission date, overall score, change from the previous assessment (delta), and a link to view the full assessment details. Archived assessments are hidden by default but can be shown via a filter toggle.

Score trends

The trend chart shows your assessment scores plotted over time. A rising line suggests improving vendor capability. A falling line suggests declining performance or newly-discovered gaps. Use the chart to spot seasonal patterns or correlations with vendor incidents, contract renewals, or organisational changes.

Comparing assessments

Click "View Full Assessment" on any row to see all questions and responses for that submission. Compare two assessments side-by-side by opening them in separate browser tabs. Look for questions where scores changed significantly and investigate why (e.g. staff turnover, system upgrades, policy changes).

Assessing cadence

There is no automatic reminder system in v1. Set a calendar reminder to re-assess vendors on a regular cadence (quarterly, biannually, annually). Critical vendors may warrant more frequent re-assessment.

Why don't I see any assessments?

Assessments only appear after they are submitted. A draft assessment (in-progress) is not shown in History; it remains in the Form tab until submission. Once you submit the first assessment, it will appear in the History tab.

Can I delete an assessment from history?

No. Assessments can only be soft-archived (hidden from view but retained for audit). Hard deletion is not allowed to preserve the compliance trail. To hide an archived assessment, filter them out using the "Show archived" toggle.

How is the score delta calculated?

The delta is the difference between the current assessment's overall score and the previous submitted assessment's score. A positive delta means the score improved. A negative delta means it declined. If there is no previous assessment, the delta is blank (not applicable).

Related Pages

Vendors

Assessment Template Detail

View and manage a specific assessment template. Preview questions, check scoring configuration, and clone for customisation.

Template preview

See all questions grouped by section with their types, weights, and scoring rubrics. The preview shows exactly what vendors will see when completing the questionnaire.

Cloning for customisation

System templates are read-only. Click "Clone" to create your own editable copy. Add, remove, or reorder questions. Your cloned template appears in the "My Templates" section.

Usage statistics

See how many assessments have been created from this template, completion rates, and average scores. This helps evaluate whether the template is effective.

Can I edit a system template?

No. System templates are read-only to ensure consistency. Clone the template to create your own editable version. Your cloned copy is fully customisable.

What happens to existing assessments if I update the template?

Template changes do not affect assessments already sent. Only new assessments created from the template use the updated questions.

How do I share a custom template with other organisations?

Custom templates are organisation-scoped. To make a template available platform-wide, a superuser can promote it to a system template from Admin > Templates.

Related Pages

Assessment TemplatesTemplate BuilderAssessments

Assessment Template Library

Browse and manage assessment questionnaire templates. System templates cover regulatory frameworks and risk domains. Clone any system template to customise it for your organisation.

Template categories

Templates are organised by category: Framework (ISM, CPS 234, SOC 2, etc.), Info Security, Privacy, BCP, Financial, ESG, AI Governance, and AI Vendor Risk Assessment. Use the category filter to find templates relevant to your vendor risk profile.

Domain-aligned templates

Seven domain templates complement the framework-specific templates: Information Security (general-purpose), Privacy & Data Protection (APPs, NDB), BCP & Operational Resilience (RTO/RPO, DR), Financial & Supply Chain Risk (insurance, concentration), ESG & Modern Slavery (Modern Slavery Act 2018), AI Governance (model risk, bias, explainability), and AI Vendor Risk Assessment (structured 18-question questionnaire covering model risk, data governance, bias, security, transparency, and compliance for AI-powered vendors).

Template recommendations

When creating an assessment for a specific vendor, ChainShield recommends templates based on the vendor’s regulatory scope, data sensitivity, business criticality, AI usage, and material service provider status. Look for the "Recommended" badge.

Cloning and customising

System templates are read-only. Click "Clone" to create your own editable copy. Add, remove, or modify questions to match your specific requirements. Your cloned templates appear in the "My Templates" section.

Which template should I use for a SaaS vendor?

Start with the Information Security Assessment for a general-purpose review. Add the Privacy & Data Protection Assessment if the vendor handles PII. For APRA-regulated clients, also use the CPS 234 template. The recommendation engine will suggest the right templates based on vendor context.

What is the difference between framework and domain templates?

Framework templates (ISM, CPS 234, SOC 2, etc.) are aligned to specific regulatory standards with questions referencing control IDs. Domain templates (Info Security, Privacy, BCP, etc.) take a broader, risk-domain approach that is not tied to a single regulation. Use framework templates for compliance, domain templates for risk coverage.

When should I use the AI Vendor Risk Assessment template?

Use the AI Vendor Risk Assessment for any vendor that develops, deploys, or integrates AI/ML systems into their services. It covers 6 categories (Model Risk, Data Governance, Bias & Fairness, Security, Transparency, Compliance) with 18 questions. Responses automatically generate findings mapped to app_api_security (technical AI/product security, formerly CYBER_05) and responsible_ai (Responsible AI Governance, formerly COMPL_06) controls. This is an advisory assessment aligned with the National AI Plan voluntary ethics framework — it does not imply a regulatory mandate.

How does the AI Vendor Risk Assessment differ from the AI Governance template?

The AI Governance template is a broader governance maturity assessment. The AI Vendor Risk Assessment is specifically structured for vendor self-declaration, with 18 questions that directly generate OPEN or PASS findings for risk scoring. Use the AI Governance template for internal governance reviews; use the AI Vendor Risk Assessment when sending a questionnaire to an AI vendor.

Related Pages

AssessmentsTemplate Builder

Asset Detail

Full detail view for a single discovered asset. Browse tabs to inspect security context, relationships, AI intelligence, compliance mappings, and raw debug data.

Summary tab

The Summary tab shows the asset's risk score, exposure score, confidence level, discovery source, and key metadata such as geolocation, confirmation status, and recent scanning dates. A 30-day risk trend sparkline shows how the parent vendor's risk has changed over time.

Findings tab

Lists all security findings linked to this asset, sorted by severity. Click any finding to view its full detail panel. Findings are loaded in batches of 50 — use the "Load more" button to fetch additional results if the asset has many findings.

Vulnerabilities tab

Lists CVEs detected on this specific asset, sourced from vendor_vulnerabilities records created by the scan pipeline. Each row shows the CVE ID (linked to the full CVE detail page), severity (CRITICAL/HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW from CVSS score), EPSS score, host, and first/last seen dates. A KEV badge appears for CVEs that are actively exploited in the wild. Suppressed CVEs (accepted or resolved by your organisation) are hidden by default. The tab count badge shows the total non-suppressed CVE count. Large vulnerability lists paginate server-side with 50 results per page - use the pagination controls to load additional results.

Related Assets tab

Shows parent and child assets connected via relationship types (RESOLVES_TO, SUBDOMAIN_OF, HOSTED_ON, etc.). Click any related asset to navigate to its detail page. This helps you trace infrastructure dependencies.

Services & Ports tab

Displays open ports and services discovered on this asset via Censys, Shodan, or scan pipeline probes. High-risk ports (RDP 3389, SMB 445, Telnet 23, etc.) are highlighted in red.

Certificate & TLS tab

Shows TLS certificate details: issuer, subject, validity dates, protocol version, cipher suite, key strength, signature algorithm, and Subject Alternative Names (SANs). Certificates are sourced from bbot scans, SSL Labs assessments, or active TLS probes on port 443 when no passive data is available. Expiry warnings appear when the certificate is expired or expiring within 30 days.

Compliance tab

Displays compliance mappings for this asset against Australian regulatory frameworks (ISM, CPS 234, Privacy Act, SOCI Act). Each framework section lists mapped control IDs with titles and applicability status.

Intelligence tab

Shows AI-generated analysis: AI summary, risk context narrative, exposure rating (CRITICAL/HIGH/MEDIUM/LOW), and confidence score. Use the "Re-analyze" button to trigger a fresh AI enrichment pass. Only visible when AI analysis features are enabled.

Interpreting risk scores

Risk Score (0-100) reflects the severity-weighted finding impact on this asset. Exposure Score measures how visible and accessible the asset is. Both use standard risk colours: green (0-30), amber (31-50), orange (51-70), red (71-100). A lower score is better.

Where do I see CVEs detected on a specific asset?

Open the asset detail page and click the Vulnerabilities tab. It lists all CVEs that the scan pipeline detected on this asset, with severity (derived from CVSS score), EPSS exploitation probability, KEV badge for actively exploited CVEs, and first/last seen timestamps. Click any CVE ID to open its full detail page. If your organisation has suppressed a CVE (Accepted or Resolved via the vulnerability suppression workflow), it will be hidden from this tab by default.

How do I navigate between related assets?

Use the Related Assets tab to see all parent and child relationships. Click any related asset to open its detail page. You can also navigate from the modal view by clicking "Open full page" in the header.

What does the "Re-analyze" button do?

It triggers an AI enrichment pass for this specific asset, refreshing the AI summary, risk context, exposure rating, and confidence score. The analysis runs asynchronously - refresh the page after a few moments to see updated results.

What is the difference between risk score and exposure score?

Risk Score (0-100) reflects the severity-weighted impact of findings linked to this asset. Exposure Score measures how visible and accessible the asset is from the internet - factoring in open ports, public accessibility, and hosting location. An asset can have high exposure (publicly accessible) but low risk (no findings), or vice versa.

How are assets discovered?

Assets are discovered through the scan pipeline: The discovery engine runs DNS enumeration, subdomain brute-forcing, certificate transparency log searches, and WHOIS lookups. Enrichment adds Shodan/Censys port data, TLS certificate details, and geolocation. AI agents correlate discovered assets with vendor metadata for confirmation.

Why did my certification flip to EXPIRED?

Certifications with an expiry date are automatically marked EXPIRED the day after the expiry date passes. A daily cron job runs this check at 03:00 UTC. Update the certification's expiry date to a future date and change the status back to VERIFIED to restore it. This automatic expiry helps you stay aware of certifications that need renewal or replacement.

What is the agent state panel and why does it show 'partial coverage'?

The Agent State panel (visible on the Operations tab for superusers) shows the status of the tracked pipeline identities for the latest scan, including the 7 domain agents and utility/review/enrichment workers. If you see 'Partial coverage' (e.g. 'cybersecurity last succeeded 12 days ago'), it means that identity has not run recently, indicating a data gap. For example, a stale cybersecurity agent may miss new vulnerabilities. Use the Retry button where available to force that identity to run immediately, or check the error message to diagnose rate-limiting or API issues.

Why was my vendor's risk narrative regenerated?

The risk narrative is regenerated automatically when new scan results represent a material change: a new CRITICAL or HIGH finding, total findings grew/shrank >20%, or a new type of finding was detected. When regeneration happens, a banner appears with the reason (e.g. '4 new findings added'). The new narrative reflects the current risk landscape. If you made manual edits to the narrative, they are preserved; regeneration only happens for machine-generated narratives.

What are Incidents and how do they affect my risk score?

Incidents are public breach and outage events discovered through news and breach databases (HaveIBeenPwned, security news). They appear on the Incidents tab and can amplify reputational risk by up to 30 points depending on severity. Critical incidents (large breaches, ransomware) add more uplift than minor incidents. Incidents linked to findings you've already recorded are marked to avoid double-counting. Use incidents as context when assessing reputational and operational resilience risk.

Worked Example

Investigating a high-risk IP address

Scenario: During a scan of your payroll vendor, ChainShield discovers IP 203.0.113.42 with a risk score of 78 (Critical). 1. Open the asset detail page and check the Summary tab - the IP is hosted in Singapore (non-AU sovereign), confirmed by geolocation metadata. 2. Go to the Services & Ports tab: ports 22 (SSH), 3306 (MySQL), and 9200 (Elasticsearch) are open to the internet. SSH and MySQL are flagged as high-risk. 3. Check the Findings tab: 2 CRITICAL findings - "MySQL exposed to internet" and "Elasticsearch unauthenticated access" - both mapped to ISM-1301 (network gateway security) and CPS 234 Attachment B. 4. On the Compliance tab, note the data sovereignty concern: this IP hosts data for an NDB-applicable vendor but is located outside Australia, triggering Privacy Act and ISM data sovereignty considerations. 5. Navigate to the Related Assets tab to check if this IP serves other assets (e.g., subdomains). You find it hosts 3 subdomains - the risk is broader than one service. 6. Return to the vendor detail page, set findings to IN_PROGRESS, and raise a remediation request via the assessment portal requesting firewall restrictions within 7 days.

Related Pages

Asset InventoryVendorsFindingsCompliance

Attack Surface Graph

Interactive force-directed network diagram visualising asset relationships. See how domains, subdomains, IPs, certificates, and email servers interconnect to form the vendor's attack surface.

Reading the graph

Nodes represent discovered assets, colour-coded by type and sized by risk score — higher risk assets appear larger. Edges show relationships like SUBDOMAIN_OF, RESOLVES_TO, HOSTED_ON, and SERVES. High-risk nodes (60+) display a dashed halo to draw attention.

Filtering the view

Click legend items to filter by asset type. Use the risk level dropdown to show only nodes above a threshold (Critical 80+, High 60+, Medium 30+). Toggle "Hide inactive" to remove RETIRED/RESOLVED assets. Filters combine — e.g., show only high-risk IPs.

Navigation and interaction

Drag any node to reposition it; the graph physics will settle around the new position. Click a node to see its details including risk score, connection count, and linked findings. Use zoom controls or fullscreen mode to explore complex asset hierarchies.

Why are some nodes larger than others?

Node size is proportional to the asset's risk score. Assets with more or higher-severity findings appear larger, making them visually prominent. This helps you quickly identify the riskiest parts of the attack surface.

Can I export the graph?

Use fullscreen mode and your browser's screenshot capability. The graph is interactive and dynamically rendered, so a static export is not currently available. For reporting, the Assets tab provides tabular export in CSV format.

Related Pages

AssetsFindingsVendor Detail

Authenticated Vendor Findings

View all security findings after signing into the vendor portal. Access detailed remediation guidance and track which findings have been addressed.

Filter and sort

Sort findings by severity, type, or date detected. Filter by control area to focus on specific risk domains (cybersecurity, compliance, operational resilience, etc.).

Evidence review

Each finding shows the evidence that triggered it (e.g. DNS records, TLS certificate details, open ports). Review the evidence to understand what was detected and verify it is accurate.

Related Pages

DashboardYour Profile

Authenticated Vendor Profile

Your vendor profile in the authenticated portal. View and manage your organisation details.

Account information

Your profile shows your email, organisation name, and contact details as registered with ChainShield. This information is used for portal communications and assessment delivery.

Update requests

To update any information, contact the organisation that invited you. They can make changes to your vendor record in their ChainShield account.

Related Pages

DashboardView Findings

BCP Testing (CPS 230)

Business continuity plan test history for this vendor. Record BCP/DR exercises, track Recovery Time and Recovery Point Objectives, and demonstrate CPS 230 compliance.

Recording a BCP test

Add each test with its type (Tabletop, Simulation, Full Exercise, Component), result (Pass, Partial, Fail), date, and notes. Record both the target and achieved RTO/RPO values so ChainShield can track objective attainment.

RTO/RPO tracking

Recovery Time Objective (RTO) is the maximum acceptable downtime. Recovery Point Objective (RPO) is the maximum acceptable data loss period. Bars are colour-coded: green when objectives are met, red when missed. Consistent misses indicate the vendor needs to improve their DR capability.

Testing cadence

For CPS 230 Material Service Providers, schedule BCP tests at least annually. The next test due date shows an overdue warning when past due. The latest BCP test result feeds into the vendor health score (5% weight) and the CPS 230 Material Service Provider Register export.

Why missing BCP records affect compliance standing

BCP test records contribute 5% of the vendor health score. With no records, the health score treats BCP readiness as zero. The CPS 230 MSP Register export shows "Not assessed" for BCP compliance, and regulatory reviewers treat this as evidence of an untested business continuity arrangement. Add records for any tests already conducted, even retrospectively, to populate the health score and MSP Register correctly.

What test types should I record?

APRA expects a range of testing: Tabletop (discussion-based walkthrough), Simulation (scenario exercise without real failover), Full Exercise (actual failover to backup systems), and Component (testing a single element like backup restore). Full exercises provide the strongest assurance.

How does BCP data appear in reports?

The latest BCP test result replaces the default "Not assessed" status in the CPS 230 Material Service Provider Register export. Include test history in your annual board reporting on operational resilience.

Related Pages

Exit PlanCompliancePerformance

Billing & Plan

View your current plan, vendor usage, and billing details. Upgrade to unlock more vendor slots and advanced features. Manage your subscription and payment method.

Understanding your plan

Your plan determines how many vendors you can monitor: Free (2 vendors, $0/month), Starter (10 vendors, $490/month), Essentials (25 vendors, $975/month), Pro (50 vendors, $1,450/month), or Enterprise (custom pricing). Each plan includes a certain number of vendors with per-vendor overage fees for extras. Volume discounts get better at higher tiers.

Pricing tier levels

ChainShield offers five self-serve pricing tiers tailored to different organisational needs. Free tier includes essential vendor monitoring with a 2-vendor limit. Starter, Essentials, and Pro tiers include increasing vendor counts with lower per-vendor overage rates as you move up. Enterprise tier offers unlimited vendors and custom terms for large portfolios. Pricing is in AUD, incl. GST.

What is overage billing?

If your organisation exceeds the included vendor count in your plan, additional vendors are billed at the per-vendor overage rate for your tier. For example, if you are on Starter (10 included at $49/extra), adding 3 more vendors costs an extra $147/month. Overage charges appear on your next invoice.

Free trial facility

New organisations receive a 14-day free trial granting Starter-tier features (10 vendors) at no cost. The trial is automatically activated on signup. After the trial expires, the organisation reverts to the Free plan (2 vendors) unless you upgrade. Trial status appears in the banner at the top of this page with the expiry date.

Managing your subscription

Click the "Manage subscription" button to access the Stripe Customer Portal, where you can update payment methods, view invoices, and manage billing details. The portal is hosted securely by Stripe and is the only place to modify active subscription settings.

Upgrading your plan

Click the upgrade button on your desired plan tier card. You will be directed to Stripe Checkout where you can enter payment details. After successful payment, your new plan activates immediately and you can begin monitoring more vendors. Your previous plan is automatically cancelled.

Payment failed (dunning)

If your payment method fails, ChainShield sends you a dunning notice. You have 7 days to update your payment method in the Customer Portal to avoid read-only restrictions on your account. After day 7, your account moves to read-only mode -- you can view data but cannot add vendors or create new findings. Update your payment method before this deadline to restore full access.

Negotiated rates and overrides

Some organisations have negotiated custom pricing (e.g., volume discount, flat reduction). If your organisation has a negotiated rate, a banner appears here showing the discount you receive. Custom pricing is managed by your MSP administrator and cannot be changed directly by your organisation.

Auto-tier billing (legacy)

If auto-tier is still enabled on your account, ChainShield automatically adjusts your plan based on vendor count and regulatory context. Once you upgrade to a paid Stripe subscription, auto-tier is disabled and your plan is frozen at the tier you selected until you manually change it. Manual control gives you predictable costs without surprise upgrades.

How much does ChainShield cost?

ChainShield pricing depends on your vendor count. Free tier is $0/month for 2 vendors. Starter is $490/month for 10 vendors. Essentials is $975/month for 25 vendors. Pro is $1,450/month for 50 vendors. Enterprise plans are custom. Additional vendors beyond your included count are billed at the per-vendor overage rate for your tier. New organisations receive a 14-day free trial at Starter-tier features (10 vendors).

What happens when my trial expires?

Your 14-day free trial grants Starter-tier features (10 vendors) at no cost. When the trial expires, your organisation automatically reverts to the Free plan (2 vendors, $0/month). You can upgrade to any paid tier at any time by clicking the upgrade button on the plan you want.

Can I downgrade my plan?

Yes. You can downgrade to a lower tier from the Manage subscription portal. If you have more vendors than your new plan allows, you must either archive vendors or accept overage charges. A warning dialog shows your estimated overage cost before you confirm the downgrade.

Do you charge for overage?

Yes. If your vendor count exceeds the included amount in your plan, each additional vendor is charged at the per-vendor overage rate for your tier. For Starter, that is $49 per vendor per month. For Essentials, $39 per vendor per month. Overage is calculated monthly and appears on your invoice.

How do I update my payment method?

Click the "Manage subscription" button on this page to open the Stripe Customer Portal. In the portal, go to Payment Methods and add or update your card. Changes take effect immediately for the next billing cycle.

What happens if my payment fails?

ChainShield sends you an email notification and displays a dunning notice on this page. You have 7 days to update your payment method in the Customer Portal. If unpaid after 7 days, your account moves to read-only mode (you can view data but cannot add vendors or modify findings). After 14 days, your subscription is cancelled. Update your payment method to restore full access.

Is there a contract or lock-in period?

No. ChainShield operates on a month-to-month basis. You can cancel your subscription or downgrade at any time through the Manage subscription portal. Cancellation takes effect at the end of your current billing cycle.

What is a negotiated rate?

Some organisations receive custom pricing negotiated with their MSP, such as a volume discount or flat reduction. If you have a negotiated rate, a banner on this page shows your discount. Negotiated rates are managed by your MSP administrator and cannot be changed directly by your organisation.

What currencies and regions do you support?

ChainShield invoicing is in Australian dollars (AUD), incl. GST. GST is calculated automatically by Stripe Tax at checkout. Payments are processed securely through Stripe in your local currency.

Related Pages

SettingsVendors

ChainShield for MSPs

Deliver Supply Chain Risk Management as a managed service. Multi-tenant architecture, per-client data isolation, and cross-client risk dashboards designed for MSP operations.

MSP economics

ChainShield MSP pricing is based on client count with per-vendor economics that scale. Add SCRM to your service catalogue without building tooling in-house.

Related Pages

PricingSign UpHelp Centre

Concentration Risk

Identifies single-points-of-failure in your vendor supply chain by measuring how concentrated your dependencies are across geographic, cloud provider, and service category dimensions. Findings are auto-generated when concentration exceeds safe thresholds.

What is the Concentration Score?

The Concentration Score (0–10,000) measures how evenly your dependencies are spread. Below 1,500 means well-diversified — no single provider dominates. Above 2,500 means high concentration that could create resilience risks if that provider fails. Focus on reducing scores above 2,500 by diversifying providers for critical services.

Geographic concentration

When too many vendors or assets are in one region, a local outage or regulatory change can hit your whole portfolio. Review this dimension and ensure critical services have alternatives in different geographies, especially if you are APRA-regulated under CPS 230.

Cloud provider concentration

If most of your vendors run on a single cloud provider (AWS, Azure, GCP), a major outage there could take down multiple services at once. Identify which critical vendors share the same provider and ensure you have contingency plans or multi-cloud alternatives for essential services.

Service category concentration

When too many vendors operate in the same service area, losing one affects your ability to switch because alternatives are limited. Review categories with high concentration and identify backup providers for critical services so you are not locked in.

How to reduce concentration risk

Review the remediation guidance shown for each dimension with a MEDIUM or higher risk rating. Common actions include: diversifying hosting across cloud providers, ensuring vendors in critical categories have identified alternatives, and validating that vendor disaster recovery plans account for regional outages.

Automatic findings generation

ChainShield automatically creates findings when concentration exceeds safe thresholds. Cloud concentration maps to operational resilience controls, geographic concentration maps to geopolitical controls, and service category concentration maps to financial/supply chain controls. These findings flow into your risk scores, so addressing concentration directly improves your composite score.

Where does concentration data come from?

Geographic data comes from the vendor_locations table (normalized from physical_locations) and asset geo-location metadata populated during scans. Cloud provider data is derived from asset ASN information and hosting metadata. Service categories use the vendor industry field.

How often is concentration risk recalculated?

Concentration risk is calculated on-demand each time you view this page, using the latest vendor and asset data. Run regular scans to keep the underlying data current.

Do concentration findings affect risk scores?

Yes. Auto-generated concentration findings feed into critical_operations, data_residency, and concentration_risk control scores, which flow into the Operational Resilience, Geopolitical & Sovereign, and Financial & Supply Chain risk domains respectively. This means portfolio-level concentration now directly impacts per-org composite risk scores.

Related Pages

Compliance DashboardVendorsAssetsDashboard

Confirming Your Invite

A brief, automatic redirect page that finalises an invite or magic-link sign-in. You should not normally need to act here — it exchanges the token in your invite email for a signed-in session and forwards you to the next step.

What this page does

Invite and password-recovery emails deliver a login token as part of the link you clicked. This page reads that token, establishes your session, and — for a brand-new invite — sends you on to set your password; for a magic-link sign-in, it sends you straight to your destination. This normally takes under a second.

Stuck on "Finalising your invite…"?

If this page does not redirect within a few seconds, the invite link has likely expired or was already used. Return to the sign-in page and use "Forgot password?" if you already have an account, or ask whoever invited you to resend the invitation if your account has not been set up yet.

Related Pages

Sign InReset Password

Contact Us

Get in touch with ChainShield — sales inquiries, technical support, partnerships, or general questions. We respond within 1-2 business days.

Enquiry types

Tell us whether you are enquiring as an organisation (managing your own vendor risk), an MSP (delivering SCRM to clients), or other. This helps us route your inquiry to the right team.

What to include

Provide your contact details, organisation name, approximate number of vendors, and a description of what you need. The more context you provide, the faster we can help.

Response time

We aim to respond to all inquiries within 1-2 business days. For urgent issues, call us or check the dashboard for support contact details.

Related Pages

PricingFor MSPsPrivacy Policy

Cookie Policy

Information about cookies and similar technologies used by ChainShield. We use essential cookies only — no tracking or marketing cookies.

What are cookies?

Cookies are small text files stored on your device by your browser. ChainShield uses essential cookies only, which are necessary for the platform to function (e.g. to keep you signed in). We do not use analytics, advertising, or tracking cookies.

Cookie types

Session cookies are deleted when you close your browser. Persistent cookies remain for a set duration (e.g. refresh tokens). All cookies are HttpOnly and Secure (encrypted in transit) to protect your session.

Managing cookies

Your browser settings allow you to delete or block cookies. Disabling essential cookies will prevent you from signing in. For more control, refer to your browser's privacy settings.

Related Pages

Privacy PolicyTerms of Service

Create Account

Create a new ChainShield account. You will be guided through onboarding to set up your organisation and team.

What you need

You will need a valid email address and a strong password (at least 8 characters, with uppercase, lowercase, and a number). If your organisation has SAML SSO set up, you can sign up using your company credentials.

Onboarding after signup

After creating your account, you will be guided through setup: creating your organisation, confirming your email, and inviting team members. The process takes about 5 minutes.

Existing account?

If you already have a ChainShield account, sign in instead. If you forgot your password, use the password reset link on the sign-in page.

Invited to ChainShield?

If you received an invitation email (to join an organisation, claim an MSP, or access the vendor portal), follow the link in that email instead of signing up here. Invitations create your account through a secure set-password email so only the invited mailbox can activate it — this page only creates a brand-new free organisation.

Related Pages

Sign InTerms of ServicePrivacy Policy

Create Assessment Template

Create a custom vendor assessment questionnaire. Choose question types (text, yes/no, multiple choice, rating, file upload) and organise questions into sections.

Starting from a system template

Rather than starting blank, clone an existing system template and customise it. System templates cover regulatory frameworks (ISM, CPS 234, SOC 2, SOCI Act, NDB), compliance domains (Information Security, Privacy, BCP, Financial Risk, ESG/Modern Slavery), and AI governance.

Question types

Available question types: short text, long text, yes/no toggle, multiple choice, rating scale (1-5 or custom), and file upload. Use file upload for evidence collection (certifications, SBOMs, audit reports).

Organising with sections

Group related questions into sections (e.g. "Access Control", "Incident Response"). Sections provide context for vendors and make long questionnaires less overwhelming. Drag to reorder sections and questions.

Save as draft

Save your template as a draft before sending. You can edit it as many times as you need. Once you send an assessment to a vendor, the template is locked (vendors are completing that version).

Related Pages

Assessment TemplatesAll AssessmentsTemplate Builder

Customer Settings

Manage customer organisation configurations: plan assignment, vendor limits, regulatory defaults, and billing details.

Can customers override their regulatory settings?

Yes. Organisation admins can modify their regulatory frameworks in their own Settings page. MSP-configured defaults serve as the starting point. Per-vendor regulatory scope overrides are also available.

How do I change a customer's plan?

Select the customer, update the plan tier and vendor limit, then save. Changes take effect immediately. The customer sees their updated plan details in Settings > Billing.

Can I bulk-update customer settings?

Not currently. Customer settings must be updated individually. For large MSPs managing many customers, use the API for programmatic updates.

Related Pages

Organisation ManagementMSP BillingSettings

CVE Vulnerability Detail

Detailed view of a specific CVE (Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures) vulnerability. See CVSS/EPSS scores, affected vendors, remediation guidance, and threat intelligence.

CVSS vs EPSS

CVSS (Severity): base score from NVD, ranges 0–10. EPSS (Exploitation Probability): likelihood this CVE will be exploited in the wild, ranges 0–100%. A medium-severity CVE with high EPSS (actively exploited) is often higher priority than a critical CVE with zero EPSS.

Affected vendors in your organisation

The page shows which vendors in your organisation have this CVE as an open finding. Click on a vendor to see the specific finding (which technology component, when it was detected, remediation status).

Remediation guidance

Remediation guidance is sourced from NVD and enriched by ChainShield AI. It includes recommended patch versions, workarounds, and general mitigation strategies. Always verify guidance against your vendor's official security advisories.

KEV and active exploitation

CISA KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities) indicates this CVE has been actively exploited by threat actors. CVEs with KEV status require urgent attention — prioritise these above other CVEs.

How often is EPSS updated?

EPSS scores are updated daily as new threat intelligence is collected. A CVE that had low EPSS yesterday may have high EPSS today if threat actors begin exploiting it. Check this page regularly for high-severity CVEs.

What does it mean if no vendors are affected?

This CVE has been detected in the public internet but does not affect any of your vendors (based on technology fingerprinting). You may want to monitor this CVE if it affects technologies your vendors use or plan to use.

How do I handle a false positive?

If you believe a finding is incorrect (e.g. vendor has already patched, or the component is not actually used), navigate to the finding and mark it as ACCEPTED (compensating control) or RESOLVED (patched). This will update your vendor's risk score.

Related Pages

All VulnerabilitiesVendorsFindings

Data Residency

View and configure data storage location preferences for your organisation. Important for ISM, PSPF, and CPS 234 data sovereignty compliance.

Data storage locations

ChainShield stores data in Australian-hosted infrastructure. This page shows where your organisation's data resides and any cross-border data flow considerations relevant to ISM data sovereignty requirements.

Compliance implications

ISM and PSPF require Australian Government data to remain within AU sovereign infrastructure. CPS 234 requires APRA-regulated entities to manage information security risks including those arising from offshore data storage. Review this page to verify compliance.

Vendor data sovereignty

Your vendors' data sovereignty posture is tracked on the Assets page — filter by hosting location to identify non-AU sovereign assets. This page focuses on where ChainShield itself stores your organisational data.

Where is my data stored?

ChainShield uses Supabase (PostgreSQL) with Australian hosting. Scan results, findings, and assessments are stored in the primary database. File uploads (SBOMs, evidence) are stored in Supabase Storage with server-side encryption.

Can I choose a different data region?

Currently, all data is stored in the primary Australian region. Multi-region support is on the roadmap. Contact support if you have specific data residency requirements.

What about data processed by AI providers?

AI analysis is routed through the configured LiteLLM proxy using ChainShield model-group aliases. Data sent for analysis includes finding descriptions and vendor metadata — no credentials or personal information. Review the LiteLLM proxy and underlying model-provider data handling policies for processing location details.

Related Pages

SettingsComplianceAssets

Data Subject Request Portal

Submit a data subject request under the Australian Privacy Act 1988. Request access to, deletion of, correction of, or portability of your personal data.

Types of requests

Data Access: receive a copy of all personal data we hold about you. Data Erasure: request deletion of your personal data. Data Portability: request your data in a machine-readable format. Data Rectification: request correction of inaccurate data.

How requests are processed

Submit your request with your email address and preferred request type. We will respond within 30 calendar days per the Australian Privacy Act. Complex requests may require additional time. You will receive communication at the email address provided.

Verification

We may need to verify your identity before processing your request. If you are requesting data on behalf of another person, you must provide written authority from that person.

Related Pages

Privacy PolicyTerms of ServiceContact Us

Edit Vendor

Update vendor metadata, contact information, domain, and classification details. Changes are saved immediately and audit-logged.

What you can edit

Update the vendor name, primary domain, industry sector, description, contact information, and classification. Domain changes trigger asset re-discovery on the next scan. All changes are audit-logged.

Domain changes

Changing the primary domain updates the scan target. Existing assets linked to the old domain are retained. Run a new scan after changing the domain to discover assets on the new domain.

Vendor metadata

Set the vendor's industry sector, trading name, and description. The industry sector affects which risk domain weights are prioritised for this vendor. Trading name and ABN are populated automatically by the ABR lookup agent when available.

Contact information

Add primary and secondary contact details for the vendor. These are used for assessment invitations, remediation requests, and incident communications via the vendor portal.

Will editing the vendor name affect historical data?

No. The vendor ID is a UUID - all historical data (findings, assets, scans, assessments) is linked by ID, not name. Name changes only affect the display label.

Can I merge two vendor records?

Vendor merging is not currently supported from the UI. If you have duplicate vendor records, archive one and keep the other active. Contact support for data-level merge if needed.

Related Pages

Vendor DetailSettings

Excluded Vendors

Manage vendors you've excluded from your active risk posture. Excluded vendors are monitored but their findings do not contribute to your organisation's risk score. Use this for vendors in offboarding, under remediation hold, or where risk acceptance is documented.

What does exclusion mean?

Excluded vendors continue to be scanned and monitored, but their findings are not counted towards your organisation's composite risk score. This allows you to monitor vendors transitioning to offboarding, vendors undergoing dispute resolution, or vendors where risk has been formally accepted without that risk inflating your organisation's overall posture.

Who can exclude a vendor?

Exclusion requires an authorised organisational role such as Owner, Admin, Security, or Compliance. This prevents accidental removal of vendors from risk calculations and ensures governance oversight.

How to exclude a vendor

Go to the vendor detail page and select the "Exclude from risk posture" option in the Risk Context section. Provide a reason (offboarding, remediation hold, risk accepted, other) and optional notes explaining the exclusion. The vendor moves to the Excluded list immediately.

What happens to findings?

Findings for excluded vendors continue to be discovered and displayed on the vendor detail page. However, they do not factor into `organisation_vendors.risk_score`. This means your risk dashboard reflects your actual operational risk (excluding vendors you've consciously de-scoped) while still maintaining visibility into their status.

Reinstating an excluded vendor

Click "Reinstate" on the vendor card in the Excluded list. The vendor returns to normal risk scoring immediately and its open findings are included in the next risk score recalculation.

Review cycle for exclusions

Each exclusion has a review date. Quarterly reviews are recommended to ensure vendors are not left excluded indefinitely. Overdue exclusion reviews are highlighted in the Excluded list and on your dashboard "Needs Attention" card.

What is the difference between exclusion and termination?

Termination is a lifecycle stage on the vendor detail page indicating the vendor relationship has ended. Exclusion temporarily removes a vendor from risk scoring while keeping them visible and monitored. A terminated vendor can be excluded, but exclusion does not terminate the relationship.

Can excluded vendors still trigger alerts?

Excluded vendors are still scanned and monitored. Critical findings will still appear in your dashboard's "Needs Attention" card, but they will not contribute to the organisation's risk score. This ensures you remain aware of issues even when they don't affect your compliance posture.

How long can a vendor stay excluded?

Exclusions should be reviewed at least quarterly. If a vendor is excluded for more than 90 days without a documented review, your dashboard will prompt you to either reinstate or formally close the relationship. This prevents "vendor drift" where excluded vendors are forgotten.

How does exclusion affect reporting?

Your risk reports show two scores: Operational Risk (including all active vendors) and Compliant Risk Posture (excluding blocked/excluded vendors). This transparency shows auditors that you've consciously managed your risk exposure.

Can I exclude a vendor with an active contract?

Yes, but this is unusual. Exclusion is for vendors where risk is accepted or temporarily removed from operations. If the vendor has an active contract, consider whether termination might be more appropriate. Contact your Owner, Admin, Security, or Compliance lead if unsure.

Why does a vendor show "scan not started" forever?

A vendor may be stuck at "scan not started" because its domain could not be resolved. Check the vendor detail page for a "Domain unreachable" status with an error message. This typically means the domain is misspelled, expired, or never existed. Click "Edit domain" in the inline alert, correct the domain name, and click "Re-scan". ChainShield will attempt domain resolution again, and if it succeeds, the normal scan process continues. If the domain is correct, check with your IT team to ensure the domain exists and is not blocked by network filters.

Related Pages

VendorsComplianceSettings

Exit Plan (CPS 230)

Document your exit strategy for this vendor as required by APRA CPS 230 paragraphs 54–56. Cover transition timelines, data handling, knowledge transfer, and step-in rights.

Exit Readiness Score

The Exit Readiness Score (0–100%) is calculated from 7 factors: plan is active (20%), alternative vendors identified (15%), data deletion documented (15%), knowledge transfer planned (15%), step-in rights documented (10%), plan tested within 12 months (15%), and contract exit clauses present (10%).

Key exit plan components

A complete exit plan covers: transition timeline, data return and deletion procedures, knowledge transfer plan, step-in rights, alternative vendor identification, and test history. Material service providers without an ACTIVE exit plan are flagged in the MSP Register export.

Testing your exit plan

Test the exit plan annually and update it whenever the vendor relationship changes materially (new services, data types, or regulatory designations). Record test results including lessons learned and plan updates.

No exit plan affects the MSP Register and health score

The vendor health score includes a 5% weight for exit plan readiness. With no plan, that contribution is zero and the MSP Register export shows "No plan" for this vendor. APRA supervisors reviewing CPS 230 submissions will flag material service providers without documented exit strategies. Create the plan with at minimum a transition period, alternative vendors, and data deletion method to satisfy the minimum requirement.

Which vendors need an exit plan?

Under CPS 230, APRA-regulated entities must have exit plans for all material service providers. Best practice extends this to any vendor handling sensitive data or providing critical services, even if not formally designated as material.

What are step-in rights?

Step-in rights are contractual provisions that allow you (or a regulator) to assume operational control of the vendor's service delivery in extreme circumstances (e.g., vendor insolvency). Document whether these rights exist and under what conditions they can be exercised.

Related Pages

BCP TestingContractsCompliance

Finding Detail

Full detail view for a single security finding. The evidence trail presents a conclusion-first narrative from the AI analysis envelope, with progressive disclosure for reasoning, limitations, impact, and vendor communication.

What this page shows

The finding detail page presents a conclusion-first evidence trail: Conclusion (verdict + status), Evidence Summary (what was found), Reasoning (why it is a risk, collapsed by default), Limitations (what could not be verified), Business Impact, Vendor Communication (copy-ready remediation ask), Sources, and Discovery Trail (probe log for EVIDENCE_GAP findings). Header chrome, asset, compliance, org status, and comments remain below the trail.

Evidence Gap findings

When a finding status is EVIDENCE_GAP, the Reasoning section auto-expands so the gap explanation is immediately visible. The Discovery Trail shows every probe that ran before the gap was declared — DNS probes, TLS checks, HTTP requests — and what each returned (ok, no_result, blocked, timeout). A long list of blocked or no_result entries suggests the vendor actively restricts scanning; contact them directly to verify.

Understanding severity and EPSS

For CVE findings, severity is determined by EPSS (Exploit Prediction Scoring System) first, which predicts real-world exploitation probability in the next 30 days. EPSS thresholds: 70%+ = CRITICAL, 30-70% = HIGH, 10-30% = MEDIUM, <10% = LOW. CVSS is used as fallback only when EPSS data is unavailable.

Taking action on a finding

Use the status workflow: OPEN (new) -> IN_PROGRESS (remediation underway) -> PENDING_REVIEW (awaiting approval) -> RESOLVED (confirmed fixed). You can also mark as ACCEPTED (risk accepted, not fixing) or FALSE_POSITIVE (not a real issue). Status changes are audit-logged.

Compliance mappings explained

The compliance section shows which Australian regulatory controls this finding affects — ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, SOCI, NDB, and Cyber Security Act 2024. Each mapping links to the specific control ID and helps prioritise remediation based on regulatory obligations.

Tool evidence — raw scan data

The Tool Evidence section displays the raw structured data from scan agents that backs this finding. This includes DNS records, HTTP headers, port scan results, TLS certificate details, and more. Data is shown as tables (for lists like DNS records) or key-value pairs (for headers). Use the "Show Raw JSON" toggle to inspect the full JSONB payload. All content is rendered as text — no HTML is executed.

Consolidated sources

The Sources section displays all reference links for this finding in a single unified view. This includes the detection tool, crawled source pages, and CISA KEV exploitation references — all stored in a single structured sources field. Click any link to verify the evidence yourself.

Creating remediation tasks

Use the "Create Task" button in the Remediation section to track remediation work. Tasks have a priority, optional assignee, and due date. Status follows OPEN -> IN_PROGRESS -> COMPLETED -> VERIFIED. Overdue tasks are flagged red. Tasks are scoped to your organisation.

AI remediation guidance

AI analysis results are consolidated in the ai_analysis JSONB object on each finding. This includes the concise description, contextual risk assessment, and a confidence indicator reflecting how much scan data was available. Remediation guidance, steps, and complexity are stored in a separate remediation JSONB object. Review AI guidance critically — it is generated from scan data and may need context from your specific environment.

What was attempted — discovery probe log

Some findings record an absence — for example "no public security disclosure policy". The "What was attempted" panel lists the sources that were probed before the gap was declared. If a source returned 404, was rate-limited, or was blocked, it appears here so you can verify the gap before remediating. A long list of "no_result" or "blocked" entries suggests the vendor actively restricts automated scanning — contact them directly. An empty panel on an EVIDENCE_GAP finding means the gap was raised by a deterministic enrichment check (not an LLM agent) that did not record individual probes.

Creating tickets from findings

If Jira or ServiceNow is configured, click "Create Ticket" to push this finding to your ticketing system. The ticket includes severity, control mapping, vendor name, description, remediation guidance, and a link back to ChainShield.

Creating incidents from findings

Click "Create Incident" to open the incident reporter pre-populated with the finding's title, severity, vendor, and description. The modal also shows regulatory framework checkboxes based on your organisation's configured frameworks. Frameworks auto-detected from the finding's metadata (NDB trigger, compliance mappings, severity) are pre-checked, but you can add or remove any framework before creating the incident. Each checked framework creates a regulatory notification record with the correct deadline.

How are findings mapped to risk controls?

Each finding maps to one of 30 current controls via control_id. Controls are grouped into 7 scoring domains (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, Geopolitical & Sovereign). Each control maps to specific regulatory frameworks, driving automatic compliance mapping.

What is finding evidence?

Evidence is structured data (JSONB with summary, data, tool, and collected_at fields) from scan agents that produced the finding. It can include DNS records, HTTP headers, port scan results, TLS certificate details, WHOIS data, and more. Evidence is displayed as structured tables and key-value cards, with a raw JSON toggle for full inspection.

What are source URLs?

Source URLs show which specific web pages an AI agent crawled to produce this finding. Click through to verify the evidence yourself. All source links are consolidated in the Sources section alongside the primary source URL and any CISA KEV exploitation references.

How do I dispute a finding?

If you believe a finding is incorrect, mark it as FALSE_POSITIVE with a note explaining why. Organisation-level false positive status only affects your organisation. Superusers can apply SYSTEM_FALSE_POSITIVE to hide it platform-wide.

What does the risk score mean?

The risk score (0-100) combines three factors: severity (base points from CVSS or control criticality), likelihood (how likely exploitation is, from EPSS data or evidence quality), and context bonuses (internet-facing exposure, end-of-life software, high-weight controls). A CRITICAL CVE with high EPSS on a public-facing server scores much higher than the same CVE on an internal system with low exploitation probability. The risk factors breakdown on each finding shows exactly how the score was calculated.

How do I create an incident from a finding?

Click the "Create Incident" button in the action bar on the finding detail page. The incident form is pre-populated with the finding's title, severity, vendor, and description. You can select which regulatory frameworks apply — frameworks detected from the finding's metadata are pre-checked. Each selected framework creates a regulatory notification with the correct deadline. The finding is automatically linked to the incident.

Why does my scan show 'Completed with errors'?

Scan status 'Completed with Errors' means some asset or finding data failed to write during the scan ingest phase, but other data succeeded. This can happen due to transient database issues or network interruptions. The risk score is calculated from whatever data was successfully written, so a partial scan may show a lower risk score than a complete scan. If this status persists across multiple scans for the same vendor, contact support. Check the audit log for details on which data failed.

Why does technology detail show 'N assets could not be loaded'?

This message appears when linked assets exist but could not be loaded due to access restrictions. This is expected cross-tenant behaviour - the linked assets belong to a vendor you do not have permission to view, or they were removed. If you believe this is incorrect, contact your MSP administrator to verify your org has access to the vendor in question.

Worked Example

Triaging a CRITICAL CVE finding

Scenario: A scan discovers CVE-2024-3094 (XZ Utils backdoor) on your banking SaaS vendor's infrastructure, classified as a CPS 230 Material Service Provider. 1. Check the EPSS score — it shows 0.87 (87% probability of exploitation in 30 days), confirming CRITICAL severity. CVSS is 10.0. 2. Review the compliance mappings: this CVE maps to ISM-1143 (patching), CPS 234 Attachment C (vulnerability management), and Cyber Security Act 2024 reporting obligations. 3. Change status from OPEN to IN_PROGRESS immediately. Add a note: "Vendor notified via phone, remediation SLA 48 hours per contract clause." 4. Check the Products tab on the vendor detail page to confirm which services use the affected library. 5. Create a Jira ticket (if configured) to track internally. Notify your CISO given the NDB implications — if vendor data includes personal information, the 30-day NDB clock may start. 6. After the vendor patches, trigger a re-scan. The finding auto-resolves to SYSTEM_RESOLVED when the vulnerability is no longer detected. 7. Update the incident log and include in your next CPS 230 board report under "Material Service Provider Risk Events".

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsControlsRemediation

Finding Detail (Vendor Portal)

Detailed view of a specific finding in the authenticated vendor portal. The evidence trail shows a conclusion-first narrative — what was found, why it matters, and the exact wording to include in your remediation response.

Reading the evidence trail

The finding presents a Conclusion (one-sentence verdict), Evidence Summary (what the scan observed), Reasoning (why this is a risk), Limitations (what could not be verified), Business Impact, and a Vendor Communication block with the exact wording your security contact needs. Use the "Copy to clipboard" button to paste the vendor communication into your email or ticketing system.

EVIDENCE_GAP findings

A status of "Could not verify" means the scan could not confirm or refute the finding with external data. The Reasoning section expands automatically to show the gap explanation, and the Discovery Trail lists every probe that was attempted. If the information exists, point the organisation to the public URL and they can update the finding status.

Responding to a finding

Use the Respond to Finding form below the evidence trail to acknowledge, mark in-progress, confirm remediation, or dispute the finding. Responses are visible to the organisation. For disputes, include a clear rationale — for example, a compensating control that makes the finding not applicable to your environment.

Related Pages

All FindingsDashboard

Findings Triage

A queue-style view for triaging OPEN findings across all your vendors. Process findings by severity, acknowledge risks, mark false positives, or resolve issues. Findings are grouped by vendor for efficient bulk review.

How triage works

The triage queue shows all OPEN and PENDING_REVIEW findings for vendors linked to your organisation. Findings are sorted by severity (CRITICAL first) then by age (oldest first within the same severity). This ensures the highest-risk, longest-outstanding issues surface at the top.

Available actions

Acknowledge: marks the finding as IN_PROGRESS (you have seen it and are tracking it). False Positive: marks the finding as not applicable to your organisation. Resolve: marks the finding as remediated. All actions update the per-organisation status only and do not affect other organisations viewing the same vendor.

Bulk actions

Select individual findings with checkboxes, or use the vendor-level "Acknowledge all" and "Mark INFO reviewed" buttons to process multiple findings at once. Selected findings can be bulk-actioned using the toolbar that appears above the list.

Filters and pagination

Use the Filters panel to narrow by severity, vendor, or date range. Results are paginated at 50 per page. Severity summary badges at the top show counts per level and can be clicked to filter.

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsControls

Fourth Parties (Sub-contractors)

Track sub-contractors and fourth-party dependencies for this vendor, as required by APRA CPS 230 paragraphs 49–52. Identify concentration risk when the same fourth party appears across multiple vendors.

Recording fourth parties

For each sub-contractor your vendor relies on, record their service category (e.g., cloud hosting, payment processing), data access level, and geographic location. Mark material fourth parties so they appear in CPS 230 reports — missing entries create blind spots in your supply chain risk view.

Concentration risk detection

If the same sub-contractor (e.g., AWS, Cloudflare) appears across multiple vendors, it becomes a single point of failure. Check the Compliance dashboard for concentration warnings — sub-contractors used by more than 50% of your critical vendors need a contingency plan.

CPS 230 compliance

APRA CPS 230 requires a register of material sub-contractors with risk assessments and contractual controls. Build and maintain that register here for each vendor to meet your regulatory obligations and prepare for APRA review.

What is a "material" fourth party?

A material fourth party is one whose failure would significantly disrupt the vendor's ability to deliver services to your organisation. Under CPS 230, you must identify and monitor material fourth parties. Mark them using the "Material" toggle.

How does fourth-party data affect the risk score?

Fourth-party entries feed into the Operational Resilience domain. Vendors with many material fourth parties, unclear data access controls, or concentration in a single jurisdiction receive higher scores in this domain.

Related Pages

ComplianceVendor DetailContracts

How Do Questionnaire Responses Affect My Vendor's Score?

Understanding self-attested evidence and its role in risk scoring.

When a vendor fills out a questionnaire, how does it affect their risk score?

Questionnaire responses are converted to findings via rule-based mapping. Answers indicating compliance (e.g. "Yes, we have a BCP") create PASS findings that confirm the control is met. Answers indicating non-compliance create LOW-severity EVIDENCE_GAP findings. Self-attested PASS findings reduce open gaps but do NOT override external evidence (e.g. verified certifications, scan findings). If a questionnaire says "Yes, we have ISO 27001" but your scan finds unpatched vulnerabilities, the external findings take precedence in risk scoring.

Why is questionnaire evidence weaker than external evidence?

Questionnaire responses are self-attestations — the vendor says they meet a control, but it's not independently verified. Scan findings and certifications prove compliance through external observation. ChainShield scores self-attested findings with lower confidence than externally-discovered evidence, so external evidence always wins when both exist for the same control.

Can a vendor's questionnaire response close a finding?

Not directly. A questionnaire PASS finding downgrades the severity of a matching EVIDENCE_GAP (MEDIUM → LOW) rather than closing it. External evidence (from a later scan, certification, or audit) is still required to fully close the gap. This prevents vendors from "ticking boxes" without backing evidence.

Related Pages

Vendor QuestionnairesFindings

Incident Playbooks

Pre-defined response procedures for common vendor risk scenarios. Playbooks guide your team through structured incident response when a vendor experiences a security event.

When to activate a playbook

Activate a playbook when a vendor reports a data breach, when a critical CVE is disclosed affecting a vendor’s technology stack, or when monitoring detects a significant change in a vendor’s risk posture. Early activation ensures consistent, auditable response.

Customising playbooks

Default playbooks cover common scenarios (data breach, ransomware, supply chain compromise). Duplicate and tailor them to your organisation’s regulatory obligations and internal processes.

Regulatory notification steps

Playbooks include regulatory notification checklists. For data breaches: NDB (30 days), CPS 234 (72 hours), Cyber Security Act (72 hours), CPS 230 (10 days), SOCI (30 days). Each step links to the incident notification tracker.

What playbooks are included by default?

Four default playbooks: Data Breach Response (NDB-aligned), Ransomware Incident (containment + recovery), Supply Chain Compromise (vendor cascade), and Critical Vulnerability Disclosure (CVE triage). Each includes steps for detection, containment, eradication, recovery, and lessons learned.

Can I create my own playbook?

Yes. Organisation admins can duplicate any existing playbook and customise the steps, stakeholders, and notification rules. Custom playbooks appear alongside default ones in the playbook library.

How do playbooks link to incidents?

When creating an incident, you can attach a playbook. The incident timeline then shows each playbook step as a checklist item. Completing steps on the incident automatically updates the playbook progress tracker.

Related Pages

IncidentsSecurityCompliance

Integrations

Connect ChainShield to your existing tools: Slack, Microsoft Teams, Jira, ServiceNow, SIEM platforms, and custom webhooks for real-time notifications and ticket creation.

What integrations are available

Three categories: Notifications (Slack, Teams, generic webhooks for real-time alerts), Ticketing (Jira Cloud, ServiceNow for creating issues from findings), and SIEM (Splunk HEC, Microsoft Sentinel, Elastic for security event forwarding). Configure one or more to fit your workflow.

Setting up webhooks

Create a webhook endpoint with a descriptive name, URL, and shared secret. Choose the event types to subscribe to: finding.created, vendor.risk_changed, assessment.completed, scan.completed, incident.created, vendor.added. Payloads are signed with HMAC-SHA256 using your shared secret.

Slack integration

Create a Slack Incoming Webhook URL in your Slack workspace settings, then paste it here. ChainShield sends formatted message cards with finding severity, vendor name, and direct links. Choose which events trigger Slack notifications.

Jira integration

Connect to Jira Cloud with your instance URL, email, and API token. Select a default project key. Finding severity maps to Jira priority, and control mapping is included as a label. Use "Test Connection" to verify before saving.

Webhook management permissions

Only organisation admins with the "Manage Integrations" permission can create, edit, or delete webhooks. URLs are masked in the audit log to prevent accidental exposure of internal endpoints or authentication parameters in shared logs.

Webhook delivery monitoring

Failed webhook deliveries are retried automatically up to 3 times with exponential backoff. Check the delivery log to see success/failure history. Common failures: endpoint unreachable, non-2xx response, or HMAC validation failure on the receiving end.

How do I test a webhook?

After creating a webhook, use the "Send Test" button to deliver a sample payload. Check your endpoint for the test event. If it fails, verify the URL is accessible, the endpoint returns 2xx, and the HMAC secret matches.

Can I have multiple webhook endpoints?

Yes. Create separate webhook endpoints for different purposes — for example, one Slack webhook for CRITICAL findings only, and a generic webhook for all events to your SIEM. Each endpoint has its own event subscriptions and secret.

What events can I subscribe to?

Available events: finding.created (new finding), vendor.risk_changed (risk score threshold crossed), assessment.completed (vendor submitted response), scan.completed (scan finished), incident.created (new incident), vendor.added (new vendor onboarded). Subscribe to specific events or all events per endpoint.

How do I connect to ServiceNow?

Enter your ServiceNow instance URL (e.g., https://acme.service-now.com), username, and password. Optionally specify an assignment group sys_id. Finding severity maps to impact and urgency. The control mapping is included in the incident description for proper classification. Credentials are encrypted at rest.

Why was my webhook URL masked in the audit log?

Webhook URLs are automatically masked in audit logs to prevent accidental exposure of internal endpoints, ports, or authentication parameters. The audit log shows only the webhook name and operation type (created, updated, deleted) without revealing the full URL. This protects your internal infrastructure from being logged in shared audit reports.

Worked Example

Connecting Slack notifications for critical findings

Scenario: Your SOC team wants instant Slack alerts when CRITICAL findings are discovered on CPS 230 Material Service Providers. 1. In your Slack workspace, create an Incoming Webhook: go to Apps > Incoming Webhooks > Add to Slack > choose the #vendor-risk-alerts channel. 2. Copy the webhook URL (https://hooks.slack.com/services/...). 3. In ChainShield, go to Settings > Integrations > Add Webhook. 4. Name: "SOC Critical Alerts", Type: Slack, URL: paste the webhook URL. 5. Events: select "finding.created" only. Set the severity filter to CRITICAL. 6. Click "Save" then "Send Test" to verify a test message appears in your Slack channel. 7. When the next scan discovers a CRITICAL finding, your SOC team receives a formatted Slack card with severity, vendor name, finding title, and a direct link to the finding detail page in ChainShield.

Related Pages

SettingsAPI KeysAPI Documentation

Material Service Provider Register

APRA CPS 230 requires APRA-regulated entities to maintain a register of material service providers. This page lists all vendors designated as material and aggregates key data for regulatory reporting.

What makes a vendor "material"

Under CPS 230, a service provider is material if a disruption to their service could have a material impact on your business operations, financial position, or reputation. Designate vendors as material on their detail page under the Risk Context tab.

Understanding the register columns

The register includes: vendor identity (name, ABN, domain), services provided (from product discovery), service criticality (business_criticality field), geographic locations (from physical_locations), data types handled (data_sensitivity), sub-contractor count (from vendor_dependencies), BCP and exit plan status (manual fields), risk rating, contract expiry, and last assessment date.

Exporting for APRA

Click "Export CSV" to generate a CSV file suitable for APRA CPS 230 reporting. The export includes a metadata header row with your organisation name and generation timestamp. Review the exported data for completeness before submitting to your regulator.

Filling data gaps

Amber "Missing" badges highlight incomplete data. To fill gaps: add contracts on vendor detail pages, run scans to populate geographic data and product discovery, and update data sensitivity classifications in the vendor Risk Context tab.

How do I mark a vendor as a material service provider?

Navigate to the vendor detail page, open the Risk Context tab, and enable the "Material Service Provider (CPS 230)" toggle. This adds the vendor to the MSP register.

What is BCP status?

Business Continuity Plan (BCP) status tracks whether the material service provider has a documented and tested business continuity plan. This is a manual field — update it based on evidence collected through assessments or direct vendor engagement.

What is an exit plan?

An exit plan documents how the organisation would transition away from a material service provider if needed (e.g., vendor failure, contract termination). CPS 230 requires organisations to have credible exit strategies for material arrangements. This is currently a manual field.

How is sub-contractor count determined?

Sub-contractor count is derived from the vendor_dependencies table, which tracks known fourth-party dependencies discovered during scans or entered manually. This helps assess concentration risk in your supply chain.

Related Pages

Compliance DashboardVendorsSettings

Material SP Register

Your CPS 230 material service provider register. All vendors flagged as material to your operational resilience obligations are listed here with compliance indicators for assessments, resilience reviews, exit plans, and monitoring status.

What is a material service provider?

Under APRA CPS 230, a material service provider is a third party whose disruption or failure would materially impact your operations. Mark vendors as material on the vendor detail page in the Risk Context section. Only material vendors appear in this register.

Compliance status badge

The "Last Review" column shows a green "Current" badge when the last assessment occurred within 12 months, an amber "Overdue" badge if it has been more than 12 months, and a grey "Not assessed" badge if no assessment has been recorded. Use this to identify vendors needing urgent review to meet CPS 230 obligations.

Next Due date

The "Next Due" column shows the scheduled next assessment date. When this date is in the past, the vendor is overdue for review. Set this date in the vendor Governance tab when completing an assessment.

Exit plans and BCP testing

CPS 230 requires documented exit plans and tested business continuity arrangements for material service providers. The "Exit Plan" column shows whether a plan is documented and its current status. The "BCP Tested" column shows the last date a resilience exercise was conducted for this vendor.

Related Pages

VendorsAssessmentsCompliance

MFA Setup

Configure multi-factor authentication to add an additional layer of security to your account. MFA protects against credential compromise by requiring a second verification factor.

Setting up TOTP

Scan the QR code with an authenticator app (Google Authenticator, Authy, 1Password, or any TOTP-compatible app). Enter the 6-digit code to verify setup. Once enabled, you will need to provide a code at each login.

Recovery codes

After enabling MFA, save your recovery codes in a secure location. Each recovery code can only be used once. If you lose access to your authenticator app, recovery codes are the only way to regain access to your account.

Organisational MFA requirements

Organisation administrators can enforce MFA for all team members via Settings > Security. When enforced, users without MFA will be required to set it up on their next login. This is recommended for CPS 234 and ISM compliance.

What authenticator apps are supported?

Any TOTP-compatible authenticator app works: Google Authenticator, Authy, 1Password, Microsoft Authenticator, Bitwarden, and others. The QR code encodes a standard TOTP secret.

What if I lose my authenticator device?

Use one of the recovery codes generated during setup. Each recovery code can only be used once. If you have exhausted all recovery codes, contact your organisation admin to reset your MFA.

Is MFA required?

It depends on your organisation settings. Admins can enforce MFA for all members via Settings > Security. When enforced, users without MFA are required to set it up on their next login. MFA is strongly recommended for CPS 234 and ISM compliance.

Related Pages

SettingsSecurity

Modules

Enable or disable ChainShield modules for your organisation. Disabled modules hide their navigation items and pages, simplifying your workspace for teams that don’t need every capability.

What are modules?

Modules let you simplify ChainShield by hiding features your team does not use yet. Core VRM is always on; Standard modules are enabled by default; Advanced modules (Fourth-Party Risk, Financial Risk, BCP/DR) are opt-in. Toggle modules off to reduce sidebar clutter — no data is deleted, and re-enabling restores everything instantly.

Who can change module settings?

Only organisation owners and admins can toggle modules. Viewers and members see a read-only view of which modules are active.

Advanced modules

Enable Fourth-Party Risk when you need to track vendor sub-contractors for CPS 230 compliance. Enable Financial Risk for credit monitoring and financial viability checks. Enable BCP/DR Testing to record business continuity exercises. Start with these off and turn them on as your risk program matures.

Does disabling a module delete data?

No. Disabling a module only hides the UI — all underlying data (findings, assessments, remediation tasks) remains intact. Re-enabling the module restores full access.

Can I disable Core VRM?

No. Core VRM (Dashboard, Vendors, Findings) is always on and cannot be disabled. It provides the foundational risk management capabilities.

Related Pages

SettingsTeam

MSP Enquiry Form

Request information about ChainShield for MSPs. Tell us about your practice, services, and client base so we can provide tailored recommendations.

Why MSP-specific pricing?

MSPs deliver SCRM to multiple clients. ChainShield MSP pricing bills per client managed, not per end-user. This allows you to resell ChainShield as part of your service offering.

Services we support

ChainShield can power your supply chain risk management (SCRM), vendor security assessments, compliance reporting (ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230), attack surface monitoring, incident response, and security dashboards for clients.

White-label options

For larger MSPs, we offer white-label branding and API access. Describe your needs in the form and our team will follow up with options.

Related Pages

PricingContact UsTerms of Service

Notification Preferences

Configure how and when you receive notifications from ChainShield. Set preferences for email alerts, in-app notifications, and digest frequency.

Email notification types

Four categories: Security Alerts (critical findings, risk score changes), Assessment Updates (vendor responses, overdue reminders), Scan Notifications (completed scans, failures), and Digest (weekly portfolio summary).

Frequency control

Choose between real-time (immediate email for each event), daily digest (consolidated at 9am AEST), or weekly digest (Monday morning summary). Real-time is recommended for CRITICAL findings only.

Muting notifications

Temporarily mute all notifications during maintenance windows or holidays. Muted notifications are still logged and can be reviewed in the notification centre.

Are notification preferences per-user or per-organisation?

Notification preferences are per-user. Each team member controls their own email notification settings. Organisation-level webhook notifications are configured separately in Settings > Integrations.

Why am I not receiving emails?

Check: (1) your notification preferences are enabled for that event type, (2) the email is not in your spam folder, (3) the organisation has a valid Resend API key configured. Contact your admin if emails are not being sent at the organisation level.

What is the weekly digest?

A consolidated email sent Monday mornings summarising the past week: opening summary with average vendor risk score (0-100 scale, where higher is worse) and count of vendors above your configured risk threshold, followed by new findings grouped by severity, risk score trends, assessment status updates, and upcoming contract expirations. Useful for staying informed without real-time noise.

Related Pages

SettingsIntegrations

Onboarding

Get your organisation set up with ChainShield. The onboarding checklist walks you through configuring your environment, adding vendors, and running your first scan.

Organisation configuration

The "Configure Your Organisation" step lets you set your industry sector and applicable regulatory frameworks. Your industry sector (e.g. Financial Services, Healthcare, Government) pre-configures the 7 risk domain weights — for example, Financial Services elevates Operational Resilience to 25% for CPS 230 alignment. Regulatory frameworks (both Australian and international) determine which compliance mappings are checked during scans. You can skip this step and configure later in Settings.

Completing the setup

Work through each step: configure your organisation name, set industry sector and regulatory frameworks, add a vendor, set risk context (criticality, data sensitivity), run your first scan, review findings, and invite your team. Each step can be completed independently and in any order.

Choosing regulatory frameworks

Select the Australian regulatory frameworks that apply to your organisation: ISM (government), CPS 234 (APRA-regulated financial services), CPS 230 (operational resilience), SOCI (critical infrastructure), NDB (all organisations handling personal information), Privacy Act, and Cyber Security Act 2024. These determine which compliance mappings are checked during scans.

Can I change my settings after onboarding?

Yes. All onboarding settings (industry sector, regulatory frameworks, vendor data) can be changed at any time from the Settings page. The onboarding wizard is just a guided way to configure the essentials.

How long does the first scan take?

The first scan typically takes 5-10 minutes, running the full pipeline (discovery, enrichment, CVE correlation, AI analysis, compliance mapping) — there is no separate quick/full scan choice. Results appear progressively as each phase completes.

Do I need to add all vendors at once?

No. Add vendors as you go. Start with your most critical vendors (Tier 1) to get immediate value. ChainShield discovers their assets and generates a risk profile automatically from just a name and domain.

Related Pages

DashboardAdd VendorSettingsHelp Centre

Portal Contacts

Manage your vendor's publicly visible contacts and review contacts discovered by the ChainShield scan pipeline. Add key people (CISO, DPO, Security lead) so linked organisations know who to contact. Confirm accurate pipeline candidates and reject false positives.

Add a contact

Click "Add contact" to create a contact that is immediately visible to all organisations monitoring your vendor. Contacts added here are globally visible (not org-private). A welcome email is sent to the contact if an email address is provided, unless you are adding yourself.

Edit or remove your contacts

Use the pencil icon to update a contact's name, email, or role. Use the trash icon to remove a contact. You can only manage contacts that were added from the portal — contacts added by an organisation through their own portal are read-only here.

Confidence badge

The confidence badge (High, Medium, Low) on discovered candidates reflects how reliably the scan pipeline matched a contact to your vendor. High (green) = found on a structured source such as security.txt. Low (red) = inferred from a team page or WHOIS field.

Confirm a discovered contact

Click Confirm to mark a discovered contact as verified. Confirmed contacts are visible to linked organisations and can be assigned to products.

Reject a discovered contact

Click Reject to soft-delete a false positive. The pipeline will not re-suggest it. This action is reversible by your vendor admin.

Who can see the contacts I add here?

Contacts added from the vendor portal are publicly visible to all organisations that have this vendor in their portfolio. They are marked as public (not org-private). A contact added by an organisation through their own interface is private to that organisation only.

Who else can see my confirmed contacts?

Organisations that have this vendor in their vendor portfolio can see confirmed contacts. Rejected contacts and unreviewed candidates are not visible to organisations until confirmed.

Why can I not edit some contacts?

Some contacts may have been added privately by an organisation (they are labelled Org-private from the org side). The vendor portal cannot edit or delete those contacts — they are managed by the organisation that created them.

Related Pages

Portal dashboardProducts

Pricing

ChainShield offers five tiers: Free (2 vendors), Starter ($490/mo, 10 vendors), Essentials ($975/mo, 25 vendors), Pro ($1,450/mo, 50 vendors), and Enterprise (from $1,990/mo, custom scale). All plans include AI risk analysis and CVE monitoring.

Overage billing

Each paid tier includes a set number of vendors. If you add more vendors than your included quota, you are charged an overage rate per extra vendor per month: $49 on Starter, $39 on Essentials, $29 on Pro. Enterprise uses negotiated contract terms with no per-vendor overage charges.

Crossover points

Starter is the most cost-effective choice below 10 vendors. At around 20 vendors the Essentials base fee ($975) becomes comparable to Starter with overages ($980). At around 34 vendors, Essentials overages bring you close to the Pro base price. Use the comparison cards on the pricing page to find your break-even point.

Free plan and the 14-day trial

The Free plan is capped at 2 vendors and includes a 14-day Starter trial on signup. During the trial your organisation can monitor up to 10 vendors with weekly scans and full report access. After the trial, the account reverts to Free (2-vendor cap) unless you subscribe.

Enterprise contact sales

Enterprise pricing is negotiated directly. Use the "Contact sales" button to email sales@chainshield.com.au with your requirements. Enterprise contracts include a dedicated success manager, negotiated vendor scale, SSO/SAML, white-label reports, and compliance assistance.

What is overage?

Overage is the charge per vendor above your included quota each month. If you are on Starter (10 included) and add a 15th vendor, you pay 5 x $49 = $245 in overage on top of the $490 base fee. Overages are calculated on the peak vendor count for the billing period.

What does "included" mean?

Included vendors are those covered by your base monthly fee. Starter includes 10, Essentials includes 25, Pro includes 50. Free is hard-capped at 2 with no overage option.

What is a trial?

New Free accounts receive a 14-day Starter trial automatically on signup. During the trial you get Starter-tier benefits: up to 10 vendors, weekly scans, PDF reports, and assessment questionnaires. No credit card is required. After 14 days the account returns to the Free tier.

What is dunning?

Dunning is the period after a failed payment where ChainShield retries the charge before restricting access. During the dunning window your account remains active. If payment fails after three retries your account is suspended until the overdue invoice is settled.

Can my MSP set a different price?

Yes. If you access ChainShield through a Managed Service Provider, your MSP may apply custom pricing or discounts via their account settings. Contact your MSP for your specific rates. The prices on chainshield.com.au/pricing reflect the standard ChainShield catalogue.

Related Pages

Sign upOrganisation settings

Privacy & Data Handling

Structured record of this vendor's data handling practices - DPA status, data residency, cross-border transfers, data types processed, and retention controls. Supports Privacy Act / CPS 234 compliance and NDB breach impact assessment.

How data handling information gets populated

Data is populated automatically when a vendor completes a Privacy & Data Protection assessment (source authority: Assessment). You can also add or edit data manually (source authority: Manual). A higher source authority value means lower precedence - assessment data wins over manual entry, which wins over agent discovery.

DPA status and expiry alerts

The DPA (Data Processing Agreement) status tracks whether a formal agreement is in place with this vendor. If the DPA expiry date is within 90 days, a warning indicator appears. Expired or refused DPAs should be escalated - they indicate a gap in contractual data protection obligations.

Data residency and cross-border transfers

The Data Residency card shows where this vendor stores your data. The Cross-Border Transfers card tracks whether data is sent overseas and what safeguards apply (APP 8 of the Privacy Act requires APP entities to take reasonable steps to ensure overseas recipients protect the information). ISO country codes are used - AU = Australia, US = United States.

Sub-processors

Sub-processors are third parties the vendor uses to process data on your behalf. Each sub-processor row shows their country, data types they access, and whether a DPA is in place. A DPA with the primary vendor does not automatically cover sub-processors - check the 'Covers sub-processors' field.

What is the Privacy & Data tab?

It shows a structured, queryable record of how this vendor handles your data - including DPA status, data residency, cross-border transfers, data types processed, and consent and retention controls. This information is more useful for auditors and compliance checks than raw findings or assessment response blobs.

How does data handling information get populated?

When a vendor submits a Privacy & Data Protection assessment, ChainShield automatically extracts the structured fields and saves them here. You can also add or edit data manually using the Edit button. In future phases, the privacy agent will populate fields it can discover from the vendor's public privacy policy.

What does source authority mean?

Source authority indicates the confidence level of the data. Assessment data (authority 2) is the most trusted - it comes from the vendor's signed responses. Manual entry (authority 4) is human-entered and takes precedence over agent-discovered data (authority 5). When a new assessment is submitted, it replaces the previous record and the old data is archived for audit trail.

What is the difference between data residency and cross-border transfers?

Data residency is where the vendor stores the data (e.g., AWS Sydney = AU). Cross-border transfers is when data is sent to another country for processing (e.g., sending AU data to a US analytics service). Both affect Privacy Act APP 8 obligations - you need to know about both, not just where data is stored.

Related Pages

VendorsComplianceAssessments

Privacy Policy

ChainShield Privacy Policy — how we collect, use, protect, and store your personal data in compliance with the Australian Privacy Act 1988 and Privacy Principles (APPs).

Your privacy rights

Under the Australian Privacy Act 1988, you have the right to access, correct, and delete your personal data. ChainShield complies with all Australian Privacy Principles (APPs). We do not sell your data to third parties.

Data we collect

We collect your name, email, and organisation details when you create an account. We also collect information about vendors from publicly available sources only (open-source intelligence / OSINT). We never use private or proprietary data without permission.

Questions or concerns?

For privacy questions or data subject requests, contact privacy@chainshield.com.au. Response time: 30 calendar days (Australian Privacy Principles requirement).

Related Pages

Data Subject Request PortalTerms of ServiceCookie Policy

Product & Technology Inventory

ChainShield builds a live inventory of every product, SaaS tool, and technology each of your vendors ships — with lifecycle, criticality, and risk context.

What the inventory covers

For every vendor ChainShield monitors, the product inventory captures each product name, version, deployment model (SaaS, self-hosted, hybrid), lifecycle phase (Full Support through End of Life), and hosting provider. This replaces manual tech-stack spreadsheets and keeps your risk picture current as vendors ship updates.

How it is built

The inventory is derived from evidence: ChainShield scanner, HTTP fingerprinting, SBOM submissions, and cross-validation by seven domain-aligned AI agents. Low-confidence detections go through a human review gate before appearing in your organisation's inventory.

Signing in for your org's view

This page describes the feature for prospective users. Once signed in, the authenticated /products page shows your organisation's live inventory, scoped to your vendor portfolio with per-org criticality, data sensitivity, and usage context layered on top.

Related Pages

Sign UpChainShield for MSPsPricing

Questionnaire Response Detail

Review a submitted or in-progress questionnaire response and control who can see your answers using the sharing setting. Answering itself happens via your assessment link (the questionnaire wizard).

Sharing settings

The sharing section lets you choose who can see this response. "Requesting org only" is the default and safest option — only the organisation that requested the assessment can view your answers. Widening to "all linked orgs" shares your answers with every organisation that has your company in their vendor portfolio.

Confirm before widening

When you select "all linked orgs", a confirmation dialog will tell you how many additional organisations will gain access. Review this before confirming. You can narrow the visibility back at any time while the response is in draft.

Locked once submitted

After you submit a questionnaire, the sharing setting is locked and shown as read-only. The "Submitted" badge indicates this state. Contact your assessing organisation if you need to change visibility on a submitted response.

Related Pages

All QuestionnairesDashboard

Regulatory Feed

Real-time regulatory alerts from ASD (Australian Signals Directorate), APRA, and OAIC, matched against keywords relevant to your compliance frameworks. Use this feed to stay ahead of enforcement actions, advisory notices, and emerging regulatory obligations.

What this feed contains

Alerts are scraped from official regulator RSS feeds and advisory pages. Each alert is keyword-matched against a curated list covering cybersecurity, privacy, operational resilience, and financial risk topics. The feed is global — it is not filtered to your specific vendors. Use it to identify regulatory developments that may affect your vendor risk posture or upcoming audit obligations.

How to use the keyword filter

The keyword filter matches against the exact keywords our system tagged the alert with (e.g. "ransomware", "CPS 234", "NDB"). Type a keyword to narrow the list. For partial matches use the source filter to narrow by regulator first.

Related Pages

Compliance dashboardControls

Remediation

Track and manage finding and assessment remediations across your vendor portfolio. Remediation tasks may originate from scan findings or from org-private self-assessment remediations.

Prioritisation strategy

Sort by business impact (not just severity) to focus on findings that matter most to your organisation. A MEDIUM finding on a Tier 1 vendor with sensitive data may deserve more attention than a HIGH finding on a Tier 3 vendor.

Working with vendors

Use the vendor portal to communicate findings and track remediation. Vendors can update their status and provide evidence of fixes without needing a ChainShield account. The next scheduled scan will automatically verify whether the issue is resolved.

Remediation velocity tracking

Track how quickly your vendors resolve findings. The average remediation time is one of 6 Key Risk Indicators (KRIs) reported on the dashboard and in board reports. Target: less than 14 days for green status. Vendors with remediation times over 30 days are flagged red.

Creating tickets from findings

If Jira or ServiceNow is configured, click "Create Ticket" on any finding to push it to your ticketing system. The ticket includes severity, vendor name, description, and remediation guidance with a link back to ChainShield.

Mixed remediation sources

Remediation tasks can come from two sources: scan findings (automated — created when a finding requires tracking) and self-assessment remediations (org-private — created when your organisation records a gap in a vendor self-assessment). Self-assessment remediations are only visible to your organisation. You can deep-link to a specific task by navigating to /remediation?id=<task_id> from the Self-Assessment Remediations sub-tab.

Accepted vs Won't Fix

Accepted means your organisation has reviewed this task and formally accepted the residual risk — the issue is acknowledged but not being actively remediated. Won't Fix means your organisation has decided this task will not be remediated (e.g. out of scope or mitigated elsewhere). Both are terminal states and appear with distinct blue and slate styling respectively.

How does auto-resolution work?

When a scan no longer detects an issue that was previously found, the finding is automatically set to SYSTEM_RESOLVED. This means the vendor has fixed the problem. SYSTEM_RESOLVED findings are purged after 12 months.

What is the difference between RESOLVED and SYSTEM_RESOLVED?

RESOLVED is manually set by a user to indicate the vendor has fixed the issue. SYSTEM_RESOLVED is automatically set by the scan pipeline when the issue is no longer detected. Both are considered "resolved" for reporting purposes.

How should I prioritise remediation?

Sort by business impact rather than severity alone. A MEDIUM finding on a Tier 1 CPS 230 Material Service Provider handling sensitive data may be more urgent than a HIGH finding on a Tier 3 vendor with minimal data access. CRITICAL findings should always be triaged within hours.

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsReports

Remediation Actions

Track all remediation actions across this vendor's assessments. Remediations are follow-up tasks spawned from assessment findings (low scores, missing certifications, compliance gaps). Manage status, owner, due date, and evidence in one place.

Understanding remediations

When an assessment question reveals a gap or concern (e.g. "No" on insurance, low score on compliance capability), you can create a remediation action to track the fix. Remediations link back to the specific assessment response that triggered them, preserving the audit trail.

Remediation lifecycle

Remediations move through status: open (new) -> in_progress (assigned to owner, work underway) -> resolved (completed, awaiting confirmation), accepted (gap acknowledged but owned by vendor), or wont_fix (deliberate choice to not address). The system records who changed the status and when.

Filtering by status

Use the Status filter at the top to narrow the view to a specific remediation state. For example, filter to "Open" to see items needing assignment, or "In Progress" to track active work.

Assigning and updating

Click any remediation row to open the detail panel. Assign it to a user (owner_user_id), set a due date, add description text, and attach evidence documents. Every change is recorded in the audit log with the author and timestamp.

Evidence attachment

Attach supporting documents to a remediation (corrective action plan, vendor response, audit report, resolved ticket). Evidence files are linked and searchable. This creates a complete record of the remediation journey for compliance auditors.

Org-private tracking

Remediations are visible only to your organisation. The vendor cannot see them. This is a strict boundary: remediations exist solely for internal tracking and compliance evidence.

Can the vendor see my remediations?

No. Remediations are organisation-private. The vendor cannot see them. If you want to request remediation from the vendor (e.g. "update your compliance certification"), that is a separate communication outside ChainShield.

Who can create a remediation?

Any authenticated user with access to the vendor can create a remediation. Typically this is done while filling in the assessment form (clicking "Create Remediation" on a response), but you can also create one directly from the Remediations tab.

What if I assigned a remediation to the wrong person?

Click the remediation row and update the Owner field. The system records the change in the audit log with the timestamp and author. You can reassign at any time.

Can I delete a remediation?

No. Remediations can only be archived (soft-deleted, hidden from view). Hard deletion is not allowed to preserve the audit trail. To hide an archived remediation, filter out archived items using the view toggle.

Why is there an event log on each remediation?

The event log records every change: status transition, owner assignment, due date update, description change, and evidence attachment. This creates a forensic audit trail useful for compliance evidence, incident investigations, and accountability.

Why does the scan reject some vendor URLs as invalid even though they return HTTP 200?

Many vendor websites return a branded navigation skeleton (HTTP 200) for any unknown path — a "soft-404". ChainShield's URL verifier (CS-1546) probes a random path on each vendor domain to capture this fingerprint, then rejects any discovered URL whose body matches the fingerprint. This prevents hallucinated or guessed paths from being saved as verified resource URLs. URLs found via the vendor's sitemap.xml or robots.txt are used as candidates instead, since they are known-good paths. If a legitimate URL is incorrectly rejected, contact your administrator to review the vendor's soft-404 fingerprint settings.

Related Pages

Self-Assessment FrameworkVendors

Report Branding

Customise the brand used on exported PDF and CSV reports. Set a display name, file prefix, prepared-by attribution, logo, and colour palette for white-labelled MSP customer deliverables. Org-level overrides MSP-level; MSP-level overrides ChainShield defaults.

Why customise report branding?

When MSPs deliver risk reports to their customers, they often need the report to reflect the MSP or customer brand rather than ChainShield. Setting a custom brand replaces the ChainShield logo and name on PDF covers, headers, and footers, and prefixes exported filenames with your organisation name.

Branding precedence

Report branding resolves in three levels: (1) Organisation-level override — set by an org admin and applies only to that org. (2) MSP-level brand — set by an MSP admin and applies to all customer orgs that have NOT set their own override. (3) ChainShield default — used when no custom brand is set at either level. Set an org override to give one customer a distinct brand while your other customers use the MSP brand.

Logo URL requirements

The logo must be a publicly accessible HTTPS URL pointing to a PNG or JPEG image. File size should be ≤ 500 KB for good PDF rendering performance. IP addresses, localhost, and internal domain suffixes are not allowed — the URL is validated at both store time and report render time. Use a CDN or public storage bucket (e.g. AWS S3, Cloudflare R2, Google Cloud Storage with public ACL).

Colour fields

Primary colour affects the report cover band and section headings. Accent colour is used for secondary highlights. Use the colour picker or enter a hex value directly. Colours are stored as RGB integer triples internally.

MSP scope vs Organisation scope

MSP admins see a scope switcher with "Organisation" (current org context) and "MSP (all customer orgs)". Use "MSP" scope to set a default brand for all customers in your MSP portfolio. Individual org admins can later set their own override via "Organisation" scope. Superadmins use the org scope they are currently contexted to — use the org/MSP context switcher in the sidebar to change context.

Will changing the branding affect previously exported reports?

No. Report branding is resolved at export time. Existing exported PDF/CSV files are not affected. Only new exports use the updated brand.

What if I reset to default?

Clicking "Reset to default" removes the stored brand for the current scope. If an org override is removed, the org falls back to the MSP brand (if set). If the MSP brand is removed, all customer orgs without their own override will use ChainShield default branding on the next export.

Can a viewer change branding settings?

No. Branding changes require an org admin or owner role for org-scope, or MSP admin/owner/super-admin role for MSP-scope. Viewers and members cannot save changes.

Related Pages

SettingsReportsTeam

Reset Password

Request a password reset link. You will receive an email with a secure link to set a new password.

Check your email

Enter the email address associated with your ChainShield account. If an account exists, you will receive a reset link. Check your inbox and spam folder.

Reset link expiry

Reset links expire after 1 hour for security. If your link has expired, return to this page and request a new one.

Password requirements

Your new password must be at least 8 characters long and include an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, and a number.

Related Pages

Back to Sign InCreate Account

SBOM Upload Portal

Submit a Software Bill of Materials (SBOM) to the organisation. Your SBOM allows them to scan for vulnerable components and improve your risk assessment.

What is an SBOM?

A Software Bill of Materials (SBOM) is a complete inventory of all software components and dependencies in your product. It allows ChainShield to automatically cross-reference your components against the National Vulnerability Database (NVD) and detect known CVEs.

Supported formats

ChainShield accepts SBOMs in SPDX (SPDX JSON or RDF) or CycloneDX (JSON or XML) format. Most build tools (npm, pip, Maven, Gradle, Go modules, Rust cargo, etc.) can generate SBOM files automatically. See documentation for your build tool.

What happens after upload

ChainShield will scan your SBOM components against the NVD. Each vulnerable component generates a COMPONENT_VULN_IN_SBOM finding with the CVE ID and severity. This helps the organisation understand your component risk and prioritise patching.

Assessor organisation indicator

The top bar of this page shows the name of the organisation assessing your vendor risk. This trust indicator helps you verify you are communicating with the correct organisation.

Related Pages

Vendor DashboardView FindingsYour Profile

Scenario Simulator

The Scenario Simulator lets you model "what if" risk scenarios for your vendor portfolio. All results are estimated and read-only - no data is changed. Results are labelled "Estimated Impact" to distinguish them from authoritative risk scores computed by the scoring engine.

Vendor Failure simulation

Selects a vendor and simulates the risk impact if all of its open findings escalated to CRITICAL severity. The result shows the score delta - how many points your risk score would increase. Use this to prioritise vendors where a failure would have the greatest impact on your risk posture.

Concentration analysis

Identifies product categories where your organisation relies on a single vendor - known as single points of failure. For example, if only one vendor provides cloud storage services, losing that vendor would leave you with no alternative in that category. SCRM-11.2 requires identifying and planning for these concentrations.

Alternative supplier suggestions

For a given vendor, shows other vendors in your portfolio that operate in overlapping product categories. This helps you identify whether alternatives already exist before making a sourcing decision. Note: this only searches your existing portfolio, not external vendor databases.

Geopolitical scenario

Simulates the impact of a jurisdiction becoming high-risk (e.g. sanctions or regulatory changes). Enter a country code (e.g. cn, ru, us) to see which vendors have physical presence there and estimate the score impact. Vendor locations are detected by the scan pipeline from business registrations, office addresses, and IP geolocation.

Why "Estimated Impact"?

Simulation results use a simplified scoring model for immediate feedback. The authoritative risk scores on your dashboard are computed by the Python scoring engine using the full 7-domain framework. Simulation scores may differ by up to 5-10 points - they are intended for planning purposes, not compliance reporting.

Does running a simulation change any vendor data?

No. All simulations are completely read-only. No findings are updated, no scores are recalculated in the database, and no audit log entries are created. The simulation computes hypothetical results in memory and discards them after the response is returned.

Are simulation results the same as real scores?

No. Simulation scores use a simplified TS scoring model for immediate UI feedback. Authoritative scores are computed by the Python scoring engine (which uses the full 7-domain framework with per-control weights) and may differ by up to 5-10 points. Always use the dashboard score for compliance reporting.

Why does the concentration tab show no data?

Concentration analysis requires vendors to have product categories configured. If your vendors have no products set up in the system, the tab will show "No product category data found." Add products via the Products tab on each vendor detail page, or wait for the scan pipeline to auto-discover them.

Can I export simulation results?

Yes. Use your browser's print function or screenshot the results for board reports. Future versions will add a dedicated CSV export for simulation results.

Related Pages

VendorsCompliance

SCIM 2.0 Provisioning

ChainShield supports SCIM 2.0 for automated user lifecycle management. Connect your IdP (Okta, Azure AD / Entra ID) to automatically create, update, and deactivate user accounts when staff join or leave. Requires a dedicated API key with the "scim:provision" scope.

Creating a SCIM token

Create an API key in Settings > API Keys and select the "scim:provision" scope only. Do not add other scopes to SCIM tokens — they are machine-to-machine and should be narrowly scoped. Set an expiry of 365 days and rotate annually.

Base URL for your IdP

When configuring SCIM in your IdP, set the base URL to: https://chainshield.com.au/api/scim/v2 and the authentication method to "HTTP Bearer". Paste the full SCIM token as the Bearer value. The IdP will discover resource types via /ServiceProviderConfig.

Groups not yet supported

Stage A supports User lifecycle (create, update, deactivate) only. Group provisioning is coming in a follow-up release. Your IdP may probe /Groups — it will receive a 501 response which is the correct signal to skip group sync.

Supported filter expressions (Stage A)

SCIM filter is supported for: userName eq "email", externalId eq "uid", active eq true/false. Advanced filters (co, sw, or, not) are not yet supported and will return a 400 invalidFilter response. Full filter support is tracked in CS-1518.

Can I use SCIM with an MSP-scoped token?

Yes. MSP-scoped API keys (with msp_id set instead of organisation_id) support SCIM provisioning against MSP-tier memberships. The tenantKind is automatically detected from the key. MSP SCIM tokens must still have the scim:provision scope.

What happens when my IdP deprovisions a user?

SCIM DELETE and PATCH active=false both deactivate the membership and immediately revoke all active sessions via the CS-497 deactivation primitive. The auth.users record is retained for audit history. The user will be unable to log in on their next request.

Does SCIM CREATE set a password?

No. SCIM-provisioned users authenticate via your IdP (SSO). The membership is created with auth_mode=sso when sso_required is true on the tenant, otherwise password_mfa. Invite-by-email for password users is not triggered by SCIM — your IdP owns authentication.

Related Pages

API KeysSSO Configuration

Security Overview

Monitor your organisation’s overall security posture across all vendors. This page aggregates key security metrics, active threats, and compliance gaps into a single view.

Understanding the security score

The composite security score reflects findings severity, asset exposure, and compliance alignment across all your vendors. A declining trend warrants immediate attention — drill into individual vendors to identify the source.

Prioritising remediation

Focus on CRITICAL and HIGH severity findings first, especially those tagged with CISA KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities). These represent actively exploited weaknesses with the highest real-world risk.

Regulatory alignment

Security metrics map to your configured regulatory frameworks (ISM, CPS 234, SOCI). Use the compliance tab to see which controls have gaps and export evidence for audit preparation.

Active threat indicators

Findings tagged with CISA KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities) or high EPSS scores (>0.7) indicate active exploitation risk. These appear prominently in the security overview and should be triaged immediately.

How is the security score different from the risk score?

The security score focuses on the Cybersecurity domain (40% of the composite risk score) and aggregates findings across all vendors. The composite risk score includes all 7 domains including operational resilience, compliance, privacy, financial, reputational, and geopolitical.

What should I focus on first?

Start with CRITICAL findings, especially those with high EPSS scores (active exploitation probability). Then address HIGH findings on Tier 1 vendors. Use the compliance view to identify regulatory gaps that need board-level reporting.

How often is the security overview updated?

The security overview refreshes automatically from cached data. Underlying data updates after each vendor scan completes. Run more frequent scans on critical vendors for near-real-time security posture monitoring.

Related Pages

FindingsComplianceVendorsControls

Security Settings

Configure security controls for your organisation: MFA enforcement, vendor approval workflows, session policies, and SSO settings.

MFA enforcement

Enable "Require MFA for all members" to enforce multi-factor authentication across your organisation. When enabled, users without MFA are prompted to set it up on their next login. This is recommended for CPS 234 and ISM compliance.

Vendor approval workflow

Turn this on to prevent unvetted vendors from entering your active portfolio. New vendors stay in Prospect status until an admin or manager reviews and approves them. This gives your team a chance to set risk context and compliance scope before monitoring begins.

Session management

Configure session timeout duration and idle timeout. Shorter sessions reduce the window for session hijacking. CPS 234 recommends idle timeout of 15 minutes for sensitive systems.

SSO configuration

Configure SAML or OIDC single sign-on for your organisation. SSO eliminates password-based authentication and centralises access control. When SSO is enforced, users must authenticate via the identity provider.

IP allowlisting

Restrict access to ChainShield from specific IP addresses or CIDR ranges. Useful for organisations that require access only from corporate networks or VPNs.

How do I enforce MFA for my organisation?

Toggle "Require MFA for all members" in the Security section. All existing members without MFA will see a mandatory setup prompt on their next login. New members must configure MFA during onboarding. Recovery codes are generated during setup for account recovery.

What is the vendor approval workflow?

When enabled, newly added vendors start in Prospect status and require explicit approval from an admin or manager before becoming Active. The approval banner on the vendor detail page shows approve/reject actions with a notes field. Low-risk vendors (score <30, Tier 3) can be configured for auto-approval.

Does MFA enforcement affect API keys?

No. MFA enforcement only applies to interactive (browser) logins. API key authentication is separate and not affected by MFA settings. API keys should be scoped with minimum required permissions.

Related Pages

SettingsMFA SetupTeamSSO

Self-Assessment Form

Record your organisation's evaluation of the vendor across capability categories. Assessments are private to your organisation - the vendor cannot see them. Save your responses as a draft, then submit when ready to lock and score.

Starting a new assessment

Click "New Assessment" to create a draft using a template. The form displays questions grouped by category (e.g. Quality/OHS/ISMS, Business Capability, Compliance). Answer each question with a rating, yes/no/not-applicable choice, numeric value, or free-text comment. You can save your progress at any time - the draft is stored automatically.

Draft vs Submitted

A draft assessment can be edited freely. Once you submit it, the assessment is locked: questions cannot be changed. Only the following roles can reopen a submitted assessment to edit responses: organisation admin, manager, or the person who submitted it. Reopening an assessment unblocks editing for another round of changes.

Adding evidence

For any question, you can attach a supporting document (PDF, image, spreadsheet) via the evidence upload area. Evidence might be a financial report, certification scan, policy document, or audit result. Uploaded files are linked to that specific response and remain searchable in the remediation audit trail.

Creating remediation actions

As you fill in responses, you may spot issues needing follow-up (low scores, missing certifications, expiring insurance). Click "Create Remediation" on that response to spawn a tracked action item. Remediations have owners, due dates, status tracking, and an audit log. You can create multiple remediations per response.

Submitting the assessment

When your responses are complete, click "Submit Assessment". A confirmation dialog will ask you to verify before locking. On submission, ChainShield computes an overall score using a weighted formula, captures the formula version (for future backward compatibility), and records the submission timestamp and author. You cannot edit the assessment after submission - reopen it if you need to make changes.

Org privacy

Your assessment is visible only to your organisation (and your MSP parent if managed). Other organisations linked to the same vendor cannot see your assessment. The vendor cannot see it at all. This is a strict trust boundary enforced at the database level.

What if I start a draft and don't finish?

Your draft is saved automatically as you work. You can return to it anytime without submitting. Only one draft per vendor per template is allowed, so opening a new assessment using the same template will load the existing draft. If you want to abandon the draft, you must delete it explicitly or archive the assessment after submission.

Can I edit a submitted assessment?

No. Once submitted, an assessment is locked to preserve an audit trail. If you discover an error or new information, click "Reopen" to transition it back into editable mode (reopened status). Reopening is audited: the system records who reopened it and when. You can then re-submit to lock the new responses.

What does the score mean?

The score is a weighted roll-up of all your responses, calculated at submission time. It reflects how you rated the vendor across capability categories. The score formula is captured in the assessment record, enabling ChainShield to recompute scores if scoring rules change in future versions. The score is your assessment only - it is separate from the automated platform risk score.

Can the vendor see my assessment?

No. Assessments are completely hidden from the vendor portal. The vendor never sees your capability ratings, comments, or remediation actions. If you want to share feedback with the vendor, that is a separate communication outside ChainShield.

Related Pages

Self-Assessment FrameworkVendors

Set New Password

Set a new password after clicking the reset link from your email. Follow the password requirements to create a strong password.

Password requirements

Your password must be at least 8 characters long and include an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, and a number. The password checker will show you which requirements are met as you type.

Confirm your password

Re-enter your password exactly as typed to ensure there are no typos. Both passwords must match.

After you reset

You will be returned to the dashboard and remain signed in. Your old password will no longer work.

Related Pages

Back to Sign In

SIEM Integration

Forward ChainShield findings and risk events to your SIEM platform. Supported targets: Splunk HEC, Microsoft Sentinel, and Elastic. Configuration is API-only via the ChainShield REST API.

API-only configuration

SIEM integrations are created and managed via the REST API — there is no form UI on this page. Use your organisation API key (Settings > API Keys) as a Bearer token. POST to /api/integrations/siem with name, siem_type, endpoint_url, auth_credential, and event_types. Auth credentials are encrypted at rest using AES-256-GCM.

Supported event types

Subscribe to any combination of: finding.created, finding.updated, finding.resolved, vendor.created, vendor.risk_changed, assessment.completed, assessment.overdue. Events are forwarded in real time as they occur in the ChainShield pipeline.

Credential formats per SIEM type

Splunk HEC: auth_credential is the HEC token. Microsoft Sentinel: auth_credential must be "workspaceId:sharedKey" (UUID colon base64 key). Elastic: auth_credential is the Elasticsearch API key. All credentials are encrypted before storage.

Related Pages

API KeysIntegrationsAPI DocumentationSettings

Sign In

Sign into ChainShield with your email and password, Google Workspace, or SAML SSO. Secure authentication with optional two-factor authentication (MFA).

Sign-in methods

You can sign in with email and password, Google Workspace/Gmail, or SAML SSO (enterprise single sign-on). If your organisation has SSO configured, enter your email to be redirected to your company login page.

Forgot your password?

If you cannot remember your password, click "Forgot password?" to receive a reset email. The link expires after 1 hour for security.

Two-factor authentication (MFA)

If your organisation has enabled MFA, you will be prompted to enter a 6-digit code from your authenticator app after signing in. Keep your recovery codes safe — you can use them if you lose access to your authenticator app.

Account not authorised to sign in this way?

If you see a message saying your account cannot sign in this way, your organisation may require SSO (enterprise single sign-on) or email/password login for your account type. Contact your administrator to confirm your account configuration. For security reasons, ChainShield does not disclose which login method is required.

Related Pages

Reset PasswordCreate AccountTerms of Service

SSO Domain Claiming

Claim and verify DNS ownership of your organisation email domains before registering an SSO provider. ChainShield uses a DNS TXT record challenge to confirm you control the domain.

DNS TXT record setup

Add the generated TXT record to your DNS zone with the host "_chainshield-verify.<domain>" and the provided value. In Cloudflare: DNS > Add record > Type TXT. In Route 53: create a TXT record set. In Namecheap: Advanced DNS > Add TXT record. DNS propagation takes up to 48 hours.

The TXT value is shown only once

The verification value is returned a single time, when you claim the domain. Copy it immediately and publish it to your DNS. If you lose it, unclaim the domain and re-claim it to generate a fresh record.

Who can claim domains

Only organisation admins and owners can claim or verify domains. Standard users and managers cannot — SSO domain binding is too high-blast-radius. Promote a user to Admin in Settings > Team to delegate this.

Tokens expire after 24 hours

Verification tokens expire 24 hours after the domain is claimed. If the badge shows "Expired", unclaim the domain and re-claim it to start a fresh 24-hour window.

Verified domains unlock SSO provider registration

Once a domain is verified, it becomes selectable when registering a SAML SSO provider on the SSO Settings page. Pending or expired domains are blocked from provider registration.

Why claim a domain before setting up SSO?

ChainShield validates DNS ownership to prevent cross-tenant impersonation. Without this step, any organisation could register an SSO provider for a domain they do not own, routing logins for that domain through their provider.

What if my parent MSP already claimed the domain?

You receive HTTP 409 "domain_claimed_by_parent_msp". The MSP owns the domain at the platform level. Contact your MSP admin. Override support is planned in CS-1200.

What if I lost the TXT value?

The value is only shown once, at claim time — the token is not stored in a form the UI can re-display. Unclaim the domain and claim it again to generate a new TXT record, then publish the new value.

Can I claim a subdomain (e.g. mail.acme.com)?

Yes, but SSO matching is done on the full domain string. If your users log in with @acme.com addresses, claim acme.com (not mail.acme.com). The TXT record host will be _chainshield-verify.acme.com.

Related Pages

SSO SettingsSecurity SettingsSettings

Team & Permission Management

Manage your organisation's team members, assign roles, and configure granular permissions. Only owners and admins can edit team settings.

Role hierarchy

Eight roles are available: Owner (full control including team management), Admin (full access to all features), Manager (vendor, assessment, and contract management), Security (security-focused access to findings and risk), Compliance (regulatory framework access), User (standard team access), Member (vendor and assessment management), and Viewer (read-only). Only owners can modify other owners.

Granular permissions

Each member has 7 permission toggles independent of their role: Manage Vendors, Manage Assessments, Manage Team, View Financial, Export Data, Manage Integrations, and Manage Risk Config. Use these to fine-tune access beyond the base role.

Persona switching

Users with multiple active persona assignments can switch between them using the persona switcher in the header bar. Switching updates the sidebar, feature flags, and navigates to the new persona's landing page — no page reload required. The last-used persona is remembered across sessions. Admins can mark one persona as "primary" to set the default when no prior selection exists.

Deactivation vs removal

Deactivating a member preserves their audit trail and data associations while revoking access. Removing a member permanently deletes their organisation membership. Prefer deactivation for compliance and traceability.

Invitation management

Pending invitations show an amber badge; expired ones show a red badge. Expired invitations can be resent — this regenerates the token and extends the expiry by 7 days. Use the revoke button to cancel any pending invitation. Only owners and admins can manage invitations.

Viewing deactivated members (audit path)

Organisation admins and MSP admins can retrieve deactivated members for audit purposes by calling GET /api/organisations/[id]/users?active=false. By default (?active=true or no parameter) the endpoint returns only active members. The underlying memberships table is queried directly — the organisation_members view hard-filters is_active=true and cannot expose inactive rows regardless of query parameters.

What is the difference between roles and personas?

Roles control permissions (what actions a user can perform). Personas bundle a role with a tailored UI experience (landing page, sidebar items, feature flags). Assigning a persona automatically sets the underlying role. You can use roles without personas, but personas provide a better user experience.

Can a user have multiple roles?

A user has one role per organisation membership. However, if a user is a member of multiple organisations, they can have different roles in each. Use the context selector to switch between organisations.

How do I transfer ownership?

Only the current owner can transfer ownership. Go to Settings > Team, click the current owner, and select "Transfer Ownership" to assign it to another admin. The previous owner retains admin access after transfer.

Related Pages

SettingsAudit Trail

Technology Inventory

Org-level technology inventory showing all software and services detected across your vendors. Track end-of-life risks, monitor version currency, and identify concentration risks where the same technology is relied upon by multiple vendors.

What is shown here

This page aggregates all technologies detected across all vendors in your organisation. Technologies include web servers, databases, frameworks, content management systems, SaaS platforms, and security products. Each technology shows version, end-of-life status, latest version availability, associated vendor count, and CVE risk indicators. Technologies are discovered from multiple sources: DNS/HTTP banners, TLS certificates, DNS records, HTTP headers, Shodan/Censys, and GitHub API enrichment.

Why end-of-life (EOL) matters

End-of-life software is no longer receiving security patches. A vendor using an EOL web server, database, or framework is exposed to all known vulnerabilities in that product because patches will never be released. EOL technologies are flagged with a red badge and should be treated as high-priority remediation targets. Vendors should upgrade to a supported version or migrate to an alternative. EOL amplifies risk scores across Cybersecurity controls. Check the vendor detail page to see which infrastructure is running the EOL component.

Concentration risk

Some technologies may be used by many vendors (e.g., nginx is deployed by 15 of your 50 vendors). Concentration risk means that a single vulnerability in that technology affects a large fraction of your vendor ecosystem. The Concentration view groups technologies by name and shows how many vendors use each one, plus how many have the EOL version. Use this view to identify critical infrastructure dependencies and prioritise patch planning when a new CVE emerges.

Filtering technologies

Use the search bar to find specific technologies by name. Filter by category (web server, database, framework, etc.), EOL status, or update availability. Apply multiple filters simultaneously to narrow down to technologies that need action.

Version detection and updates

ChainShield detects the running version of each technology and compares it to the latest available version. An "Update Available" badge indicates a newer version exists. Note that not all technologies have version data — some are only identified by name. Use the vendor detail Technologies tab to see full version history for a specific vendor.

CVE linkage

Each technology shows a CVE count badge indicating how many open CVE findings are linked to that technology. Click a technology row to open the detail modal and see which vendors are affected by each CVE. This helps you understand the blast radius of a single vulnerability.

Discovery sources

Technologies are detected from multiple sources: banner_detection (HTTP/SSH/DNS banner grabbing), http_headers (analysis of HTTP responses), CNAME/SPF records (infrastructure declarations), Shodan/Censys (external service enumeration), and GitHub API (repository metadata). The discovery source is visible in the detail modal and helps you understand how reliable the detection is.

Concentration risk view

Toggle to the Concentration view to see technologies grouped by name with aggregated vendor counts. This view highlights which technologies have the highest vendor concentration and how many vendors are running EOL versions. Use this to identify critical dependencies and plan coordinated remediation across your vendor ecosystem.

What is end-of-life (EOL)?

End-of-life means the vendor no longer releases security patches for that software version or product. Once EOL is reached, all known vulnerabilities in that version remain unfixed forever. Using EOL software is a significant security risk. Vendors should upgrade to a supported version as soon as possible.

Why does concentration risk matter?

If 20 of your 50 vendors use the same web server, a single critical CVE in that web server affects 40% of your vendor ecosystem. Concentration risk amplifies the impact of a single vulnerability. The concentration view helps you identify these dependencies so you can coordinate remediation efforts and plan vendor migrations.

How are technologies linked to vendors?

Each technology record is linked to the vendor where it was detected. When you click a technology row to open the detail modal, you can see all vendors using that technology and any linked CVE findings. This helps you understand the full blast radius of a single vulnerability or EOL situation.

Can I see version history for a technology?

Yes. Go to the vendor detail page, open the Technologies tab, and find the specific technology. The vendor-level view shows version history and per-vendor AI analysis (risk score, concerns, recommended actions). The org-level Technology Inventory page shows current versions across all vendors at a glance.

What does "Update Available" mean?

A newer version of the technology is available. If the current version is not EOL, updating is optional but recommended for access to the latest features and non-critical patches. If the current version is EOL, updating is mandatory.

Worked Example

Responding to a critical CVE in Apache

Scenario: CVE-2024-XXXX is announced affecting Apache HTTP Server versions <2.4.60. Your Technology Inventory shows 12 vendors running Apache, with 5 running EOL versions <2.4.50. 1. Click the Apache row in the Technology Inventory to open the detail modal and see the full list of affected vendors. 2. Sort by version to identify which 5 are EOL and need immediate action vs. which 7 are on newer (but still vulnerable) versions. 3. Check each vendor's detail page to understand the impact: is the Apache server internet-facing or internal? Is it a primary service or secondary? 4. Prioritise vendors running EOL versions - their risk is immediate because they will never receive patches. Create assessment tasks or send remediation requests via the vendor portal. 5. For vendors on non-EOL versions, notify them of the patch availability and establish a remediation timeline based on the CVE severity and your SLAs. 6. Once vendors patch, the CVE findings will be auto-resolved on the next scan. Use the status filter to track progress across all 12 vendors.

Related Pages

VendorsVulnerabilitiesFindings

Template Builder

Create custom vendor assessment questionnaires with drag-and-drop ordering, multiple question types, and live preview.

Question types

Six types are available: short text, long text, yes/no toggle, multiple choice, rating scale, and file upload. Use file upload for evidence collection (e.g. penetration test reports, ISO certificates). Use rating scales for maturity assessments.

Organising with sections

Group related questions into sections (e.g. "Access Control", "Incident Response"). Sections help vendors understand context and make long questionnaires less overwhelming. Drag to reorder sections and questions within them.

Starting from a framework template

Rather than building from scratch, start with one of the built-in templates. Framework templates cover ISM, CPS 234, CPS 230, SOC 2, SOCI Act, NDB, DFAT Sanctions, and Cyber Security Act 2024. Domain templates cover Information Security, Privacy, BCP, Financial Risk, ESG/Modern Slavery, and AI Governance. Clone any template and customise it for your specific needs.

How do I reorder questions?

Drag and drop questions within a section or between sections. The order is preserved when the template is saved and determines the sequence vendors see when completing the questionnaire.

Can I import questions from another template?

Not directly. Clone an existing template to start with its questions, then add, remove, or modify as needed. Or build from scratch using the available question types.

How does question scoring work?

Each question can have a weight (importance) and scoring rubric. Yes/no and multiple choice questions score automatically based on the correct answer. Free-text and file-upload questions require manual review scoring after the vendor submits.

Related Pages

AssessmentsVendorsAssessment Templates

Terms of Service

ChainShield Terms of Service — the legal agreement governing your use of the ChainShield platform, including warranties, liabilities, and acceptable use.

Key points

By using ChainShield, you agree to these terms. We provide the platform as-is. You are responsible for the accuracy of vendor data you enter. Misuse (unauthorised access, scraping, reverse engineering) is prohibited.

Data ownership

You own the data you create in ChainShield (assessments, findings, notes). ChainShield retains a worldwide license to use vendor data in aggregated, anonymised form for analytics and product improvements.

Liability and disclaimers

ChainShield provides risk intelligence based on public sources (OSINT). We do not guarantee the absence of security issues. Use our findings as one input to your risk decisions, not the sole basis. For legal clarification, contact legal@chainshield.com.au.

Related Pages

Privacy PolicyCookie PolicyAccessibility Statement

Threat Intelligence

Per-vendor threat intelligence summary. Shows which threat intelligence sources have fired, the latest observation timestamp, pulse count, and the incident_history score contribution from active indicators.

What the CTI adapters mean

ChainShield aggregates threat intelligence from 8 registered CTI adapters: CISA AIS (authoritative US government indicators - highest weight), AlienVault OTX (open threat exchange pulses), AbuseIPDB (community-reported abuse), Cloudflare Radar (BGP and attack data), and four abuse.ch feeds covering URLhaus, ThreatFox, MalwareBazaar, and SSLBL malware/botnet indicators. A source showing "Active indicators detected" means at least one indicator from that source was observed on your vendor infrastructure within the last 90 days.

incident_history score contribution

The incident_history score contribution shows how much active threat intelligence is adding to the vendor's Cybersecurity domain risk score. A higher score means more or higher-confidence indicators have been detected. This contribution is recalculated whenever a new scan materialises threat-intel findings via the Python scoring engine.

Top indicators table

The top-10 indicators are the highest-confidence threat signals observed in the last 90 days. Indicators are IP addresses, domain names, or ASNs associated with malicious activity. They are shown as text only - do not attempt to visit any indicator values as they may be malicious infrastructure.

How often is threat intelligence refreshed?

Intelligence data is refreshed automatically during each vendor scan cycle. The last-refresh timestamp next to each source shows when indicators were last collected. Tier 1 vendors scanned daily will have more frequent updates than Tier 3 vendors on weekly cycles.

What does "not fired" mean for a source?

"Not fired" means no indicators from that source were observed for this vendor's infrastructure in the last 90 days. This is informational - it does not mean the vendor is safe, only that no signals were received from that specific source in the observation window.

Related Pages

Threat IntelligenceFindingsVendors

Two-Factor Authentication

Verify your identity with a 6-digit code from your authenticator app, or use a recovery code if you no longer have access to the app.

Enter your 6-digit code

Open your authenticator app (Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator, Authy, etc.) and enter the current 6-digit code. The code refreshes every 30 seconds.

Using a recovery code

If you no longer have access to your authenticator app, click "Use a recovery code instead" to enter a saved recovery code. Each recovery code can only be used once.

Lost your authenticator?

If you have lost access to your authenticator app and do not have recovery codes, contact your ChainShield administrator for assistance. They can reset MFA on your account.

Related Pages

Back to Sign InContact Support

Upload Evidence to Questionnaire Answer

Attach supporting evidence (certifications, policies, reports) to a specific questionnaire response. Evidence is pinned to the response and visible to the assessing organisation based on your sharing setting.

How to attach evidence

Upload a file and optionally specify the question key it answers (for example "q14"). The file is attached to the response and will appear inline when the assessing organisation reviews your submission.

Who can see your evidence

Evidence visibility follows your questionnaire response sharing setting. If set to "requesting org only", only the organisation that sent the questionnaire can see the attached files. If set to "all linked orgs", any organisation with your vendor in their portfolio can see the response and its evidence.

How do I attach evidence to a questionnaire answer?

Use the POST /api/portal/questionnaire-responses/{id}/evidence endpoint (or the questionnaire UI if available). Provide the file and optionally a question_key (e.g. "q14") to scope it to a specific question. Evidence is attached to the questionnaire response and visible to the assessing organisation.

Will the orgs scanning me see my evidence?

It depends on your questionnaire response sharing setting. If set to "requesting org only" (the default), only the organisation that sent you the questionnaire can see the attached evidence. If you change the setting to "all linked orgs", any organisation with your company in their vendor portfolio will be able to see both the response and the attached files.

What happens to my evidence if the questionnaire response is deleted?

The evidence files are retained. If the parent questionnaire response is deleted, the files become standalone (orphan) documents and remain accessible to organisations that have your vendor in their portfolio via the normal document visibility rules.

Related Pages

DashboardYour Questionnaires

Vendor Agent Activity

Shows latest-scan execution status for the tracked ChainShield pipeline identities, including the 7 domain agents and supporting utility, review, enrichment, post-processing, and specialist workers. Use this tab to diagnose partial scan coverage, confirm which identities ran, and identify failures or skips.

Agent status chips

Each row shows a status chip for the most recent scan: Completed (green) - agent finished and may have emitted findings. Partial (green) - agent finished but only partially. Running (blue, animated) - agent is currently executing. Failed (red) - agent encountered an error and did not complete. Skipped (amber) - a precondition was not met (e.g. no domain assets found). Budget (amber) - agent was halted because it exceeded its token/cost budget. Rate-limited (amber) - agent was throttled by an external API. No-op (grey) - agent determined there was nothing to analyse. Did not run (grey) - no row exists for this agent in the latest scan.

Reason column

When an agent completes but emits zero findings, a zero-output reason is recorded. Common reasons: "no_issues_observed" (clean scan, no problems found), "precondition_not_met" (prerequisite data was missing), "coverage_gap" (agent could not reach the target). The reason helps distinguish a genuinely clean vendor from a scan data gap.

Duration and tool calls

Duration shows how long the agent ran in seconds. Tool calls shows how many tool invocations the agent made (e.g. web fetches, database lookups). Very short durations with zero tool calls often indicate the agent was skipped or hit a precondition early. Long durations with many tool calls indicate a thorough analysis pass.

Latest scan scope

The panel always shows the most recent scan only. To compare agent coverage across scans, use the Scan Jobs tab (superusers only). The scan timestamp at the top of the panel shows when the latest scan started.

What do the agent status chips mean?

Completed: the agent finished and results are available. Partial: the agent finished but only processed part of the data. Running: the agent is currently active. Failed: the agent errored out - check the Scan Jobs tab for the error message. Skipped (Precondition Miss): a prerequisite was not met (e.g. no confirmed domain assets to analyse). Budget: the agent used its full AI token budget and stopped. Rate-limited: an external API blocked the agent temporarily. No-op: the agent ran but found nothing to process. Did not run: the scan completed without triggering this agent.

Why does an agent show "Did not run" instead of "Completed"?

"Did not run" means no `agent_runs` record exists for that tracked identity in the latest scan. This can happen if the scan was stopped early, if the vendor has no prerequisite assets (preventing domain agents from triggering), or if a new scan has not yet started. Trigger a new scan to refresh pipeline coverage.

How do I fix a "Failed" agent?

Use the Scan Jobs tab (visible to super users) to see the agent error message and re-run specific agents. Common fixes: for rate-limited agents, wait and retry; for budget-exhausted agents, check if the vendor has an unusually large asset surface; for precondition misses, confirm the vendor has domain assets in the Assets tab.

Related Pages

Scan JobsAgent StateVendor Detail

Vendor Agent Context

Per-vendor instructions and corrections that guide AI agent behaviour during analysis. Context entries are created automatically from finding rejections and manually by analysts.

How agent context works

When an agent analyses this vendor, it reads all active context entries before making decisions. Rejection entries (created automatically when you reject a finding with notes) teach the agent not to repeat false positives. Manual notes and instructions provide domain-specific guidance.

Context types

Rejection: auto-created when findings are rejected with notes. Correction: manual fix to agent behaviour. Note: informational context for the agent. Instruction: direct command to the agent (e.g. "always check this vendor's secondary domain").

Managing entries

Toggle entries active/inactive to control whether agents see them. Inactive entries are preserved for history but ignored during analysis. Only admins and owners can create or modify entries.

Will rejecting a finding automatically teach the agent?

Yes. When you reject a finding with notes, a context entry is created for that vendor and agent. The next time the agent runs, it will see the rejection reason and avoid repeating the same false positive.

Can I add context for a specific control?

Yes. When creating a manual context entry, you can optionally specify a control ID to scope the context to a particular risk control area.

Related Pages

Agent Rules (Global)Finding Review QueueVendor Detail

Vendor Assets

All digital assets discovered for this vendor: domains, subdomains, IP addresses, certificates, email servers, and physical locations. Assets form the attack surface that ChainShield monitors.

Asset pagination and filtering

For vendors with large asset inventories (1000+ assets), the asset tab uses server-side pagination to load results efficiently. By default, 100 assets per page are shown. Use the type filter dropdown to narrow results by asset type (DOMAIN, SUBDOMAIN, IP_ADDRESS, PHYSICAL_LOCATION, etc.) - the dropdown shows all available types for the vendor regardless of which page you're on. Type filtering is server-side, so changing the filter returns results from across the entire asset inventory, not just the current page. Change the sort order (asset type or value) or page number to navigate through results. Total asset count is displayed above the pagination controls.

Asset lifecycle states

Assets move through lifecycle states: Active (monitored), Stale (not seen recently), Retired (decommissioned), and Resolved (issue addressed). Retiring or resolving assets auto-closes linked findings and excludes them from risk scoring.

Brand asset management

BRAND assets appear at the top of the list. Edit incorrect brand names, dismiss irrelevant brands (excluding them from scoring), or add new brands manually. Dismissals are org-scoped and do not affect other organisations sharing this vendor.

TLS certificate details

Click any certificate asset to see subject, issuer, validity period, and warning badges for upcoming expiry. Only expired certificates generate a finding in the Cybersecurity domain (CD-4634) - a near-expiry cert is treated as routine ops, not vendor risk.

Why geographic concentration is monitored

The Asset Geographic Concentration map (in the "(?)" tooltip on its header) explains why clustering assets or offices in one region matters: it creates a single point of failure if that region has an outage, natural disaster, or regulatory disruption. This is informational context relevant to APRA CPS 230 (operational resilience) and the SOCI Act (critical infrastructure) for organisations subject to those regimes — it is not a warning that applies to every org, and CD-3969 removed the old unconditional banner that implied otherwise.

How are assets discovered?

ChainShield uses OSINT-based scanning (DNS enumeration, certificate transparency logs, WHOIS, Shodan, Censys) to automatically discover assets linked to the vendor's primary domain. AI agents then verify and classify them.

What does "auto-confirm" do?

Auto-confirm rules automatically set newly discovered assets to confirmed status based on pattern matching (e.g., *.example.com). Rules can be set per-vendor, per-organisation, or globally (superuser only). Vendor rules take precedence over org rules, which take precedence over global rules. This reduces manual confirmation overhead for vendors with large, well-known infrastructure.

How do I find a specific asset type when there are thousands of assets?

Use the asset type filter dropdown (e.g., DOMAIN, IP_ADDRESS, PHYSICAL_LOCATION) to show only that type. The filter searches across all assets for the vendor, not just the current page. You can also sort by asset type or value to group similar assets together. If you know the asset value (e.g., a domain name), use the search bar on the global Assets page to search across all vendors.

Related Pages

Global AssetsFindingsGraph

Vendor Business Case

Document the business justification for engaging this vendor. Covers needs analysis, make vs buy decision, preliminary risk assessment, budget, stakeholders, and regulatory considerations.

When to create a business case

Create a business case during the vendor onboarding or prospect stage. Document the rationale before committing to the engagement so the decision is auditable and can be reviewed during periodic assessments.

Who can edit

Only organisation administrators and managers can create or edit business cases. Other users see a read-only view of the documented business case.

Regulatory considerations

Use the Regulatory Considerations field to note applicable frameworks (CPS 230, CPS 234, SOCI, Privacy Act) and any specific obligations that affect the vendor engagement. This helps auditors understand the compliance context of the decision.

Is the business case shared across organisations?

No. Each organisation has its own business case for the same vendor. This reflects that different organisations may engage the same vendor for different reasons with different risk appetites.

Does the business case affect the risk score?

Not directly. The business case is a planning and governance document. Risk scoring is driven by scan findings, certifications, and the risk context settings (business criticality, data sensitivity, regulatory designations) on the vendor relationship.

Related Pages

Exit PlanContractsCompliance

Vendor Certifications

Security and compliance certifications held by this vendor. Certifications like ISO 27001, SOC 2, and IRAP provide assurance that the vendor meets recognised security standards.

Certification statuses

Certifications have three statuses: Unverified (mentioned on vendor website but not confirmed), Evidence Found (supporting documentation discovered by AI), and Verified (manually confirmed by an administrator with uploaded evidence).

Verify and upload evidence

Click a certification to verify it and upload supporting documents (e.g., certificate PDFs, audit reports). Verified certifications provide stronger evidence for compliance reporting and can positively affect the Compliance & Regulatory domain score.

Australian certifications to look for

For APRA-regulated entities, prioritise: ISO 27001 (information security management), SOC 2 Type II (service organisation controls), IRAP (Australian government security assessment), and ISO 22301 (business continuity). These directly address CPS 234 and CPS 230 requirements.

Do certifications reduce the vendor's risk score?

Yes. Verified certifications positively influence the Compliance & Regulatory domain score. For example, a verified ISO 27001 certification indicates the vendor has a formal ISMS, which partially mitigates governance-related findings.

How does ChainShield discover certifications?

AI agents scan the vendor's website, trust centre, and security pages for certification mentions. Logos, badge images, and text references to ISO, SOC, IRAP, PCI DSS, and other standards are detected and recorded.

Related Pages

ComplianceVendor DetailControls

Vendor Comparison

Side-by-side comparison of two or more vendors across risk scores, findings, compliance posture, certifications, and assessment results.

What you can compare

Compare vendors across: composite risk score, 7-domain scores, finding counts by severity, compliance coverage per framework, certifications held, assessment scores, health score, and key metadata. This helps you evaluate alternatives or benchmark similar vendors.

Selecting vendors to compare

Select 2-4 vendors from the comparison picker. Vendors are shown side-by-side with colour-coded metrics so differences are immediately visible. Lower risk scores and higher compliance coverage are highlighted in green.

Using comparison for procurement

When evaluating new vendors, compare shortlisted candidates to see which has the strongest security posture. Share the comparison as a PDF export with your procurement team to support vendor selection decisions.

Identifying risk gaps between vendors

The domain-level breakdown shows where each vendor is strongest and weakest. For example, Vendor A might score well on Cybersecurity but poorly on Operational Resilience, while Vendor B shows the opposite pattern. Use this to understand complementary risks.

Performance: fast comparison loads

Comparison data loads optimally via database aggregation, delivering results in under 100 milliseconds even for large vendor portfolios. Multi-vendor comparisons no longer require client-side aggregation of thousands of rows.

How many vendors can I compare at once?

You can compare 2 to 4 vendors simultaneously. For broader portfolio analysis, use the Reports page which provides aggregate views across all vendors.

Can I export the comparison?

Yes. Export as PDF for sharing with stakeholders or procurement teams. The export includes all comparison metrics, charts, and a summary of key differences.

Are comparison results affected by org context?

Yes. Risk scores shown in the comparison reflect your organisation's specific context multipliers (business criticality, data sensitivity, regulatory designations). The same vendor may show different scores for different organisations.

Related Pages

VendorsReportsCompliance

Vendor Compliance

Compliance posture for this specific vendor across configured Australian regulatory frameworks. See control gaps, evidence, and export for audit preparation.

Framework coverage

Each framework shows coverage percentage based on how many mapped controls have passing status. 100% means no active findings affect that framework's controls for this vendor.

Control gap drill-down

Click any framework to see specific controls with gaps. Each gap links to the findings causing it. Use this to build targeted remediation plans aligned to regulatory obligations.

Regulatory scope

The frameworks shown are determined by this vendor's regulatory_scope setting (set on the vendor detail page). This may differ from your organisation's default frameworks if per-vendor overrides are configured.

Design vs Operating effectiveness badges (US-GOV-004)

Each control row shows two effectiveness badges: Design (D) - is the control correctly configured? - and Operating (O) - is it consistently working over time? Green = Effective, Yellow = Partially Effective, Red = Ineffective, Grey = Not Assessed. A filled dot means the rating was set manually; a hollow ring means it was computed automatically from finding history. Admin and manager users can click "Override" to set a manual rating with evidence notes and schedule a next review date.

Why does this vendor show different frameworks than my organisation default?

Each vendor can have a per-vendor regulatory scope override. This lets you apply stricter compliance requirements to specific vendors (e.g., CPS 230 Material Service Providers) without affecting your organisation-wide defaults.

How do I export compliance evidence for this vendor?

Export as CSV or PDF from this page. The export includes framework coverage percentages, control-level gap detail, and the specific findings mapped to each control. Useful for CPS 234 and CPS 230 audit preparation.

What is the difference between this and the main Compliance page?

This page shows compliance for a single vendor. The main Compliance page aggregates compliance posture across all vendors in your portfolio. Use both for different levels of reporting.

What is the difference between Design and Operating effectiveness?

Design Effectiveness asks: "Does the vendor have the right control in place?" - assessed from the latest scan snapshot. If the control's owning agent found no findings for this vendor in the last scan, the control is rated Effective by design. Operating Effectiveness asks: "Is the control working consistently over time?" - assessed from 90 days of finding history. A control is Effective (operating) if there have been zero OPEN findings for 90+ days, Partially Effective if only LOW/INFO findings exist or issues were remediated within 30 days, and Ineffective if any HIGH/CRITICAL finding has been open for 30+ days or a finding has recurred (resolved then re-opened within 90 days).

How are effectiveness ratings calculated automatically?

A daily background process re-evaluates all active vendor-org pairs with scan data from the last 90 days. It checks per-organisation finding status (your RESOLVED/ACCEPTED findings do not count against you, even if another organisation still has them open). The automated rating is always overridable by an assessor with a manual rating - once overridden, the automated process will not update that control until the manual rating is explicitly cleared.

Related Pages

Compliance DashboardVendor DetailControls

Vendor Compliance

Compliance posture for this vendor across Australian regulatory frameworks. See which controls have gaps, review evidence, and export for audit preparation.

Framework coverage percentage

Each framework shows coverage based on how many mapped controls have passing status. 100% means no active findings affect that framework's controls. Focus remediation on frameworks with the lowest coverage, especially those relevant to your regulatory obligations.

Per-vendor regulatory scope

The frameworks shown are determined by this vendor's regulatory_scope setting, which may differ from your organisation's default. Override the scope for specific vendors — e.g., apply CPS 230 requirements only to material service providers.

Export for audit

Export compliance evidence as CSV or PDF. The export includes framework coverage percentages, control-level gap detail, and the specific findings mapped to each control. Useful for CPS 234 annual compliance reporting and CPS 230 board reports.

Which Australian frameworks does ChainShield support?

ChainShield maps findings to: ASD Information Security Manual (ISM), APRA CPS 234 (Information Security), APRA CPS 230 (Operational Risk Management), SOCI Act (Critical Infrastructure), Notifiable Data Breaches (NDB), Privacy Act, DFAT Sanctions, Cyber Security Act 2024, and VAISS (Voluntary AI Safety Standard).

How are findings mapped to regulatory controls?

Each finding maps to one of 30 active risk controls. Controls are grouped into 7 scoring domains that deterministically link to specific controls within each regulatory framework. AI agents assign the appropriate risk control directly when creating findings.

Related Pages

Compliance DashboardControlsFindings

Vendor Contacts

Manage vendor portal user accounts. Invite vendor contacts to give them direct access to their security posture, findings, and assessments on ChainShield.

Inviting a vendor contact

Click "Invite Contact" to send an email invitation. The vendor contact will receive a magic link to create a ChainShield account. Once accepted, they can access the vendor portal to view findings, respond to assessments, and manage their security posture.

Vendor user roles

Admin: full access, can invite responders/viewers. Responder: can work on assigned assessments and findings. Viewer: read-only access. The first admin invited by an org automatically becomes the Vendor Owner with elevated privileges.

Invitation expiry

Invitations expire after 7 days. If a contact misses the window, deactivate the expired invitation and send a new one.

Coexistence with token-gated access

Token-gated vendor portal access (via assessment links) continues to work alongside vendor user accounts. Use token-gated access for lightweight one-off assessments; use vendor accounts for ongoing relationships with persistent identity.

What happens when I invite a vendor contact?

The contact receives an email with a magic link. They click it, create a ChainShield account (or sign in with an existing one), and are automatically linked to the vendor. They can then access the vendor portal.

Can vendor contacts see our internal risk narratives?

No. Vendor portal users can only see findings, assessments, and data scoped to their vendor. Internal org notes, risk narratives marked internal-only, and other org data are not visible.

How do I revoke a vendor contact's access?

Click the deactivate icon next to the user in the Contacts tab. This immediately revokes their portal access. You cannot deactivate the Vendor Owner - contact support if needed.

Related Pages

Vendor DetailAssessments

Vendor Contacts

Add, manage, and review contacts for this vendor. Manually added contacts are visible only to your organisation (org-private). Contacts added by the vendor via their portal or discovered by the scan pipeline are publicly visible to all linked organisations. Use Confirm and Reject to curate pipeline-discovered candidates.

Add a contact

Click "Add contact" to create an org-private contact (e.g. your primary CISO POC at this vendor). Org-private contacts are visible only to your organisation - other orgs cannot see them. A welcome email is sent to the contact if an email address is provided.

Org vs Public contacts

Contacts labelled "Org" are private to your organisation. Contacts labelled "Public" (or with no badge) were added by the vendor themselves or discovered by the pipeline and are visible to all orgs monitoring this vendor.

Confidence badge

High (green) means the pipeline found the contact on an authoritative source such as security.txt. Low (red) means it was inferred from a team page or WHOIS field and may be incorrect.

Confirm vs Reject

Confirmed contacts move to the Confirmed section and become available for product-contact assignment. Rejected contacts are soft-deleted so the pipeline does not re-suggest them. You can only confirm or reject discovery-sourced contacts.

Portal visibility

Vendor portal users can also add and manage contacts from their own portal Contacts page. Those contacts are globally visible. Once a contact is confirmed by either side it is considered authoritative.

Why is my contact showing as Low confidence?

Low confidence (red) means the pipeline extracted the contact from a generic source such as a team page or LinkedIn-style listing, rather than a structured source like security.txt. Confirm it manually if you know the person is accurate, or reject it to remove it from suggestions.

Can I add contacts manually?

Yes. Click "Add contact" in the Contacts section of the vendor profile to create a manually-added org-private contact. These are visible only to your organisation. The vendor can also add publicly-visible contacts through their own portal.

Why does org B not see the contact I added?

Contacts you add from the org side are org-private by design: they are only visible to your organisation. If you need a contact to be visible to all orgs, the vendor should add it through their vendor portal (those contacts are always public).

Related Pages

VendorsPortal contacts

Vendor Contracts

Track active vendor agreements, renewal dates, contract values, and clause compliance. Contracts expiring within 90 days trigger dashboard alerts and webhook notifications.

Clause compliance checklist

Each contract includes a 14-category clause compliance checklist derived from Australian regulatory requirements (CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, NDB, SOCI, ISM). Track whether clauses for data breach notification, audit rights, sub-contracting, and business continuity are present.

Expiry monitoring

Contracts approaching expiry trigger alerts at three intervals: informational at 90 days, warning at 60 days, and critical at 30 days. These appear on the dashboard "Contracts Expiring" card and are sent via configured webhooks.

Linking contracts to regulatory obligations

For CPS 230 Material Service Providers, ensure contracts include: service descriptions, performance targets, audit rights, business continuity requirements, and exit provisions (paras 47–56). Use the clause checklist to verify coverage and flag gaps for renegotiation.

Why no contracts is a risk gap

Vendors with no contract records cannot be checked for clause compliance against CPS 230 paragraph 47 requirements (service descriptions, performance targets, audit rights, BCP, exit provisions). ChainShield cannot raise a missing-clause finding without a contract record to analyse. Add at least one active contract per vendor to enable clause compliance checking and renewal tracking.

What happens when a contract expires?

Expired contracts are flagged on the dashboard and in the vendor detail view. The vendor's health score (Performance tab) is reduced via the "contract currency" metric (10% weight). Renew or archive the contract to update the status.

Can I upload the full contract document?

Yes. Attach contract PDFs or documents to the contract record. These are stored securely and accessible to organisation administrators for audit reference. Once uploaded, click "Analyse Contract" to run AI-powered clause analysis.

How does contract AI analysis work?

Click "Analyse Contract" on any contract with an attached document. ChainShield processes the document with its internal AI models (within ChainShield infrastructure — no third-party AI provider receives the document), checking it against the 14 mandatory clause categories (data breach notification, audit rights, sub-processor controls, etc.) and returns a clause-by-clause assessment with confidence scores and verbatim excerpts. Missing critical or high-severity clauses automatically create compliance findings under policy_governance (Policy & Governance) so they appear in your risk dashboard. AI-populated clauses show a badge indicating they need human verification. Large documents over 100,000 characters are truncated - this is noted in the analysis result.

Related Pages

Vendor DetailComplianceExit Plan

Vendor Dashboard (Token)

View your vendor risk overview via token access. See your risk score, findings summary, and assessment progress without creating a ChainShield account.

Token-based access

This is the legacy token-based dashboard entry point. If you have been invited to accept the portal, you can upgrade to a persistent session by following the acceptance link. The token-based access provides the same view as an authenticated session.

What you can do here

Review your risk score and domain breakdown, view outstanding findings with remediation guidance, complete assessment questionnaires, and upload supporting documents (certifications, SBOMs, audit reports).

Need help?

For questions about your findings or remediation steps, contact the organisation that invited you. For technical issues, contact support@chainshield.com.au.

Assessor organisation indicator

The top bar of this page shows the name of the organisation assessing your vendor risk. This trust indicator helps you verify you are communicating with the correct organisation.

Related Pages

View FindingsYour Profile

Vendor Detail

Deep-dive into a single vendor’s risk profile. View their assets, findings, risk scores, certifications, products, compliance posture, and AI-generated risk analysis - all in one place.

Overview tab

The Overview tab shows the vendor’s headline risk score, tier, lifecycle stage, and key metadata (domain, industry, physical locations). The risk domain radar chart visualises scores across all 7 ChainShield domains. Use the context settings (business criticality, data sensitivity, regulatory designations) to tailor the risk calculation to your specific relationship with this vendor.

Unscanned vendors and guided onboarding

When a vendor is first added and has never been scanned, some tabs are hidden to reduce cognitive overload: Findings, Vulnerabilities, Health, and Intelligence tabs are hidden because they would only show empty states. The Overview, Risk, Assets, Products, Technologies, Profile, and Governance tabs remain visible so you can add brand assets and trigger the first scan. The Risk tab is kept because it shows editable compliance fields useful even before a scan. Once a scan completes successfully (even if it finds zero issues), all tabs become visible. Superusers see a "Run First Scan" button in the tab bar for unscanned vendors; organisation users see no scan button.

Assets tab

Lists all digital assets discovered for this vendor: domains, subdomains, IP addresses, certificates, physical locations, and repositories. Assets start as unconfirmed and must be confirmed to activate risk scoring. Click any asset to see detailed metadata including TLS certificate info (subject, issuer, expiry with warning badges), geolocation, and threat intelligence. Superusers and MSP admins can confirm, reject, or configure auto-confirm rules. Organisation users have read-only access.

Brand asset management

The Brand Assets section at the top of the Assets tab shows BRAND assets associated with this vendor. Organisation admins and above can edit incorrect brand names, dismiss irrelevant brands (excluding them from risk scoring), or add new brands manually. Dismissed brands are org-scoped - dismissing a brand for your organisation does not affect other organisations. All changes are logged for audit purposes.

Findings tab

Security issues discovered by the scan pipeline for this vendor. Each finding has a severity (CRITICAL, HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW), compliance mapping, and recommended remediation. Use the status workflow (OPEN → IN_PROGRESS → PENDING_REVIEW → RESOLVED) to track triage progress.

Risk tab and score breakdown

The Risk tab shows the full score breakdown across 7 domains and 30 controls. The composite score (0–100) is a weighted average factoring in finding severity, business criticality, data sensitivity, and regulatory context. A lower score is better. Scores update automatically after each scan. Toggle between radar and bar chart views for different perspectives on domain-level risk.

Certifications tab

Shows security certifications discovered on the vendor’s website (ISO 27001, SOC 2, IRAP, etc.). Certifications have three statuses: Unverified, Evidence Found, and Verified. Superusers can manually add, edit, or verify certifications and upload supporting documents.

Products tab

Products and services the vendor offers, discovered by AI agents. Software/SaaS products with a CPE (Common Platform Enumeration — unique software identifier) are automatically linked to known CVE vulnerabilities. Unverified products can be verified (approved as real vendor products) or rejected by administrators. Use the "We use this" / "Hide" toggles to select which products your organisation uses. Hidden products are excluded from risk scoring. Service-based products (consulting, manufacturing) have no CPE or version tracking. The vendor list page shows "Using X of Y products" for each vendor.

Compliance tab

Maps the vendor’s findings to Australian regulatory frameworks (CPS 234, Essential Eight, CPS 230) with per-control breakdown. Each framework shows its controls with a status badge: PASS (all findings resolved), OPEN (active findings exist), or GAP (control never assessed). Expand any control to see its linked findings with severity and status. The compliance percentage excludes GAP controls from the denominator — it measures PASS / (PASS + OPEN). GAP controls highlight areas that need initial assessment.

Analyst Review tab

Risk narrative, primary concerns, and recommended actions based on all scan data. The analysis considers the vendor’s full asset inventory, finding history, certifications, and your organisation’s regulatory context. The confidence score indicates how much data was available to work with — higher confidence means more complete scanning coverage.

Evidence sources for findings

ChainShield gathers evidence from multiple sources: active OSINT scanning (bbot for infrastructure), specialized probes (Mozilla Observatory and Internet.nl for web-security grading, Spamhaus/SORBS/SpamRats for mail blocklists, PhishTank and OpenPhish for phishing listings), certifications (ISO 27001, SOC 2, FedRAMP, Cyber Essentials), public databases (HackerOne and Bugcrowd for active bug-bounty programs, UK and California modern slavery registers), and threat intelligence feeds (breach databases, news extraction, regulatory enforcement feeds). Each evidence source feeds specific risk controls. For example, a phishing listing appearing in PhishTank triggers findings under monitoring_detection (Monitoring, Detection & Cyber Response) and reputational risk. A mail server appearing on Spamhaus triggers an identity_access (Identity, Access & Secrets Management) finding. Evidence freshness varies: regulatory registers are checked quarterly, phishing feeds updated daily, and TLS certificates checked weekly.

Vendor lifecycle stages

Each vendor has a lifecycle stage that tracks its status in your vendor management process. The stages are: Prospect (being evaluated), Onboarding (due diligence in progress), Active (approved and monitored), Under Review (periodic review or risk escalation), Offboarding (transitioning out), and Archived (no longer in use). Change the stage using the "Stage" dropdown in the vendor header. Lifecycle stage transitions are logged with timestamps for audit purposes. Vendors in Onboarding or Under Review automatically show a compliance context banner highlighting the regulatory frameworks they must be assessed against.

Attack surface graph

The Graph tab visualises asset relationships as an interactive force-directed network diagram. Nodes represent discovered assets (domains, subdomains, IPs, certificates, emails) colour-coded by type and sized by risk score -- higher risk assets appear larger. Edges show relationships like SUBDOMAIN_OF, RESOLVES_TO, and SERVES. Drag any node to reposition it; the graph physics will settle around the new position. Click any node to see its details including risk score and connection count. Use the zoom controls or fullscreen mode to explore complex asset hierarchies. High-risk nodes (60+) display a dashed halo to draw attention.

Attack Surface Graph filtering

Click legend items to filter by asset type. Use the risk level dropdown to show only nodes above a threshold (Critical 80+, High 60+, Medium 30+, Low <30). Toggle 'Hide inactive' to remove RETIRED/RESOLVED assets from the view. Filters combine -- e.g. show only high-risk IPs by hiding other types and selecting "High (60+)".

Triggering a re-scan

Use the "Run Scan" button on the vendor detail page to trigger an on-demand scan. There is a single scan action — it always queues the full pipeline (discovery, enrichment, CVE correlation, AI domain analysis, compliance mapping), not a selectable Quick/Enrich/Full/Agent mode. Results typically appear within 5–10 minutes.

Performance tab and health score

The Performance tab shows a 0–100 health score derived from 8 weighted metrics: remediation velocity (25%), assessment responsiveness (15%), incident frequency (15%), risk trend (15%), contract currency (10%), scan freshness (10%), exit plan readiness (5%), and BCP readiness (5%). Metrics without underlying data show "Not measured" (N/A) and are excluded from the composite score — the remaining metrics are proportionally reweighted so weights still sum to 100%. A "X/8 metrics measured" indicator shows data completeness. If fewer than 3 metrics have data, the rating shows "Insufficient Data" instead of Healthy/Needs Attention/etc. Ratings for 3+ metrics: Healthy (75+), Needs Attention (50–74), At Risk (25–49), Critical (<25). Action items at the bottom highlight specific improvements needed.

Monitoring paused (superuser kill-switch)

Superusers can pause monitoring for a vendor from the Scan Cadence panel on the Health tab — a global kill-switch that stops all future scan dispatch for that vendor across every organisation that tracks it, without deleting any existing data. Pausing requires confirmation because it is a platform-wide action, not per-organisation. In-flight scans finish normally; risk scores freeze at their last computed value until monitoring is resumed. A "Paused" badge appears on the vendor list so organisation users can see why a vendor has stopped receiving fresh data. Use the "Monitoring paused" filter on the vendor list to find every paused vendor at once. Typical reasons to pause: a vendor under legal hold, a decommissioned relationship pending formal offboarding, or a scan target causing upstream issues.

Platform cadence override (superuser)

Superusers can also set a platform-wide discovery cadence override for a vendor from the same Scan Cadence panel — separate from pausing monitoring. Enter a value from 1 to 365 days and click Save to force this vendor to be re-scanned at least that often, or click Clear to remove it. This is a global (not per-organisation) setting, mirroring the monitoring kill-switch’s scope: a shared vendor gets the same override for every organisation that tracks it. If a legacy per-organisation override also exists for this vendor, whichever value is shorter (more aggressive) wins — the panel always shows a "Platform override: N days" badge and the actual effective cadence the scan scheduler will use, so what you see here matches what will really happen.

Discovered Pages (Resources)

The Discovered Pages section on the Overview tab shows web pages automatically found during scans: privacy policy, cookie policy, terms of service, trust centre, security page, about page, and certifications page. Each link opens the actual page so you can review the vendor’s public-facing policies. The "Verified" timestamp shows when the page was last confirmed accessible. Resource discovery combines fast deterministic strategies (well-known paths, DNS records) with an optional LLM agent that crawls the site and searches for hard-to-find pages. Pending URLs (low confidence) are marked for manual review before being used by AI agents (US-PIPE-767, US-PIPE-822).

Notes & Context

The Notes & Context section on the Overview tab has two layers. Analyst Notes are platform-wide notes visible across all organisations (editable by superadmins only) and accept plain text only (dangerous link schemes like javascript:, data:, vbscript:, and file: are rejected). Organisation Notes are private to your org and editable by admins and owners — use these for internal context like contract renewal dates, risk acceptance decisions, or stakeholder contacts. Neither set of notes is visible to vendor portal users.

Finding source URLs

Findings created by AI agents now include "Source Pages" — the specific web pages the agent crawled to produce that finding. This lets you verify the evidence by clicking through to the exact page the agent analysed. Source URLs appear below the Evidence section in the finding detail panel.

Risk context configuration

Set Business Criticality (how important this vendor is to your operations), Data Sensitivity (what data they handle), and regulatory designations (CPS 230 Material Service Provider, SOCI Critical Infrastructure) to ensure the risk score accurately reflects your relationship. These settings amplify or dampen control-level scores.

CPS 230 compliance fields

The Compliance & Governance section on the vendor detail page includes editable fields for APRA CPS 230 compliance tracking. Resilience Review Date records when the vendor's operational resilience was last formally assessed (required at least annually for material service providers). PCI DSS Attestation Date tracks the vendor's latest PCI DSS compliance attestation. Material Service Provider designates the vendor as one whose disruption would materially impact your operations — this triggers additional CPS 230 obligations and amplifies the risk score. Critical Infrastructure marks the vendor as a critical infrastructure asset under the SOCI Act, triggering enhanced reporting and risk monitoring requirements.

Fourth-party (sub-contractor) registry

The 4th Parties tab on the vendor detail page tracks sub-contractors and fourth-party dependencies per APRA CPS 230 paragraphs 49-52. Add each fourth party with their service category, data access level, geographic location, and consent status. Mark material fourth parties to flag them for regulatory reporting. When the same fourth party appears across multiple vendors, it shows up as a concentration risk on the Compliance dashboard. Single points of failure (fourth parties used by more than 50% of your critical vendors) are highlighted with warnings.

BCP Testing tab (CPS 230)

The BCP Testing tab tracks business continuity plan test history for this vendor. Record each BCP/DR exercise with its type (Tabletop, Simulation, Full Exercise, Component), result (Pass, Partial, Fail), and Recovery Time/Point Objective targets vs achieved values. RTO/RPO bars are colour-coded green when objectives are met and red when missed. The next test due date shows an overdue warning when past due. The latest BCP test result feeds into the vendor health score (5% weight) and replaces the hardcoded "Not assessed" in the CPS 230 Material Service Provider Register export. Schedule tests at least annually for material service providers.

Exit Plan tab (CPS 230)

The Exit Plan tab documents your exit strategy for this vendor as required by CPS 230 paras 54–56. It covers transition timelines, data return/deletion procedures, knowledge transfer plans, step-in rights, and test history. The Exit Readiness Score (0–100%) shows how prepared you are: factors include whether the plan is active (20%), alternative vendors identified (15%), data deletion documented (15%), knowledge transfer planned (15%), step-in rights documented (10%), plan tested within 12 months (15%), and contract exit clauses present (10%). Material service providers without an ACTIVE exit plan are flagged in the MSP Register export. Test your exit plan annually and update it whenever the vendor relationship changes materially.

Tab ordering is persona-driven

The vendor detail tab bar arranges tabs by priority based on your role. Organisation users see compliance-critical tabs first: Overview, Risk, Findings, then Governance at position 4 so it is always visible on tablet without tapping "More". MSP users see Overview, Findings, Risk, Assets first because their primary task is remediation triage. Super users see Overview, Assets, Findings first to optimise for scan pipeline review. On mobile screens (under 640px) only the first 3 tabs appear inline; on tablet (640-1023px) the first 5 appear inline; on desktop all tabs are visible. If you navigate to a tab that is in the "More" overflow, it is automatically promoted into the last inline slot so it stays accessible while you work.

Self-assessment is private

The Self-Assessment tab and all its sub-tabs (Form, History, Remediations) are visible only to your organisation. Vendors cannot see this tab - it is enforced at the database level and verified by automated CI tests on every deploy. Super-users can view self-assessment data across organisations in read-only mode without an active org context.

Enrichment panels (Profile tab)

The Profile tab's Enrichment section shows supplementary, periodically-refreshed data: Company Intelligence (legal entity identity and a 0-100 confidence score that the vendor's stated name matches registry records), Financial Health (credit rating/score and an automated public-record summary), Sanctions & Compliance (denied-party list screening - CLEAR, POTENTIAL MATCH, or NOT CHECKED), and Domain Intelligence (WHOIS/RDAP registrar, registration date, and expiry, with risk signals for young or soon-to-expire domains). Each block has a (?) tooltip explaining its source and how to read it. A legacy "Financial Risk Score" number was retired from this panel (CD-3966) because its underlying column has no active writer and its 0-100 colour scale did not match the stale values it held - the authoritative financial contribution to a vendor's risk score is always the Financial & Supply Chain domain on the Risk tab, not this panel.

How is the composite risk score calculated?

The composite score (0-100) is built from three levels: (1) Each finding gets a risk score (0-100) based on severity, exploitation likelihood, and context factors. (2) Findings are aggregated per control using a worst-finding-drives model: the most severe finding contributes 70% of the control score, additional findings add diminishing returns at 30%. (3) Controls aggregate into 7 domains weighted by importance: Cybersecurity (40%), Operational Resilience (20%), Compliance & Regulatory (15%), Privacy & Data Protection (10%), Financial & Supply Chain (5%), Reputational (5%), Geopolitical & Sovereign (5%). Org-context multipliers (business criticality, data sensitivity, material service provider, critical infrastructure) amplify or dampen control scores.

What happens when a superuser pauses monitoring for a vendor?

Pausing monitoring flips a global (platform-wide, not per-organisation) kill-switch that stops all future scan dispatch for that vendor — no domain agent, enrichment worker, or scheduled rescan will run for it until a superuser resumes monitoring. Any scan already in progress finishes normally; it is not interrupted. Risk scores and findings are not deleted — they freeze at their last computed value, so the vendor still shows its most recent risk posture, just without new data arriving. A "Paused" badge appears on the vendor list (filterable via the "Monitoring paused" toggle) so every organisation tracking that vendor can see why it has stopped updating. Only superusers can pause or resume monitoring; the action requires confirmation and is fully audit-logged (who, when, and the vendor affected).

What does the platform cadence override do, and who can set it?

It lets a superuser force one vendor to be re-scanned more often than the platform default, without changing settings for any other vendor. Set it from the Scan Cadence panel on the vendor's Health tab (1-365 days); clear it to fall back to the default. It is vendor-global — the same value applies for every organisation that tracks this vendor, since a shared vendor cannot have conflicting scan cadences per organisation. It is honoured alongside an older, legacy per-organisation override some vendors already carry: the scan scheduler always uses whichever of the two is shorter (more aggressive). Only system_owner and system_admin roles can change it; the write is also enforced at the database level, so no other role or direct API call can bypass the check.

What do the tabs on the vendor detail page show?

Overview: headline metrics and metadata. Risk: 7-domain score breakdown with radar/bar chart. Findings: security issues from scans. Assets: discovered digital infrastructure. Technologies: detected software stack. Products: vendor offerings with CPE/CVE linking. Certifications: ISO 27001, SOC 2, IRAP, etc. Contracts: active agreements with clause compliance. 4th Parties: sub-contractors per CPS 230. Performance: health score from 8 metrics. BCP: business continuity test history. Exit Plan: transition readiness per CPS 230. Business Case: vendor engagement justification and planning.

How do I change a vendor's tier or lifecycle stage?

Use the "Stage" dropdown in the vendor header to change lifecycle stage (Prospect, Onboarding, Active, Under Review, Offboarding, Archived). Tier is set via the organisation_vendors junction - update it in the vendor context settings or via the admin vendor tiers page. Both changes are audit-logged.

What is the Contracts tab for?

The Contracts tab tracks active vendor agreements. Each contract records type, start/end dates, value, renewal terms, and a 14-category clause compliance checklist derived from Australian regulatory requirements (CPS 234, CPS 230, Privacy Act, NDB, SOCI, ISM). Contracts expiring within 90 days trigger dashboard alerts and webhook notifications at 90-day (info), 60-day (warning), and 30-day (critical) intervals.

How do I set risk context for this vendor?

Open the Risk Context section (Overview tab or dedicated panel). Set Business Criticality (how important this vendor is), Data Sensitivity (what data they handle), and toggle regulatory designations: CPS 230 Material Service Provider, SOCI Critical Infrastructure, NDB Applicable, and ISM classification level. These settings directly affect the risk score via multipliers.

Why did my certification flip to EXPIRED?

Certifications with an expiry date are automatically marked EXPIRED the day after the expiry date passes. A daily cron job runs this check at 03:00 UTC. Update the certification's expiry date to a future date and change the status back to VERIFIED to restore it. This automatic expiry helps you stay aware of certifications that need renewal or replacement.

What is the agent state panel and why does it show 'partial coverage'?

The Agent State panel (visible on the Operations tab for superusers) shows the status of the tracked pipeline identities for the latest scan, including the 7 domain agents and utility/review/enrichment workers. If you see 'Partial coverage' (e.g. 'cybersecurity last succeeded 12 days ago'), it means that identity has not run recently, indicating a data gap. For example, a stale cybersecurity agent may miss new vulnerabilities. Use the Retry button where available to force that identity to run immediately, or check the error message to diagnose rate-limiting or API issues.

Why was my vendor's risk narrative regenerated?

The risk narrative is regenerated automatically when new scan results represent a material change: a new CRITICAL or HIGH finding, total findings grew/shrank >20%, or a new type of finding was detected. When regeneration happens, a banner appears with the reason (e.g. '4 new findings added'). The new narrative reflects the current risk landscape. If you made manual edits to the narrative, they are preserved; regeneration only happens for machine-generated narratives.

What are Incidents and how do they affect my risk score?

Incidents are public breach and outage events discovered through news and breach databases (HaveIBeenPwned, security news). They appear on the Incidents tab and can amplify reputational risk by up to 30 points depending on severity. Critical incidents (large breaches, ransomware) add more uplift than minor incidents. Incidents linked to findings you've already recorded are marked to avoid double-counting. Use incidents as context when assessing reputational and operational resilience risk.

What does 'Extended+, no ELS' mean?

The Extended+, no ELS triage toggle filters the Products tab to show only products where at least one version is in Extended or End-of-Life lifecycle phase AND none of those versions are covered by paid Extended Lifecycle Support (ELS or ESU). These are the highest-priority products to address because they have no vendor security patches available and no paid support safety net. Products where the vendor offers ELS/ESU (amber ELS badge) are excluded from this filter - paid extended support reduces but does not eliminate the risk, and those products appear in the regular Extended phase filter. Use this toggle during procurement reviews, renewal negotiations, or when triaging risk score increases to quickly identify the most urgent lifecycle gaps.

How are versions grouped in the Products tab?

Products are grouped by their master product (e.g. Red Hat Enterprise Linux) with version rows nested underneath (e.g. RHEL 9, RHEL 8, RHEL 7). Click the expand chevron on any master product to see its version breakdown with individual lifecycle phase badges. The master row shows aggregate phase pills summarising how many versions are in each phase - for example '2 End of Life, 1 Extended'. SaaS products with no meaningful version distinction (e.g. a cloud-hosted service) show a single phase badge inline on the master row without an expand affordance. Products whose version data is still being populated by the scan pipeline show as flat rows until the backfill completes - this is expected for recently-added vendors.

Worked Example

Investigating a vendor risk score increase

Scenario: Your APRA-regulated organisation uses a cloud payroll provider classified as a CPS 230 Material Service Provider. After a scheduled scan, their risk score jumps from 28 to 55. 1. Go to the Findings tab and sort by "Newest". You find 3 new HIGH findings: an expired TLS certificate on their API endpoint, an open Elasticsearch port (9200), and a missing DMARC record. 2. Check the Risk tab to see which domains were impacted - Cybersecurity jumped from 22 to 48 due to the open port and TLS issues. 3. On the Compliance tab, note that the TLS finding maps to ISM control ISM-1139 (encrypted communications) and CPS 234 Attachment B (encryption of data in transit). 4. Acknowledge each finding, set status to IN_PROGRESS, and contact the vendor via the assessment portal requesting remediation within 14 days. 5. After the vendor confirms fixes, trigger a re-scan. The score drops back to 30 once findings are auto-resolved. 6. Document the incident timeline in the vendor's contract review notes for your next CPS 230 board report.

Related Pages

VendorsFindingsReportsRisk ScoringControlsCompliance

Vendor Findings

All security findings for this specific vendor. Filter, sort, and triage findings directly from the vendor context.

Vendor-scoped finding view

This shows only findings linked to this vendor - the same data as the main Findings page but pre-filtered. The domain summary cards at the top show finding counts per risk domain (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, Geopolitical & Sovereign). Click any card to filter the list to that domain across all pages. The filter selection persists as you navigate, and pagination reflects the filtered result set. Use severity, status, and domain filters to narrow further.

Bulk triage

Select multiple findings with checkboxes and use bulk actions: change status, export, or create tickets. Bulk actions apply only within this vendor context.

Finding trends

The trend chart shows new vs resolved findings over time for this vendor. A growing backlog (new > resolved) indicates the vendor is not keeping up with remediation.

Are these the same findings as on the main Findings page?

Yes. This is the same data, pre-filtered to this vendor. Status changes made here are reflected on the main Findings page and vice versa.

Can I add org-private findings from here?

Yes. Click "Add Finding" to create an org-private finding linked to this vendor. Org-private findings are only visible to your organisation and do not affect other organisations sharing this vendor.

Why do some findings show an [Org] badge?

The [Org] badge indicates org-private findings - created manually by your organisation. These are separate from vendor-level findings discovered by scans and are only visible to your organisation.

Related Pages

FindingsVendor DetailRemediation

Vendor Findings

Security findings discovered by the scan pipeline for this vendor. Triage, prioritise, and track remediation of vulnerabilities, misconfigurations, and compliance gaps. Default view groups findings by risk domain.

Domain-grouped view

By default, findings are grouped by risk domain (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance, etc.). Each group header shows the domain name, finding count, and highest severity badge. Collapse or expand groups to focus on specific domains. Toggle to flat list view using the view switcher if you prefer a traditional list.

Severity-based triage

Start with CRITICAL findings — these represent active exploitation risk, exposed credentials, or severe misconfigurations. Then work through HIGH, MEDIUM, and LOW. Use the severity filter to focus your review session.

Finding status workflow

Each finding progresses through: OPEN (newly discovered) → IN_PROGRESS (remediation underway) → PENDING_REVIEW (awaiting approval) → RESOLVED (confirmed fixed). Findings can also be marked ACCEPTED if remediation is not feasible. The system automatically resolves findings (auto-resolved) when subsequent scans confirm the issue is gone.

Bulk actions

Select multiple findings with checkboxes for bulk status changes, export, or ticket creation. Bulk actions apply only to findings visible in the current filter, so set your filters first.

Org-private findings

Click "Add Finding" to create an org-private finding visible only to your organisation. Use this for manual observations, internal audit notes, or issues found outside ChainShield's automated scanning.

What is the difference between RESOLVED and auto-resolved?

RESOLVED is set manually when you confirm a fix. Auto-resolved (SYSTEM_RESOLVED) is set automatically when a subsequent scan no longer detects the issue. Both indicate the finding is resolved, but auto-resolved provides automated verification.

Why do some findings have source page URLs?

AI agents record the specific web pages they crawled to produce a finding. Click the source URL to verify the evidence yourself. This transparency helps you assess whether the finding is accurate and relevant.

Related Pages

FindingsRisk TabCompliance

Vendor Health

Service level commitments, incident history, a 0–100 health score, and risk trend chart for this vendor. Supports CPS 230 operational resilience monitoring.

Service levels and DR capability

The Service Levels & DR section shows SLA uptime targets, actual performance, RTO/RPO targets, and disaster recovery capability. This data is populated automatically when a BCP/Operational Resilience assessment is completed, or can be added manually. Source authority: assessment wins over manual entry.

Incident history

The Incident History section tracks service disruptions - outages, degradations, security incidents, data breaches, and planned maintenance. Add incidents manually or they will be populated by the agent in Phase 2. Use the Archive action to remove incorrectly logged incidents. Use findings instead of incidents for org-specific impact records.

Health score metrics

The health score combines 8 metrics: remediation velocity (25%), assessment responsiveness (15%), incident frequency (15%), risk trend (15%), contract currency (10%), scan freshness (10%), exit plan readiness (5%), and BCP readiness (5%). Higher is better.

Risk trend chart

The risk trend chart shows how the vendor's composite risk score has changed over time for your organisation. A rising trend indicates deteriorating risk posture and may warrant escalation. The chart is only visible when your organisation has a risk context configured for this vendor.

Performance ratings

Scores map to ratings: Healthy (75+), Needs Attention (50–74), At Risk (25–49), Critical (<25). Action items at the bottom highlight specific improvements needed for each underperforming metric.

Improving a low health score

Focus on the highest-weighted metrics first. Remediation velocity (25%) improves when the vendor resolves findings quickly. Assessment responsiveness (15%) improves when questionnaires are completed promptly. Contract currency (10%) improves when contracts are renewed before expiry.

Scan health - DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE

When a vendor shows a "Scan incomplete" banner with a count like "3 of 30 active controls could not be assessed", this indicates the pipeline encountered infrastructure or resource limits during the scan (e.g. one of the analysis agents hit its budget or failed). ChainShield distinguishes this from "vendor has no evidence" - DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE means "we didn't finish looking", not "we looked and found nothing". The affected controls list shows which ones were not assessed and why (e.g. "budget_exhausted", "container_crash"). Remediation: the scan will retry automatically on the next scheduled cadence. If the banner persists across multiple scans, contact your administrator to investigate pipeline health.

EVIDENCE_GAP vs DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE

Two types of gaps appear on a vendor: EVIDENCE_GAP findings (green/low severity) mean ChainShield ran the analysis cleanly, looked for evidence, and found none - this reflects a real control gap for the vendor and should be remediated. DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE findings (grey, no risk contribution) mean ChainShield's pipeline could not finish the assessment - these are an operational signal that the next scan should re-try the analysis. External evidence (from domain agents, enrichment, or questionnaire) overrides both types of gaps and closes them.

Where does the health score appear?

The health score shows on this tab, as a column on the Vendors list page, and as a portfolio average on the Reports page. Use it to compare vendor performance across your portfolio.

How often does the health score update?

The score recalculates after every scan, assessment completion, finding status change, or contract update. It reflects the vendor's current state, not a point-in-time snapshot.

Where is the risk trend chart?

The risk trend chart is on the Health tab (previously it appeared on the Risk tab). It shows your organisation's composite risk score for this vendor over time. If you do not see it, your organisation may not have a risk context configured for this vendor.

How do I track vendor SLA performance?

Use the Service Levels & DR section at the top of the Health tab. Enter SLA uptime targets, actual performance, and RTO/RPO values manually, or complete a BCP/Operational Resilience assessment to have them populated automatically. This supports CPS 230 material service provider monitoring.

What is the incident log used for?

The Incident History section records past service disruptions - outages, degradations, security incidents, and data breaches. It provides an audit trail for CPS 230 compliance and helps track vendor reliability over time. For org-specific incident impact (e.g., data you specifically lost), use findings instead - findings are org-scoped while incidents are vendor-level facts.

How is service level data populated from assessments?

When a vendor submits a BCP or Operational Resilience assessment, ChainShield automatically extracts RTO/RPO targets, DR capability, test frequency, and other fields into the service levels record. The extraction runs immediately on submission. You can also add or update the data manually at any time.

What is the difference between BCP records and the incident log?

BCP records (in the Governance tab) track planned business continuity exercises - scheduled tests with pass/fail results. The incident log (here in the Health tab) tracks unplanned disruptions - actual outages and incidents. They complement each other: BCP records show readiness, incidents show what actually happened.

Why does a domain show "Stale" even though I can see findings for it?

Freshness in the Per-Domain Agent Cadence panel tracks the last time the agent ran and collected new evidence, not the existence of findings. A domain can show Stale if the pipeline has not re-run that agent within the past 7 days, even if findings from a previous scan are still present and open. Stale does not mean the findings are wrong - it means the evidence has not been refreshed recently. Use "Rescan stale domains" to queue a targeted retry for that agent.

Related Pages

VendorsReportsFindings

Vendor Incidents

Public breach and security incidents discovered for this vendor through HaveIBeenPwned (HIBP), ransomware signals, and corroborated news context. Confirmed incidents route to incident_history (Threat Exposure & Incident History) findings so breach and ransomware evidence scores in the cybersecurity domain.

How incidents are discovered

ChainShield queries the HaveIBeenPwned breach database and ransomware/security-news sources. HIBP and confirmed ransomware matches write incident evidence; news-based incidents require corroboration before they are promoted. Single-source rumours are discarded to prevent inflated risk scores.

Severity levels and score uplift

Incidents are rated critical, major, minor, or informational. Confirmed cyber incidents are materialised as incident_history findings with evidence references, so they flow through the normal finding, review, scoring, and narrative path instead of a separate reputational uplift shortcut.

Relationship to findings

Incident evidence rows are linked to the corresponding incident_history finding when a confirmed breach, ransomware listing, credential exposure, or threat-intel signal is materialised. This prevents double counting while keeping the incident visible on the vendor record and the finding traceable to source evidence.

Freshness and cadence

The incident enrichment pipeline runs automatically after every scan completes, and on a 30-day background cadence for vendors that have not been recently scanned. To force an immediate refresh, trigger a manual scan from the Scans tab.

Mark as impacting my organisation

When an incident affects your vendor relationship, use the "Mark as impacting my org" action to create an organisation-specific record of the impact. This action creates a organisation_vendor_incidents row that tracks your org's awareness and response. Status transitions (active, archived) are audit-logged for compliance. Use this to differentiate between incidents the vendor experienced (vendor-level) and incidents that directly impacted your organisation (org-level).

What is the difference between incidents here and the incident log on the Health tab?

The Health tab incident log records service disruptions - outages, degradations, and planned maintenance that you manually track for CPS 230 purposes. The Incidents tab here shows publicly reported security and data breach events discovered automatically from external sources (HIBP, ransomware feeds, and corroborated news context). They serve different purposes: the Health log is for operational reliability monitoring; this tab is for cyber incident and threat-exposure intelligence.

Why does an incident show as linked to a finding?

When confirmed incident evidence is materialised, it links to an incident_history finding so the event is visible in both places. Linked incidents do not add a separate score uplift - the finding itself contributes through the cybersecurity domain. This prevents double-counting the same breach event.

Why might a known breach not appear here?

Incidents only appear after enrichment runs (post-scan or background cadence). If a breach is very recent, the monthly LLM budget may already be consumed (3 calls per month per vendor), delaying news-based detection until the next month. HIBP matches always run regardless of the LLM budget. Trigger a manual scan to force enrichment.

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsRisk scoring explained

Vendor Overview

The Overview tab is your starting point for any vendor. It shows headline risk scores, metadata, lifecycle stage, discovered web resources, and risk context settings that tailor scoring to your relationship with this vendor.

Reading the risk domain radar

The radar chart visualises scores across all 7 ChainShield domains (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, Geopolitical & Sovereign). A larger shaded area means higher risk. Focus remediation on the domains that extend furthest from the centre.

Risk context settings matter

Set Business Criticality, Data Sensitivity, and regulatory designations (CPS 230 Material Service Provider, SOCI Critical Infrastructure) in the Risk Context panel. These amplify or dampen the risk score via multipliers. A payroll provider handling PII should have high data sensitivity; a marketing analytics tool probably does not.

Discovered Pages (Resources)

The Discovered Pages section shows web pages found during scans: privacy policy, terms of service, trust centre, security page, and more. Click any link to verify the vendor's public-facing policies. ChainShield uses deterministic discovery plus an optional LLM agent to find hard-to-discover pages. Pending URLs (low confidence) are marked for review (US-PIPE-767).

Lifecycle stage tracking

Use the Stage dropdown to track where this vendor sits in your management process: Prospect, Onboarding, Active, Under Review, Offboarding, or Archived. Stage transitions are audit-logged with timestamps. Vendors in Onboarding or Under Review show a compliance context banner.

AI overview panel

Below the risk score, the AI overview panel surfaces the AI-generated analysis from the synthesis agent. It shows the overall risk narrative (expandable for full text), primary concerns as an actionable list with severity indicators, and recommended remediation steps. The confidence score indicates how confident the AI is in this assessment. For new vendors that have not yet been scanned, the panel is empty. The narrative_review_status badge shows whether the analysis has been reviewed by a superuser (Pending = awaiting review, Approved = superuser has reviewed).

Why is the AI overview missing?

The AI overview only appears after the first scan completes. The synthesis agent runs at the end of the scan pipeline and generates the risk_narrative, primary_concerns, and mitigation_plan. If a vendor was scanned but the overview is still empty, contact your administrator to trigger a manual rescore via the risk recalculation endpoint.

How do I change a vendor's tier or lifecycle stage?

Use the "Stage" dropdown in the vendor header. Tier is managed via the organisation_vendors junction - update it in the vendor context settings or via the admin vendor tiers page. Both changes are audit-logged.

What is Business Criticality and why does it affect the score?

Business Criticality measures how important this vendor is to your operations. A critical vendor (e.g., cloud hosting provider) receives a score multiplier that increases the weight of findings. This ensures your risk dashboard reflects operational reality, not just technical exposure.

What does the vendor AI overview show?

The AI overview panel below the risk score displays the synthesis agent's analysis: an overall risk narrative explaining the vendor's security posture, primary concerns listed with severity indicators, and recommended remediation steps. The confidence score (0-100%) shows how confident the AI is in this assessment. For new vendors with no scans, the panel is empty. The narrative_review_status indicates whether a superuser has approved the analysis.

Why is the AI overview missing for my vendor?

The AI overview appears only after the first scan completes. The synthesis agent runs at the end of the scan pipeline to generate the risk narrative, concerns, and remediation plan. If a vendor has been scanned but the overview is empty, contact your administrator to trigger a manual rescore. Once approved by a superuser, the narrative_review_status updates to Approved.

Related Pages

Risk TabFindingsSettings

Vendor Portal

External-facing portal where vendors can view their risk profile, respond to assessments, upload evidence, and track remediation requests without needing a ChainShield account.

Portal access

Vendors access the portal via a unique link sent with assessment invitations. No account creation is required. The link is scoped to a specific vendor-organisation relationship and expires based on the assessment deadline.

Assessment completion

Vendors complete questionnaires through a guided multi-step wizard. Responses auto-save every 30 seconds so progress is not lost if the session is interrupted. A final review step allows vendors to check all answers before submission.

Evidence upload

Vendors can upload supporting documents (ISO certificates, penetration test reports, SBOMs, SOC 2 reports) directly through the portal. Files are scanned for malware and stored in encrypted storage.

Sub-processor declarations

Vendors can declare their sub-contractors and fourth-party service providers through the portal. Each declaration captures the sub-processor name, services provided, data access level, geographic location, and consent status. This supports supply chain transparency requirements under CPS 230 and SOCI.

BCP/DR test results

Vendors can submit results from Business Continuity Plan (BCP) and Disaster Recovery (DR) tests. Each submission captures the test date, type (tabletop, simulation, or full), scope, result (pass/partial/fail), and recovery time achieved. Evidence documents can be attached. This feeds into operational resilience scoring under CPS 230.

What are sub-processor declarations?

Sub-processor declarations let vendors disclose which third parties (sub-contractors, cloud providers, outsourced services) have access to your data. Each entry includes the data access level and geographic location, helping you assess fourth-party risk and meet regulatory transparency requirements.

Why do vendors need to submit BCP/DR test results?

Business Continuity and Disaster Recovery testing demonstrates that a vendor can maintain service during disruptions. Results feed into the operational resilience domain of the risk score. Regular testing (at least annually) is expected under CPS 230 and critical infrastructure frameworks.

Related Pages

AssessmentsVendors

Vendor Portal Entry

Magic-link access to the vendor portal. Your unique portal link grants you temporary access to view findings and submit assessments without creating a ChainShield account.

How token access works

The organisation that invited you generated a unique portal link for you. This link contains a security token that grants access for a limited time (typically 30 days). If your link expires, contact the organisation that sent you the invitation.

No account required

You do not need a ChainShield account to use the vendor portal. Simply click your unique portal link to access your findings and assessments. The token is your security key.

Link expired?

If your portal link has expired, contact the organisation that invited you. They can generate a fresh portal link for you. For technical support, contact support@chainshield.com.au.

Your progress is auto-saved

Your answers are automatically saved every 30 seconds and whenever you move between steps. If you close the browser, your progress is waiting when you return — use "Save and exit" to save and leave at any time.

Uploading evidence and documents

Some questions ask for evidence files — certifications (SOC 2, ISO 27001, IRAP), audit reports, incident response plans, data protection policies, or an SBOM. Add a brief note (up to 2000 characters) with each upload explaining what it covers or which control it addresses. On mobile, use "Take photo" to photograph documents directly. File size limit is 10 MB per question.

Reviewing before submit

The final step shows all your answers for review before submission. Click any section heading to edit your responses. Once you submit, your answers are sent immediately to the assessing organisation.

Browser back button

The browser back button steps through the questionnaire sections rather than navigating away. To leave the questionnaire, use the "Save and exit" link in the header.

What if I need to stop and come back?

Use "Save and exit" to save your progress and leave. When you return via your assessment link, you will see a welcome-back screen showing how far you got. Choose "Resume" to continue from where you left off.

Can I change answers after submitting?

Once you click "Submit Assessment", your answers are final. If you need to correct something, contact the assessing organisation who can reset the assessment.

What file types can I upload?

Upload PDFs, images (JPG, PNG, HEIC), Word documents, or spreadsheets. Maximum 10 MB per file. If your file is too large, compress or split it before uploading.

Related Pages

View FindingsDashboard

Vendor Portal Home

Authenticated vendor portal dashboard. View your risk score, outstanding findings, and assessment progress after signing in.

Persistent access

After accepting your portal invitation and signing in, you have persistent access to the vendor portal. Your session remains active so you can return anytime to check updates.

Risk score tracking

Your risk score updates automatically as new scans are completed and findings are remediated. Check this page regularly to stay informed of changes to your vendor risk profile.

Related Pages

View FindingsYour Profile

Vendor Products

Products and services offered by this vendor, discovered by AI agents. Track which products your organisation uses and link them to known CVE vulnerabilities via CPE identifiers.

Mark products you use

Toggle "We use this" on products your organisation actually consumes. This focuses risk scoring on relevant products and filters out noise from the vendor's broader catalogue. Hidden products are excluded from risk calculations.

CPE and CVE linking

Products with a CPE (Common Platform Enumeration) identifier are automatically cross-referenced against the NVD (National Vulnerability Database — official US vulnerability registry) for known CVE vulnerabilities. Active CVEs are tracked as vulnerabilities, not individual findings — they show up as "N vulnerabilities tracked" under the Cybersecurity domain's attack surface control on the Risk tab, and in full detail on the Vulnerabilities tab.

Software Bill of Materials (SBOM) ingestion

Upload Software Bill of Materials (SBOM) files in CycloneDX or SPDX format to enrich the product inventory. SBOMs provide precise component-level visibility into the vendor's software supply chain, improving CVE detection accuracy. Click "Upload SBOM" and provide the file, plus optional companion files (a detached PGP signature ending .asc, and/or a SHA-256 checksum ending .sha256) to enable verification. Without companions, the SBOM is recorded but marked unverified.

SBOM verification badges

Each SBOM shows a coloured badge indicating its verification status. Green "Verified" means the SBOM was signed by a trusted vendor key and has not been tampered with. Yellow "Unverified" means no signature was provided, the signature uses an unsupported algorithm, or the vendor's key is not yet in the trust store. Red "Invalid" means the signature or checksum failed verification — the file may have been corrupted or tampered with. ChainShield verifies RS256/PS256/ES256 JSF signatures and RSA/ECC PGP signatures; an unsupported algorithm (e.g. EdDSA) shows as Unverified, not Invalid. Contact your administrator to add a vendor key to the trust store.

Vendor-published SBOM sources and history

Administrators can register an HTTPS SBOM source URL for a vendor; ChainShield checks it daily with ETag/SHA-256 caching, imports changed SBOMs, and supersedes the previous active SBOM. Vendor scans also probe /.well-known/sbom.json and /.well-known/sbom.spdx.json automatically. The SBOM history keeps every upload — click any entry for its component count, verification status, and vulnerability analysis, or use "Compare Latest" to see what changed (added/removed components, vulnerability count deltas) between the two most recent uploads.

Pricing & lock-in intelligence

Each product can track contract terms (monthly, annual, multi-year), data export availability, and a pricing page URL. ChainShield computes a lock-in risk rating (Low / Medium / High) from these signals. Low lock-in means monthly billing with data export and open standards. High lock-in means multi-year contracts with no data export. Use this to identify vendors where switching costs could become a risk factor.

Infrastructure & data sovereignty

Product cards show deployment model (SaaS, On-Premise, Hybrid, PaaS, Self-Hosted), hosting providers (AWS, Azure, GCP, etc.), and data regions (e.g. ap-southeast-2). This data is populated by AI agents during scans. Use it to assess data sovereignty risk and cloud concentration across your vendor portfolio.

MSP / reseller vendors show service lines here too

ChainShield has no separate services list or table. When a vendor is classified as an MSP or reseller, the managed and resold service lines it operates are shown in this same product view -- with the same "We use this" toggles, lock-in ratings, and CVE linking -- because there is no distinct services feature. This does not mean the vendor cannot also have first-party products: anything it authors directly is discovered and listed alongside the service lines.

Where do product entries come from?

AI agents discover products by analysing the vendor's website, trust centre, and product documentation pages. Products can also be added manually or via SBOM upload.

What does the "X of Y products" count mean on the vendor list?

On the vendor list, this badge always reads "X of Y products" -- it shows how many of the vendor's discovered products your organisation has marked as "We use this" out of the total, regardless of vendor archetype. The equivalent summary here on the Products tab (the vendor detail page) is entity-aware instead: it reads "X of Y service lines" when the discovered portfolio is entirely managed/resold service lines, "X of Y products" when it is entirely vendor-authored software, and a neutral combined label when the portfolio has both.

Why does this vendor show "service lines" instead of "products"?

This applies only here on the Products tab -- the vendor list badge always says "products". MSPs and resellers primarily offer managed or resold platforms rather than software they author themselves, so when a vendor's discovered portfolio here is entirely service lines, the summary reflects that instead of the generic "products" label. ChainShield does not maintain a separate services table -- service lines are the same underlying product records, just labelled to match what they are. If the vendor also authors its own products alongside its service lines, both are discovered and listed together, and the count uses a neutral combined label rather than mislabelling either group.

How is lock-in risk calculated?

Lock-in risk is computed from three signals: contract terms (monthly = low, annual = medium, multi-year = high), data export availability (available = low, unavailable = high), and use of open standards (future). The overall rating is a weighted combination. If insufficient data exists, the rating is "Unknown".

Where do I get an SBOM for my vendor?

Many vendors publish SBOMs on their website or in their software repository — look for a file ending in .sbom.json (CycloneDX) or .spdx.json (SPDX) on the download page, release notes, or security.txt. If your vendor does not publish one, request it directly; open-source projects can often generate one with tools like Syft or the CycloneDX Maven plugin. A vendor-generated SBOM is preferable to one you reverse-engineer yourself, since the vendor knows their own dependencies best.

What does the SBOM vulnerability gap analysis show?

After an SBOM is uploaded, ChainShield compares its components against the National Vulnerability Database and shows: components with known CVEs (linking to the findings), total CVE count and severity breakdown, and whether the vendor has released patches (cross-checked against the product lifecycle phase). SBOM components can also identify suppliers and package-registry origins (npm, PyPI, Maven, container registries) — these are converted into fourth-party records and linked to known vendors when the supplier name matches.

Related Pages

TechnologiesFindingsAssets

Vendor Questionnaires

Vendor-supplied security questionnaires. These are submitted by vendors and visibility is controlled by the vendor — distinct from org-private self-assessments which vendors cannot see.

Understanding response statuses

Each questionnaire response has a lifecycle: DRAFT (created but not yet sent), SENT (delivered to vendor), VIEWED (vendor has opened the link), IN_PROGRESS (vendor has started answering), COMPLETED (all questions answered and submitted). Overdue responses (past the expiry date) are highlighted so you can prioritise follow-up. The Status column shows an icon + label for quick scanning.

Sending reminders

Use the "Send Reminder" button on any row to email the recipient again. Reminders can be sent once per hour (the button enters a 1-hour cooldown after sending). The system tracks reminder count and last-sent timestamp so you can see engagement history. If a vendor has received 3+ reminders and not started, consider a phone follow-up.

Filtering and sorting

Filter by vendor name, questionnaire title, completion status, or organisation. Sort by sent date, expiry date, or completion date to identify patterns (e.g., which vendors are slowest to respond). Use the "Expires soon" filter to surface questionnaires that will expire in the next 7 days.

Bulk actions

Select multiple questionnaires using the row checkboxes and click "Send Reminders" to notify all selected vendors in one action. This is faster than reminding one at a time and useful for managing large batches of overdue responses.

Response visibility

Each questionnaire can be marked as visible to "requesting org only" or "all linked organisations". The display_level column shows the visibility scope. Responses set to all_linked_orgs are shared across customer organisations to avoid duplicate assessments.

How do I track a vendor questionnaire response?

The questionnaire response appears on the /questionnaires page once it is sent to the vendor. You can see the status (SENT, VIEWED, IN_PROGRESS, COMPLETED), sent date, expiry date, and completion date (if applicable). Send reminders from this page to follow up on stalled responses.

Can I resend a questionnaire if the vendor did not receive it?

Yes. Use the "Send Reminder" button to re-email the questionnaire link to the vendor. A reminder counts towards the reminder count. If the vendor says they did not receive the original email, ask them to check spam folders or provide an alternate email address — you can then delete the original response and create a new one.

What happens if a questionnaire expires?

After the expiry date passes, the vendor portal link stops accepting new submissions (the link shows "This questionnaire has expired"). The response is marked as OVERDUE or EXPIRED in the /questionnaires list. You can still send reminders, or extend the expiry date by editing the assessment if you wish to keep it open.

Can I see what a vendor answered before they submit?

No. Questionnaire responses are in draft until the vendor clicks the final "Submit" button. Once submitted (COMPLETED status), the responses are locked and visible on the response detail page. You can review answers and any uploaded evidence (e.g., certifications, SBOMs) from there.

Related Pages

AssessmentsAssessment TemplatesVendors

Vendor Risk Breakdown

The Risk tab shows the full 7-domain, 30-control score breakdown for this vendor. Each domain is a collapsible section with its score, narrative analysis, and associated findings.

Domain-centric layout

Each of the 7 risk domains (Cybersecurity, Operational Resilience, Compliance & Regulatory, Privacy & Data Protection, Financial & Supply Chain, Reputational, Geopolitical & Sovereign) has its own collapsible section. Expand a domain to see its narrative, findings, and control pass/fail status. Domains with CRITICAL or HIGH findings auto-expand on load.

Domain narratives

Each domain section includes an AI-generated narrative that explains the risk posture in that domain. Narratives are generated by domain-specific AI agents after each scan and stored in the vendor record. If a narrative says "pending", a new scan or domain review will generate it.

Composite score explained

The composite score (0–100) is a weighted average across 7 domains: Cybersecurity (40%), Operational Resilience (20%), Compliance & Regulatory (15%), Privacy & Data Protection (10%), Financial & Supply Chain (5%), Reputational (5%), Geopolitical & Sovereign (5%). Lower is better. The score updates automatically after each scan.

Toggle between views

Switch between the radar chart (good for seeing the overall shape of risk) and the bar chart (good for comparing domain-level scores side by side). Use whichever helps you communicate risk to stakeholders.

Control-level drill-down

Expand any domain to see individual control scores. Each control maps to specific findings. Click a control to jump to the findings driving that score. This is the fastest path from "why is the score high?" to actionable remediation.

Org context multipliers

Business criticality, data sensitivity, CPS 230 Material Service Provider, and SOCI Critical Infrastructure designations apply multipliers to the raw score. If the composite score seems disproportionate to the findings, check these settings on the Overview tab.

Findings vs. vulnerabilities tracked

Each domain header shows "N current findings" — this counts only real, triaged findings rows, matching the Findings tab. For Cybersecurity, CVEs detected via active scanning are shown separately as "N vulnerabilities tracked" so raw CVE exposure never inflates the findings count. Expand the domain’s attack surface control to see individual CVE details.

Why did the risk score change after a scan?

Scans discover new findings or resolve existing ones. New CRITICAL or HIGH findings in heavily-weighted domains (especially Cybersecurity at 40%) cause the biggest score increases. Check the Findings tab sorted by "Newest" to see what changed.

Why does the Cybersecurity domain show "vulnerabilities tracked" separately from "current findings"?

CVEs detected on a vendor’s assets are tracked in a dedicated vulnerability store, not the findings table — they are a distinct signal from triaged findings. The "N vulnerabilities tracked" metric shows raw CVE exposure count; "N current findings" only counts real, triaged findings rows and always matches the Findings tab count for the same vendor and domain. Expand the attack surface control to see the individual CVE list.

Can I override the risk score manually?

No. The score is calculated deterministically from findings, control mappings, and org context. To change the score, either remediate findings (reducing it) or adjust org context settings (business criticality, data sensitivity) if the current settings don't reflect the actual relationship.

What are domain narratives and where do they come from?

Domain narratives are AI-generated summaries that explain why a vendor scores the way it does in each risk domain. They are produced by 7 domain-specific AI agents (one per domain) after each scan completes. The narratives consider findings, severity, control coverage, and contextual factors specific to that domain.

What does control effectiveness mean (Design vs Operating)?

Control effectiveness assessments track how well your vendor implements the 30 active risk controls. Design Effectiveness tests whether the control is properly documented and configured (e.g., does the vendor have a written access control policy?). Operating Effectiveness tests whether the control actually works in practice (e.g., are access requests being reviewed and denied appropriately?). Both assessments can be EFFECTIVE, PARTIALLY_EFFECTIVE, or INEFFECTIVE. Automated signals from finding history are combined with manual override for audit evidence. This supports CPS 230 supply chain risk management and compliance control testing.

Related Pages

ControlsFindingsCompliance

Vendor Scans

Scan history and active job status for this vendor. Monitor scan progress, view phase timelines, and diagnose any issues with the scanning pipeline.

How scans run

Every on-demand scan runs the same full pipeline — there is no separate Quick, Enrich, Full, or Agent mode to choose. Triggering a scan queues discovery, Shodan/Censys enrichment, CVE correlation, AI domain analysis, and compliance mapping in one pass. Scans typically complete in 5–10 minutes.

Monitoring scan phases

Each scan progresses through discovery, poll/ingest, enrichment, domain-agent analysis, review and finding enrichment, post-analysis scoring, domain review, and synthesis. The job status display shows which phase is running and completion percentage.

Handling scan failures

Failed scans show the error phase and message. Common causes: vendor blocking the scanner (try again later), DNS resolution failures (check the vendor's domain is correct), or API rate limiting (wait and retry). Partial results from completed phases are preserved.

How often should I scan a vendor?

ChainShield recommends at least monthly for active vendors, and weekly for CPS 230 Material Service Providers or SOCI Critical Infrastructure vendors. Scheduled scans can be configured in Settings › Scan Policy.

What happens if a scan finds no new issues?

The scan still completes and updates the "last scanned" timestamp. Existing findings are reverified — if a previously detected issue is no longer found, the finding is auto-resolved. A clean scan is a positive signal.

Related Pages

PipelineFindingsVendor Detail

Vendor Technologies

Software technologies detected on this vendor's infrastructure. ChainShield identifies web servers, frameworks, CMS platforms, analytics tools, CDNs, and security products to assess the technology risk surface.

Technology detection sources

Technologies are detected through HTTP response headers, HTML meta tags, JavaScript libraries, and DNS records during scans. Each detection includes the evidence source and confidence level.

Outdated technology risk

Technologies with known end-of-life dates or outdated versions are flagged. Running unsupported software (e.g., PHP 5.x, jQuery 1.x) indicates the vendor may not be maintaining their infrastructure, which contributes to the Cybersecurity domain score.

Technology stack assessment

Review the vendor's technology stack holistically. A modern, well-maintained stack (current frameworks, HTTPS everywhere, security headers) is a positive indicator. Legacy technologies, mixed HTTP/HTTPS, or missing security headers suggest higher operational risk.

Why do some technologies show "unconfirmed"?

Technology detection uses heuristics. Low-confidence detections (e.g., a generic JavaScript library that could be bundled by many frameworks) start as unconfirmed. Administrators can manually confirm or dismiss them.

Does the technology list affect the risk score?

Yes. Outdated or end-of-life technologies generate findings that map to Cybersecurity controls. The more outdated technologies detected, the higher the Cybersecurity domain score.

Why does the technology detail show "N linked assets are not visible in this context"?

The scan pipeline links technologies to the assets where they were detected. If a link was created to an asset in a different vendor context (for example, during a cross-vendor enrichment pass), that asset will not be visible to your organisation. This is expected multi-tenant behaviour - your access boundary is enforced at the asset level. If you see this warning unexpectedly, contact support with the technology name and vendor.

Related Pages

AssetsProductsFindings

Vendor Vulnerabilities

Known CVE vulnerabilities detected for this vendor through active scanning and CVE enrichment. The top panel groups open CVE findings by product version so you can see which version of each product carries the most risk - including EOL-phase amplifiers. The detailed list below shows individual CVEs with CVSS scores, EPSS probabilities, and KEV status.

CVEs by product version

The "CVEs by Product Version" panel at the top groups open CVE findings by product and version. For vendors running multiple versions of the same product (e.g. RHEL 7, 8, and 9), each version appears as a separate row with a CVE count and severity breakdown. Click any version row to jump to the Findings tab pre-filtered to that version. Products with only one version collapse to a single row (no version pill). CVE findings not linked to a product version appear under "Unlinked" at the bottom.

EOL and lifecycle badges

Versions in End-of-Life phase are marked with a red "EOL" badge. EOL versions are no longer receiving security patches, so CVEs on those versions are typically more critical - there is no vendor fix coming. The "MAINT" badge indicates a maintenance-phase version (security patches only, no new features). Use this context when prioritising remediation: upgrade out of EOL versions rather than patching individual CVEs.

CVE metadata

Each vulnerability shows CVSS score (0–10 severity scale), EPSS score (exploitation probability in the next 30 days), attack vector, and KEV flag (Known Exploited Vulnerability, actively exploited in the wild per CISA). Prioritise KEV-flagged and high-EPSS vulns regardless of CVSS score.

CVSS exploitability metrics

Click "Expand" on any vulnerability card to see CVSS exploitability details. For CVSS v3, this shows Attack Complexity (how difficult it is to exploit), Privileges Required (do you need special access?), and User Interaction (does the user need to take action?). For CVSS v2, it shows Access Complexity (L/M/H) and Authentication required (None/Single/Multiple). Lower complexity and fewer privileges required mean easier exploitation. Use these metrics to judge whether a CVE is actually exploitable in your specific environment.

How CVE data is sourced and kept fresh

CVE data is sourced from the National Vulnerability Database (NVD). New CVEs detected through any scan (scanner findings, technology/CPE matching, or SSL/TLS certificate scans) automatically trigger enrichment within ~5 minutes-the system fetches CVSS severity scores, EPSS exploit probabilities, and other metadata from NVD. Every CVE in the catalogue is refreshed daily (06:00 UTC) to capture changes in exploitation likelihood (EPSS scores) and Known Exploited Vulnerability (KEV) status. In rare cases where NVD has not yet published data for a very new CVE, you may see "Severity unavailable" temporarily; daily refresh will populate the data once NVD publishes it.

Relationship to findings

Vulnerabilities are stored separately from findings to avoid polluting the finding list with deterministic CVE data. Findings may still reference CVEs via their cve_id field, but vendor_vulnerabilities is the canonical source for CVE exposure per vendor.

Why is the same CVE listed multiple times?

Each CVE appears once per affected host. If the vendor has CVE-2024-1234 on both their web server and mail server, you will see two rows - one per host. This gives precise remediation targets.

What does the "Unlinked" group in the CVEs by product version panel mean?

"Unlinked" CVE findings have not yet been associated with a specific product version. This can happen for older findings created before product version enrichment was introduced or for CVEs discovered via network scanning rather than CPE matching. These findings still contribute to the vendor's risk score.

How are vulnerability CVSS scores kept current?

CVSS scores are sourced from the NVD (National Vulnerability Database) and refreshed when the CVE enrichment pipeline runs. EPSS scores update daily. The Vulnerabilities tab always shows the latest available data.

What does the EOL badge mean in the product version panel?

EOL (End of Life) means the vendor no longer provides security patches for that product version. CVEs affecting EOL versions typically cannot be remediated by patching - the only fix is to upgrade to a supported version. ChainShield uses the lifecycle phase to amplify risk scores for EOL-version findings.

Related Pages

FindingsProducts & CPEVulnerabilities dashboard

Vulnerabilities

Cross-vendor CVE dashboard. See all known CVEs affecting your vendors in one place — filtered by severity, KEV status, and EPSS probability. Superadmins see all CVEs platform-wide; org users see CVEs for their vendors; MSP users see CVEs for their organisations. Each CVE shows affected vendor count and open finding count.

What is EPSS?

EPSS (Exploit Prediction Scoring System) predicts the probability that a CVE will be exploited in the wild in the next 30 days, based on threat intelligence data. An EPSS of 0.45 means there is a 45% chance of exploitation. A CRITICAL CVE with EPSS 2% is actually lower risk than a HIGH CVE with EPSS 80% — the risk score reflects this. Use the EPSS filter to focus on CVEs with active exploitation likelihood.

What is KEV?

KEV (Known Exploited Vulnerabilities) is a CISA catalogue of CVEs confirmed to be actively exploited by threat actors in the wild. CISA requires federal agencies to patch KEV entries by a due date. For your organisation, KEV status means the risk is real and immediate — prioritise these above other CVEs of the same CVSS score.

Why sort by CVSS and not severity badge?

CVEs are sorted by CVSS score (0-10) descending, then EPSS descending. This means a CRITICAL CVE with EPSS 2% may appear below a HIGH CVE with EPSS 80%, because the HIGH one is more likely to be exploited. The severity badge is informational; the sort order reflects actual risk.

Click a CVE for full details

Each CVE row links to a detail page showing the full description, CWE classification, affected vendors in your organisation, KEV due dates, remediation guidance, and threat intel.

Filtering by status

Use the status filter to narrow CVEs by how your organisation has triaged them: OPEN (newly discovered or in progress), RESOLVED (confirmed fixed), ACCEPTED (risk accepted, not fixing), FALSE_POSITIVE (not applicable), or show all statuses. This helps you track remediation progress across the CVE landscape.

Loading states and skeleton loaders

While CVE data is loading, the page displays animated skeleton loaders in place of CVE rows. This gives you visual feedback that data is being fetched rather than showing a blank page. Large CVE lists may take a few seconds to load depending on network speed and data volume. Filters, sorting, and pagination remain responsive while the load completes.

How is this different from the Findings page?

The Vulnerabilities page groups findings by CVE ID, showing a cross-vendor summary. A single CVE may affect multiple vendors with multiple open findings. The Findings page shows each individual finding record. Use Vulnerabilities to answer "which CVEs affect us?" and Findings to answer "what is the status of each finding?"

How are CVEs scoped to my organisation?

CVEs shown are derived from open findings on vendors linked to your organisation. Superadmins see CVEs across all organisations. If a vendor is shared, you only see findings from that vendor that are visible to your organisation.

Can I view all platform CVEs as a superuser?

Yes. As a superuser, the Vulnerabilities page shows all CVEs affecting vendors across the entire platform. You do not need to select an organisation to see this view. This is useful for monitoring emerging threats, trending vulnerabilities, and cross-customer risk analysis.

Related Pages

FindingsVendorsControlsTechnologies

What Does DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE Mean?

Understanding scan completion status and control assessment coverage.

DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE vs Evidence Gap

DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE means ChainShield's pipeline encountered an error and could not finish assessing a control (e.g. an agent hit its budget or failed). We don't know if the vendor has the control in place or not. EVIDENCE_GAP means we assessed it cleanly and found no evidence — this is a real control gap for the vendor. Only EVIDENCE_GAP findings contribute to risk scoring. DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE findings contribute 0 points and signal "scan is incomplete, will retry next time".

What does "Scan incomplete — N of 30 controls could not be assessed" mean?

This message appears when ChainShield's pipeline encountered infrastructure or resource limits during the vendor's scan. Commonly, one of the AI analysis agents hit its LLM budget or failed to complete. The "N of 30" count references the current control taxonomy that agents actively assess. If any current control was not fully assessed, the banner appears. This is different from the vendor not having evidence — it means ChainShield didn't finish looking. The scan will retry on the next scheduled cadence (usually within 24 hours). If the banner persists across multiple scans, contact your administrator to investigate pipeline health.

Will the scan retry automatically?

Yes. DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE findings trigger automatic rescans on the next pipeline cadence. No manual action is required. However, you can manually trigger a rescan immediately via the Scan button in the vendor detail page header to speed up assessment.

Should I worry about vendors with DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE findings?

Not immediately. DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE findings do not contribute to the risk score (they don't count as either vulnerabilities or gaps). They are an operational signal that the scan is incomplete. Focus on the EVIDENCE_GAP findings that were successfully assessed, and leave the DISCOVERY_INCOMPLETE ones for the next scan to clarify. If the pattern repeats across many vendors or many scans, that's a sign to investigate platform health.

Related Pages

Vendors

Why Can't I Change Scan Frequency for a Vendor?

Understanding why scan cadence is not per-organisation tunable.

Why can't I set a custom scan frequency (daily, monthly, etc.) for my vendors?

Scan cadence is managed at the platform level, not per-organisation. This ensures consistent data freshness across all customers and prevents LLM budget overruns. Letting each organisation request daily scans would burn budget; letting them request quarterly scans creates stale findings. The centralised cadence (default weekly) applies to all vendors. Exceptions: scans trigger immediately when material changes are detected (new org link, tier transition, compliance scope change), and you can manually request on-demand rescans from the vendor detail page at any time.

What if I need more frequent scans for a critical vendor?

You can trigger on-demand rescans at any time via the "Scan" button in the vendor detail page header, or via the `/api/scan` endpoint. This gives you immediate results without waiting for the next scheduled cadence. For true 24/7 monitoring, contact your MSP or administrator to discuss custom arrangements.

I see a "Scan frequency (pipeline-managed)" label in settings. What does that mean?

The label clarifies that scan frequency is no longer a user-tunable setting per vendor. It is retained in the database for historical reasons and audit trails, but it does not control actual scan timing. The pipeline controls timing based on risk tier, change detection, and global cadence policy.

Related Pages

Scan Pipeline ArchitectureVendors

Why Is Industry Sector Set Automatically Now?

Understanding vendor industry auto-classification.

Why does my vendor now have an industry_sector value I didn't set?

ChainShield auto-classifies vendors into industry sectors after each scan (financial_services, healthcare, medical_device, government, critical_infrastructure, manufacturing, education, professional_services, technology). The classifier reads vendor-intrinsic signals: domain TLD, business entity type (from ABR), vendor name keywords, and product stack. Only assignments with high confidence (≥70%) are written. Human-set values (superadmin API) are never overwritten. If the classification is wrong, superadmins can manually correct it via the vendor detail page.

What is the industry sector used for?

The sector is used by downstream regulatory routing adapters (coming in a future release) to determine which compliance checks apply. It also informs the regulatory posture determination — AU-regulated vendors in sensitive sectors (financial, healthcare, government, medical, critical infrastructure) receive heightened control scrutiny. The classification is also visible in the vendor profile for informational purposes.

Can I manually set the industry sector?

Yes, superadmins can manually set or override the industry sector via the vendor detail page or the v1 API. When you manually set it, the `industry_sector_source` field is marked as 'operator' and the classifier will never overwrite it, even on future scans. Manual settings always take precedence.

Related Pages

Vendors

Your Questionnaire Responses

View all security questionnaires that have been sent to your organisation. Each row shows the questionnaire name, status (draft or submitted), and the current sharing setting you have chosen.

What is visibility?

Each questionnaire response has a sharing setting that controls which organisations can view it. "Requesting org only" means only the organisation that sent you the questionnaire can see your answers. "All linked orgs" means any organisation with your company in their vendor portfolio can see the response.

Changing visibility

Click on a questionnaire to open the detail view. You can change the sharing setting there. Widening to "all linked orgs" will prompt a confirmation showing how many additional organisations will gain access.

Submitted responses are locked

Once a questionnaire is submitted (the status shows "Submitted"), the visibility toggle becomes read-only. Contact the assessing organisation if you need to change the visibility of a submitted response.

Related Pages

DashboardView Findings

Can't find what you need? Contact your administrator for further assistance.

Check the platform status page for current availability information.

Press Shift+? on any page for contextual help.